2018 Nissan 370Z | Owner's Manual & Maintenance Information

2018 NISSAN 370Z Z34-D

2018 370Z OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Printing : February 2017 Publication No.: OM18E0N18E 08NJU0 0Z34U0 Printed in U.S.A. For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. T00UM-1TG7D Z34-D Foreword

Welcome to the growing family of new best. When you require any service or tems. NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered have any questions, we will be glad to . to you with confidence. It was produced assist you with the extensive resources ALWAYS provide information using the latest techniques and strict available to us. about the proper use of vehicle quality control. safety features to all occupants READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY of the vehicle. This manual was prepared to help you Before driving your vehicle, read your . ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man- understand the operation and mainte- Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure nance of your vehicle so that you may ual for important safety informa- familiarity with controls and maintenance tion. enjoy many miles of driving pleasure. requirements, assisting you in the safe Please read through this manual before operation of your vehicle. operating your vehicle. MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHI- A separate Warranty Information Book- let explains details about the warranties WARNING CLE covering your vehicle. Additionally, a This vehicle should not be modified. separate Customer Care/Lemon Law IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Modification could affect its perfor- Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to REMINDERS! mance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regula- resolve any concerns you may have Follow these important driving rules tions. In addition, damage or perfor- with your vehicle, as well as clarify your to help ensure a safe and comforta- mance problems resulting from rights under your state’s lemon law. ble trip for you and your passengers! modification will not be covered under In addition to factory installed options, . your vehicle may also be equipped with NEVER drive under the influence the NISSAN warranties. additional accessories installed by NISSAN of alcohol or drugs. or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. . ALWAYS observe posted speed It is important that you familiarize your- limits and never drive too fast WARNING self with all disclosures, warnings, cau- for conditions. tions and instructions concerning proper . ALWAYS give your full attention to Installing an aftermarket On-Board use of such accessories prior to operating driving and avoid using vehicle Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that the vehicle and/or accessory. See a features or taking other actions uses the port during normal driving, NISSAN dealer for details concerning the that could distract you. for example remote insurance com- particular accessories with which your . ALWAYS use your seat belts and pany monitoring, remote vehicle di- vehicle is equipped. appropriate child restraint sys- agnostics, telematics or engine Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle reprogramming, may cause interfer- dates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure ence or damage to vehicle systems. you have access to accurate and up-to- CAUTION We do not recommend or endorse date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Man- the use of any aftermarket OBD This is used to indicate the presence plug-in devices, unless specifically uals and any updates can also be found in of a hazard that could cause minor the Owner section of the NISSAN website approved by NISSAN. The vehicle or moderate personal injury or da- at https://owners.nissanusa.com/now- warranty may not cover damage mage to your vehicle. To avoid or ners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you caused by any aftermarket plug-in reduce the risk, the procedures must have questions concerning any informa- device. be followed carefully. tion in your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN WHEN READING THE MANUAL CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this This manual includes information for all Owner’s Manual for contact information. features and equipment available on IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on THIS MANUAL model, trim level, options selected, or- You will see various symbols in this der, date of production, region or avail- manual. They are used in the following ability. Therefore, you may find ways: information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle. WARNING All information, specifications and illustra- This is used to indicate the presence tions in this manual are those in effect at of a hazard that could cause death or the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the serious personal injury. To avoid or right to change specifications, perfor- reduce the risk, the procedures must mance, design or component suppliers be followed precisely. without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision up- mize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in Arrows in an illustration that are similar to a well-ventilated area and wear those above call attention to an item in gloves or wash your hands fre- the illustration. quently when servicing your vehicle. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 For more information go to www. WARNING P65Warnings.ca.gov. CANADA’S PRODUCTS CONTAINING WARNING MERCURY REGULATIONS Engine Exhaust, some of its consti- The xenon headlights (if so tuents, and certain vehicle compo- equipped) on your vehicle contain SIC0697 nents contain or emit chemicals mercury. If these parts require dis- known to the State of California to posal, the repair facility vehicle cause cancer and birth defects or dismantler or recycler should make If you see the symbol above, it means “Do other reproductive harm. In addition, not do this” or “Do not let this happen”. certain fluids contained in vehicles sure they are recycled or disposed and certain products of component of as hazardous waste in accor- wear contain or emit chemicals dance with applicable laws. For known to the State of California to information on safe handling pro- If you see a symbol similar to those above cause cancer and birth defects or cedures, disposal and recycling op- in an illustration, it means the arrow other reproductive harm. Operating, points to the front of the vehicle. servicing and maintaining a passen- tions in accordance with Canada’s ger vehicle or off-road vehicle can Products Containing Mercury Reg- expose you to chemicals including ulations, go to http://www.ec.gc. engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, ca/mercure-mercury/. Arrows in an illustration that are similar to phthalates, and lead, which are those above indicate movement or ac- known to the State of California to tion. cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To mini- CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI- SORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca. gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.” Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon Cor- poration and Clarion Co., Ltd.

SiriusXM® services require a subscription after trial period and are sold separately or as a package. The satellite service is available only in the 48 contiguous USA and DC. Sir- iusXM® satellite service is also available in Canada: see www.siriusxm.ca.

© 2017 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written per- mission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will You can write to NISSAN with the infor- NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or ask for the following information: mation on the left at: you would like to provide NISSAN directly . Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. customers with comments or questions, please con- number Nissan North America, Inc. tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- . Vehicle identification number (at- Consumer Affairs Department ment using our toll-free number: tached to the top of the instrument P.O. Box 685003 For U.S. customers panel on the driver’s side) Franklin, TN 37068-5003 1-800-NISSAN-1 or via e-mail at: . Date of purchase (1-800-647-7261) . nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa. For Canadian customers Current odometer reading com . 1-800-387-0122 Your NISSAN dealer’s name For Canadian customers . Your comments or questions Nissan Canada Inc. OR 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: information.centre@nissancana- da.com If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com(for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca(for Canadian customers) We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. Table of Illustrated table of contents 0 Contents Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4 Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Do-it-yourself 8

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

Index 11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint Passenger compartment...... 0-8 System (SRS)...... 0-2 Coupe models ...... 0-8 Coupe models ...... 0-2 Roadster models ...... 0-9 Roadster models ...... 0-3 Cockpit ...... 0-10 Exterior front ...... 0-4 Instrument panel ...... 0-11 Exterior rear ...... 0-5 Meters and gauges ...... 0-12 Coupe models ...... 0-5 Engine compartment ...... 0-13 Roadster models ...... 0-6 VQ37VHR engine model ...... 0-13 Exterior (NISMO models) ...... 0-7 Warning and indicator lights ...... 0-14 SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

8. Front seats (P.1-3)

SSI0648 COUPE MODELS 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags (P.1-30) 1. Seat belts (Page 1-10) 5. Supplemental front-impact air bags — Seat belts with pretensioners (P.1-43) (P.1-30) 2. Head restraints (P.1-6) 6. Child restraint anchor point (for top tether 3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- strap child restraint) (P.1-20) mental air bags (P.1-30) 7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) (P.1-36) 0-2 Illustrated table of contents SSI0649 ROADSTER MODELS 4. Door-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bags (P.1-30) 1. Seat belts (P.1-10) 5. Supplemental front-impact air bags — Seat belts with pretensioners (P.1-43) (P.1-30) 2. Head restraints (P.1-6) 6. Occupant classification sensor (pattern 3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- sensor) (P.1-36) mental air bags (P.1-30) 7. Front seats (P.1-3)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR FRONT

8. Tires — Wheels and tires (P.8-26, P.10-10) — Flat tire (P.6-3) — Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P.2-13, P.5-3) 9. Side turn signal light (if so equipped) — Operation (P.2-34) — Bulb replacement (P.8-22) 10. Doors — Keys (P.3-3) — Door locks (P.3-5) — Intelligent Key system (P.3-7) — Remote keyless entry system (P.3-14)

JVC0933X

1. Hood (P.3-17) 4. Power windows (P.2-46) 2. Headlight and turn signal 5. Outside mirrors (P.3-40) — Operation (P.2-34) 6. License plate installation (P.10-15) — Bulb replacement (P.8-22) 7. Daytime running light 3. Windshield wiper and washer — Operation (P.2-34) — Operation (P.2-32) — Bulb replacement (P.8-22) — Maintenance (P.8-16)

0-4 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR REAR

8. Fuel-filler door — Operation (P.3-35) — Fuel information (P.10-4)

SSI0811 COUPE MODELS 5. Rear hatch (P.3-18) 1. High-mounted stop light (bulb replace- — Intelligent Key system (P.3-7) ment) (P.8-22) — Remote keyless entry system (P.3-14) 2. Rear window defroster (P.2-33) — Rear hatch opener switch (P.3-18) 3. Satellite antenna (if so equipped) (P.4-30) 6. Rear fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-38) 4. Rear view camera (if so equipped) (P.4-17) 7. Rear combination light (bulb replacement) (P.8-22)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5 9. Rear combination light (bulb replacement) (P.8-23) 10. Fuel — Fuel-filler door (P.3-35) — Fuel information (P.10-4)

SSI0812 ROADSTER MODELS 3. Antenna (P.4-30) 1. Trunk lid (P.3-20) 4. Rear window defroster (P.2-33) — Intelligent Key system (P.3-7) 5. Soft top (P.3-23) — Remote keyless entry system (P.3-14) 6. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-21) — Trunk lid opener switch (P.3-20) 7. Rear view camera (if so equipped) (P.4-17) 2. High-mounted stop light (bulb replace- 8. Rear fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-38) ment) (P.8-23)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR (NISMO models)

For NISMO models, the vehicle parts listed below require special care or caution for treating. Refer to the additional information in each section. 1. Performance dampers (P.5-32) 2. Front bumper with an aerodynamic splitter (P.3-34, P.6-22) 3. Daytime running light (P.2-34, P.8-22) 4. Side sill extensions (P.3-34) 5. Rear spoiler (P.3-19, P.7-3) 6. Exhaust pipes (P.3-34, P.6-22) 7. Rear bumper with an aerodynamic diffuser (P.3-34, P.6-22)

JVC0674X

Illustrated table of contents 0-7 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

8. Console box — Power outlet (P.2-42) — USB memory operation (if so equipped) (P.4-47, P.4-59) — iPod® player operation (if so equipped) (P.4-49, P.4-68) 9. Front cup holders (P.2-43)

SSI0650 COUPE MODELS 4. Sun visors (P.3-38) 1. Cargo cover (if so equipped) (P.2-45) 5. Map light (P.2-50) 2. Secondary rear hatch release (under the 6. Inside rearview mirror cargo room carpet) (P.3-20) — Operation (P.3-39) 3. Power windows (P.2-46) — HomeLink® (if so equipped) (P.2-52) — Outside mirror remote control switch 7. Rear parcel box (P.2-45) (P.3-40)

0-8 Illustrated table of contents 6. Console box — Power outlet (P.2-42) — USB memory operation (if so equipped) (P.4-47, P.4-59) — iPod® player operation (if so equipped) (P.4-49, P.4-68) 7. Front cup holders (P.2-43)

JVC0679X ROADSTER MODELS 4. Inside rearview mirror 1. Power windows (P.2-46) — Operation (P.3-39) — Outside mirror remote control switch — HomeLink® (if so equipped) (P.2-52) (P.3-40) 5. Rear parcel box (P.2-45) 2. Sun visors (P.3-38) — Secondary trunk lid release (P.3-22) 3. Map light (P.2-50)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9 COCKPIT

9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) — Menu control switch or tuning switch (P.4-73) — BACK switch (P.4-73) — Phone switch (if so equipped) (P.4-76, P.4-86) — Volume control switches (P.4-73) — Source select switch (P.4-73) 10. Tilt steering lever (P.3-38) 11. Steering wheel — Horn (P.2-38) — Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-30) 12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side) — Cruise control switches (P.5-22) 13. Shift lever — Automatic Transmission (AT) (P.5-12) — Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-17) 14. Parking brake (P.5-21)

SSI0652

1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch 5. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-32) (P.5-30) 6. Hood release handle (P.3-17) 2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch 7. Intelligent Key port (P.5-10) (P.2-34) 8. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-14) 3. Meters and Gauges (combimeter) (P.2-5) 4. Triple meter (P.2-8)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents INSTRUMENT PANEL

6. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-8) 7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2) 8. Seat heater switch (if so equipped) (P.2-38) or Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped) (P.2-40) 9. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster models) (P.3-23) or Rear hatch release switch (for Coupe models) (P.3-19) 10. SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) switch (if so equipped) (P.5-18) 11. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-25) — Rear window defroster switch (P.2-33) 12. Audio system (P.4-30) 13. Power outlet (P.2-42) 14. Glove box (P.2-44) *: Refer to the separate Navigation Sys- tem Owner’s Manual.

SSI0653

1. Ventilator (P.4-24) — Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System 2. Center display and multi-function control (if so equipped) (P.4-76, P.4-86) panel (if so equipped) (P.4-4) or Instru- 3. Front passenger air bag status light ment pocket (if so equipped) (P.2-43) (P.1-36) — Navigation system* (if so equipped) 4. Front passenger supplemental air bag — Vehicle information and setting but- (P.1-30) tons (if so equipped) (P.4-8) 5. Fuse box cover (P.8-18)

Illustrated table of contents 0-11 METERS AND GAUGES

SSI0521

10. Odometer/Twin trip odometer control knob (P.2-6) 11. Odometer/Twin trip odometer (P.2-6) 12. Engine oil temperature gauge (P.2-8) 13. Voltmeter (P.2-9) 14. Clock (P.2-9, P.2-27)

SSI0509

1. ENTER/NEXT switch (P.2-23) 7. Vehicle information display (P.2-19) 2. Fuel gauge (P.2-8) 8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-7) 3. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-10) 9. Transmission position indicator (if so 4. Tachometer (P.2-7) equipped) (P.2-18) 5. Speedometer (P.2-6) — SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) indicator (if so equipped) (P.5-18) 6. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-37)

0-12 Illustrated table of contents ENGINE COMPARTMENT

13. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-18)

JVC0785X VQ37VHR ENGINE MODEL 7. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmis- sion models) (P.8-9) 1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-18) 8. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-8) 2. Battery (P.8-11) 9. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-10) 3. Radiator filler cap (P.8-4) 10. Air cleaner (P.8-15) 4. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-6) 11. Drive belt location (P.8-14) 5. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-6) 12. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-4) 6. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-9) Illustrated table of contents 0-13 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Indica- Warning Name Page Name Page tor light light Cruise indicator light 2-15 Anti-lock Braking System 2-11 (ABS) warning light Exterior light indicator 2-15 Front passenger air bag Automatic Transmission 2-16 status light (AT) check warning light (if 2-11 so equipped) High beam indicator light 2-16

Malfunction Indicator Light 2-16 Brake warning light 2-11 (MIL) Rear fog light indicator light 2-17 (if so equipped) Charge warning light 2-12 Security indicator light 2-17 Engine oil pressure warning 2-12 light Soft top indicator light 2-17 (Roadster models) Intelligent Key system 2-12 warning light SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) indicator (if so 2-17 Low tire pressure warning 2-13 light equipped) Transmission position indi- Master warning light 2-14 2-18 cator light (if so equipped) Seat belt warning light 2-14 Turn signal/hazard indica- 2-18 tor lights Supplemental air bag 2-14 Vehicle Dynamic Control warning light 2-18 (VDC) off indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control 2-15 (VDC) warning light

0-14 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats ...... 1-2 Child restraints ...... 1-19 Front seats ...... 1-3 Precautions on child restraints ...... 1-19 Head restraints/headrests ...... 1-6 Top tether strap child restraint (for Adjustable head Coupe models) ...... 1-20 restraint/headrest components ...... 1-7 Forward-facing child restraint installation Remove (if so equipped) ...... 1-7 using the seat belts (for Coupe models) ...... 1-22 Install (if so equipped) ...... 1-7 Installing top tether strap (for Adjust (if so equipped) ...... 1-8 Coupe models) ...... 1-26 Front-seat Active Head Restraints (if Booster seats...... 1-26 so equipped) ...... 1-9 Supplemental restraint system ...... 1-30 Seat belts ...... 1-10 Precautions on supplemental Precautions on seat belt usage ...... 1-10 restraint system ...... 1-30 Pregnant women ...... 1-12 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats) ...... 1-36 Injured persons ...... 1-12 Front seat-mounted side-impact and roof/ Three-point type seat belt ...... 1-12 door-mounted curtain side-impact and Seat belt extenders ...... 1-15 rollover (if so equipped) supplemental air Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-15 bag systems ...... 1-41 Child safety ...... 1-16 Seat belts with pretensioners Infants ...... 1-16 (front seats) ...... 1-43 Small children (for Coupe models) ...... 1-16 Supplemental air bag warning labels ...... 1-44 Larger children ...... 1-17 Supplemental air bag warning light ...... 1-44 For Roadster models ...... 1-18 Repair and replacement procedure ...... 1-45 SEATS

. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets. . The seatback should not be re- SSS0133 clined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most ef- well back and upright in the seat fective when the passenger sits WARNING with both feet on the floor and well back and straight up in the adjust the seat belt properly. See seat. If the seatback is reclined, . Do not ride in a moving vehicle “Precautions on seat belt usage” the risk of sliding under the lap when the seatback is reclined. (P.1-10). belt and being injured is increased. This can be dangerous. The . After adjustment, gently rock in shoulder belt will not be against the seat to make sure it is se- your body. In an accident, you curely locked. could be thrown into it and re- . ceive neck or other serious inju- Do not leave children unattended CAUTION inside the vehicle. They could ries. You could also slide under . the lap belt and receive serious unknowingly activate switches When adjusting the seat posi- internal injuries. or controls. Unattended children tions, be sure not to contact any could become involved in serious moving parts to avoid possible . For the most effective protection accidents. injuries and/or damages. when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit 1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system FRONT SEATS Front power seat adjustment Operating tips: . The power seat motor has an auto- reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch. . Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

SSS0928

Forward and backward (if so equipped): occupants to rest when the vehicle is Moving the switch forward or back- stopped and the transmission is in the P ward will slide the seat forward or back- (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with ward to the desired position. the parking brake fully applied. Reclining (if so equipped): Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precau- tions on seat belt usage” (P.1-10).) The seatback may also be reclined to allow

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 Front manual seat adjustment Forward and backward: Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position. Reclining: Type A (if so equipped): To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward again, pull the lever and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

SSS0394 Type B (if so equipped): To recline the seatback, turn the adjusting dial to- Type A (if so equipped) ward the rear of the vehicle and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, turn the adjusting dial toward the front of the vehicle and lean your body forward. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. See “Precau- tions on seat belt usage” (P.1-10). The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied. JVR0389X Type B (if so equipped)

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system JVR0391X SPA1715 SSS0684 Type B (if so equipped) NOTE: Seat lifter (if so equipped) Lumbar support (if so equipped) When reclining the seat, do not allow Turn either dial to adjust the angle and The lumbar support feature provides low- the seatback to contact the roof. Doing height of the seat cushion to the desired er back support to the driver. so may leave temporary indentations position. Move the lever up or down to adjust the on the seat. seatback lumbar area.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

. Proper Adjustment: WARNING — For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the Head restraints/headrests supple- center of your ear is approximately ment the other vehicle safety sys- level with the center of the head tems. They may provide additional restraint/headrest. protection against injury in certain — If your ear position is still higher rear end collisions. Adjustable head than the recommended alignment, restraints/headrests must be ad- place the head restraint/headrest justed properly, as specified in this at the highest position. section. Check the adjustment after . If the head restraint/headrest has someone else uses the seat. Do not been removed, ensure that it is re- attach anything to the head re- installed and locked in place before straint/headrest stalks or remove riding in that designated seating posi- the head restraint/headrest. Do not SSS1007 tion. use the seat if the head restraint/ The illustration shows the seating posi- headrest has been removed. If the tions equipped with head restraints/ head restraint/headrest was re- headrests. moved, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before Indicates the seating position is an occupant uses the seating posi- equipped with a head restraint. tion. Failure to follow these instruc- . Your vehicle is equipped with a head tions can reduce the effectiveness of restraint/headrest that may be inte- the head restraint/headrest. This grated, adjustable or non-adjustable. may increase the risk of serious . Adjustable head restraints/headrests injury or death in a collision. have multiple notches along the stalk to lock them in a desired adjustment position. . The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0992 SSS1037 SSS1038 ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ REMOVE (if so equipped) INSTALL (if so equipped) HEADREST COMPONENTS Use the following procedure to remove 1. Align the head restraint/headrest 1. Removable head restraint/headrest the head restraint/headrest. stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest 2. Multiple notches 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position. is facing the correct direction. The 3. Lock knob stalk with the adjustment notch 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 4. Stalks must be installed in the hole with the 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest lock knob . from the seat. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push 4. Store the head restraint/headrest the head restraint/headrest down. properly in a secure place so it is not 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ loose in the vehicle. headrest before an occupant uses 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head the seating position. restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 SSS0997 SSS1035 SSS1036

ADJUST (if so equipped) Raise Lower Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull To lower, push and hold the lock knob center is level with the center of your ears. it up. and push the head restraint/headrest If your ear position is still higher than the down. recommended alignment, place the head Make sure the head restraint/headrest is restraint/headrest at the highest posi- positioned so the lock knob is engaged in Make sure the head restraint/headrest is tion. the notch before riding in that designated positioned so the lock knob is engaged in seating position. the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions. The front head restraints have multiple adjustment notches. Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints as described in this section.

SSS0508 FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD RE- STRAINTS (if so equipped) The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries. Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active Head Restraints operate only in Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat SSS0136A belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0134A

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system buckle. WARNING . Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may . Every person who drives or rides reduce its effectiveness. in this vehicle should use a seat . belt at all times. Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. . The seat belt should be properly . adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to Never carry more people in the do so may reduce the effective- vehicle than there are seat belts. ness of the entire restraint sys- . If the seat belt warning light tem and increase the chance or glows continuously while the severity of injury in an accident. ignition is turned ON with all Serious injury or death can occur doors closed and all seat belts if the seat belt is not worn prop- fastened, it may indicate a mal- SSS0016 erly. function in the system. Have the . Always route the shoulder belt system checked. It is recom- over your shoulder and across mended you visit a NISSAN dealer your chest. Never put the belt for this service. behind your back, under your . No changes should be made to arm or across your neck. The belt the seat belt system. For exam- should be away from your face ple, do not modify the seat belt, and neck, but not falling off your add material or install devices shoulder. that may change the seat belt . Position the lap belt as low and routing or tension. Doing so may snug as possible AROUND THE affect the operation of the seat HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt belt system. Modifying or tam- worn too high could increase the pering with the seat belt system risk of internal injuries in an may result in serious personal accident. injury. . SSS0014 . Be sure the seat belt tongue is Once a seat belt pretensioner has securely fastened to the proper activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 the retractor. It is recommended PREGNANT WOMEN the lap belt and receive serious you visit a NISSAN dealer for this NISSAN recommends that pregnant wo- internal injuries. service. men use seat belts. The seat belt should . For the most effective protection . All seat belt assemblies, including be worn snug, and always position the lap when the vehicle is in motion, the retractors and attaching hard- belt as low as possible around the hips, seat should be upright. Always sit ware, should be inspected after not the waist, and place the shoulder belt well back and upright in the seat any collision. It is recommended over your shoulder and across your chest. with both feet on the floor and you visit a NISSAN dealer for this Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your adjust the seat belt properly. abdominal area. Contact your doctor for service. NISSAN recommends that . Do not allow children to play with specific recommendations. all seat belt assemblies in use the seat belts. Most seating posi- during a collision be replaced INJURED PERSONS tions are equipped with Auto- unless the collision was minor NISSAN recommends that injured persons matic Locking Retractor (ALR) and the belts show no damage use seat belts, depending on the injury. mode seat belts. If the seat belt and continue to operate properly. Check with your doctor for specific re- becomes wrapped around a Seat belt assemblies not in use commendations. child’s neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be ser- during a collision should also be THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT inspected and replaced if either iously injured or killed if the seat damage or improper operation is belt retracts and becomes tight. noted. This can occur even if the vehicle WARNING is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt . All child restraints and attaching . to release the child. If the seat hardware should be inspected Every person who drives or rides belt can not be unbuckled or is after any collision. Always follow in this vehicle should use a seat already unbuckled, release the the restraint manufacturer’s in- belt at all times. child by cutting the seat belt with spection instructions and repla- . Do not ride in a moving vehicle a suitable tool (such as a knife or cement recommendations. The when the seatback is reclined. scissors) to release the seat belt. child restraints should be re- This can be dangerous. The placed if they are damaged. shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under 1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system the retractor.

SSS0292 SSS0290

Fastening the seat belts 3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. 1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” (P.1-2).) 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the the retractor to take up extra slack. Be retractor and insert the tongue into sure the shoulder belt is routed over the buckle until you hear and feel the your shoulder and across your chest. latch engage. The three-point type seat belts have two . The retractor is designed to lock modes of operation: during a sudden stop or on im- . pact. A slow pulling motion per- Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mits the belt to move, and allows . Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) you some freedom of movement The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) in the seat. mode allows the seat belt to extend and . If the seat belt cannot be pulled retract to allow the driver and passengers from its fully retracted position, some freedom of movement in the seat. firmly pull the belt and release it. The ELR locks the seat belt when the Then smoothly pull the belt out of vehicle slows down rapidly or during Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 impacts. . Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for- The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ward quickly. The retractor should mode (child restraint mode) locks the lock and restrict further belt move- seat belt for child restraint installation. ment. If the retractor does not lock during this Pull the seat belt out until it is fully check, get the system checked. It is extended to activate the ALR mode. recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer Detach the seat belt tongue from the for this service, or to learn more about buckle and retract the seat belt comple- seat belt operation. tely to cancel the ALR mode and revert back to the ELR mode. When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. For additional SSS0326 information, see “Child restraints” (P.1-19). The ALR mode should be used only for Unfastening the seat belts child restraint installation. During nor- To unfasten the seat belt, push the mal seat belt use by an occupant, the button on the buckle. The seat belt ALR mode should not be activated. If it automatically retracts. is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate WARNING methods: . When fastening the seat belts, be When the belt is pulled quickly from certain that seatbacks are comple- the retractor. tely secured in the latched position. . When the vehicle slows down rapidly. If they are not completely secured, To increase your confidence in the seat passengers may be injured in an belts, check the operation as follows: accident or sudden stop.

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system either the driver or front passenger seat- SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE ing position. It is recommended you visit a . To clean the seat belt webbings, NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur- apply a mild soap solution or any chasing an extender if an extender is solution recommended for cleaning required. upholstery or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry WARNING in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are comple- . tely dry. It is recommended that only . NISSAN seat belt extenders, made If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt by the same company which guide of the seat belt anchors, the made the original equipment seat seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the belts, be used with the NISSAN shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. SSS0588 seat belts. . Periodically check to see that the . Adults and children who can use seat belt and the metal components the standard seat belt should not Shoulder belt arm (for Coupe such as buckles, tongues, retractors, use an extender. Such unneces- models) flexible wires and anchors work prop- sary use could result in serious erly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts Before fastening the seat belt, pull the personal injury in the event of an or other damage on the webbing is shoulder belt arm forward until it clicks at accident. the detent position. found, the entire seat belt assembly . Never use seat belt extenders to should be replaced. Pulling the arm forward will allow an easy install child restraints. If the child access to the belt. restraint is not secured properly, SEAT BELT EXTENDERS the child could be seriously in- If, because of body size or driving position, jured or killed in a collision or a it is not possible to properly fit the lap- sudden stop. shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 CHILD SAFETY

There are three basic types of child territories require the use of approved WARNING restraint systems: child restraints for infants and small . Rear-facing child restraint children. (See “Child restraints” (P.1-19).) Do not allow children to play with the . Front-facing child restraint Also, there are other types of child seat belts. Most seating positions are . Booster seat restraints available for larger children for additional protection. equipped with Automatic Locking The proper restraint depends on the Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If child’s size. Generally, infants (up to about INFANTS the seat belt becomes wrapped 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be Infants up to at least 1 year old should be around a child’s neck with the ALR placed in rear-facing child restraints. placed in a rear-facing child restraint. mode activated, the child can be Front-facing child restraints are available NISSAN recommends that infants be seriously injured or killed if the seat for children who outgrow rear-facing placed in child restraints that comply with belt retracts and becomes tight. This child restraints and are at least 1 year Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards can occur even if the vehicle is old. Booster seats are used to help or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a dards. You should choose a child restraint release the child. If the seat belt can child who can no longer use a front- that fits your vehicle and always follow not be unbuckled or is already un- facing child restraint. the manufacturer’s instructions for instal- buckled, release the child by cutting lation and use. the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to WARNING SMALL CHILDREN (for Coupe mod- release the seat belt. els) Infants and children need special Children that are over 1 year old and Children need adults to help protect protection. The vehicle’s seat belts weigh at least 20 lb (9 kg) should remain them. They need to be properly re- may not fit them properly. The in a rear-facing child restraint as long as strained. shoulder belt may come too close possible up to the height or weight limit In addition to the general information in to the face or neck. The lap belt may of the child restraint. Children who out- this manual, child safety information is not fit over their small hip bones. In grow the height or weight limit of the available from many other sources, in- an accident, an improperly fitting rear-facing child restraint and are at least cluding doctors, teachers, government seat belt could cause serious or fatal 1 year old should be secured in a forward- traffic safety offices, and community or- injury. Always use appropriate child facing child restraint with a harness. Refer ganizations. Every child is different, so be restraints. to the manufacturer’s instructions for sure to learn the best way to transport minimum and maximum weight and your child. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or height recommendations. NISSAN recom- 1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system mends that small children be placed in the vehicle seat and have a label certify- child restraints that comply with Federal ing that it complies with Federal Motor Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana- Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. should choose a child restraint that fits A booster seat should be used until the your vehicle and always follow the man- child can pass the seat belt fit test below: ufacturer’s instructions for installation . and use. Are the child’s back and hips against the vehicle seatback? LARGER CHILDREN . Is the child able to sit without slouch- Children should remain in a forwarding? facing child restraint with a harness until . Do the child’s knees bend easily over they reach the maximum height or the front edge of the seat with feet flat weight limit allowed by the child restraint on the floor? manufacturer. . Can the child safely wear the seat belt JVR0473X Once a child outgrows the height or (lap belt low and snug across the hips weight limit of the harness-equipped and shoulder belt across mid-chest If you answered no to any of these forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN and shoulder)? questions, the child should remain in a recommends that the child be placed in . Is the child able to use the properly booster seat using a three-point type a commercially available booster seat to adjusted head restraint/headrest? seat belt. obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt . Will the child be able to stay in position NOTE: to fit properly, the booster seat should for the entire ride? Laws in some communities may follow raise the child so that the shoulder belt is different guidelines. Check local and properly positioned across the chest and state regulations to confirm your child the top, middle portion of the shoulder. is using the correct restraint system The shoulder belt should not cross the before traveling. neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not WARNING the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in Never let a child stand or kneel on seating positions that have a three-point any seat and do not allow a child in type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the cargo area. The child could be Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0927 FOR ROADSTER MODELS There are three basic types of child restraint systems: . Rear-facing child restraint (should not WARNING be installed in Roadster models) . . Front-facing child restraint (should Do not let infants and small chil- not be installed in Roadster models) dren ride in Roadster models. . Booster seat (only children large en- . Roadster models are not de- ough for booster seats can ride in signed to accommodate rear-fa- Roadster models) cing child restraints or front- facing child restraints. . If you let infants or small children WARNING ride in Roadster models, they may be killed or seriously injured . Never let an infant or a small child in a crash. who requires the use of a rear or front-facing child restraint ride in

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CHILD RESTRAINTS

this vehicle. Do not attempt to PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE- hold a child in your lap or arms. STRAINTS . Roadster models do not have an anchor for a top tether strap required for most child restraints. WARNING Never let children who require the . use of rear or front-facing child Failure to follow the warnings restraints ride in this vehicle. and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints . Larger children need special pro- could result in serious injury or tection. The vehicle’s seat belts death of a child or other passen- may not fit them properly. The gers in a sudden stop or collision: shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt — The child restraint must be used and installed properly. may not fit over their small hip SSS0099 bones. In an accident, an impro- Always follow all of the child perly fitting seat belt could cause restraint manufacturer’s in- serious or fatal injury. Always use structions for installation and appropriate child restraints. use. — Infants and children should never be held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision. — Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger. — Even with the NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System, never SSS0100 install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could ser- Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 iously injure or kill a child. weight. Always follow all recom- CAUTION mended procedures. — Be sure to purchase a child The passenger seat is not suitable for use restraint that will fit the child with a rear-facing child restraint for and vehicle. Some child re- A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the infants. Therefore, infants should not be straints may not fit properly transported in this vehicle. in your vehicle. seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces — Child restraint anchor points or territories require that infants and are designed to withstand In general, child restraints are designed to small children be restrained in an ap- loads from child restraints proved child restraint at all times while that are properly fitted. be installed with the lap portion of a lap/ shoulder seat belt. the vehicle is being operated. Canadian — Never use the anchor points law requires the top tether strap on Several manufacturers offer child re- front-facing child restraints to be se- for adult seat belts or har- straints for children of various sizes. When nesses. cured to the designated anchor point selecting any child restraint, keep the on the vehicle. — A child restraint with a top following points in mind: TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE- tether strap should not be . Choose only a restraint with a label used in the front passenger certifying that it complies with Federal STRAINT (for Coupe models) seat (for Roadster models). Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or If the manufacturer of your child restraint — Keep seatbacks as upright as Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- requires the use of a top tether strap, it possible after fitting the child dard 213. must be secured to an anchor point. restraint. . Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with — Infants and children should the vehicle’s seat and seat belt sys- WARNING always be placed in an appro- tem. priate child restraint while in . Child restraint anchorages are . If the child restraint is compatible with the vehicle. designed to withstand only those your vehicle, place your child in the loads imposed by correctly fitted . When the child restraint is not in child restraint and check the various child restraints. Under no circum- use, keep it secured with a seat adjustments to be sure the child stances are they to be used for belt. In a sudden stop or collision, restraint is compatible with your child. adult seat belts, harnesses or for loose objects can injure occu- Choose a child restraint that is de- attaching other items or equip- pants or damage the vehicle. signed for your child’s height and ment to the vehicle. Doing so 1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system could damage the child restraint tether strap is damaged. anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. . If the cargo cover (if so equipped) contacts the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor, remove the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether strap dur- SSS0929 ing a collision. Your child could be Except for NISMO models seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged. . Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage the top tether strap during a collision. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top JVR0381X NISMO models

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 Top tether anchor point location bag. See “Front passenger air bag The anchor point is located on the floor of and status light” (P.1-38). the cargo area.

SSS0100 FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE- STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS (for Coupe models)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air 1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. See “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-6) for SSS0640 head restraint adjustment, removal SSS0360B Front-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1 and installation information. Front-facing — step 3 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the If the seating position does not have 3. Route the seat belt tongue through “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec- an adjustable head restraint/headrest the child restraint and insert it into the tions before installing a child restraint. and it is interfering with the proper buckle until you hear and feel the Follow these steps to install a front-facing child restraint fit, try a different child latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint using the vehicle seat belt restraint. child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- in the front passenger seat: tions for belt routing. 1. If you must install a child restraint in If the child restraint is equipped with a the front seat, it should be placed in top tether strap, route the top tether a front-facing direction only. Move strap and secure the tether strap to the seat to the rearmost position. the tether anchor point. See “Installing Child restraints for infants must be top tether strap (for Coupe models)” used in the rear-facing direction and (P.1-26). therefore must not be used in the front seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 SSS0651 SSS0652 SSS0653 Front-facing — step 4 Front-facing — step 5 Front-facing — step 6 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up 6. Remove any additional slack from the fully extended. At this time, the seat on the shoulder belt to remove any seat belt; press downward and rear- belt retractor is in the Automatic slack in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint with your knee to compress restraint mode). It reverts to Emer- the vehicle seat cushion and seatback gency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode while pulling up on the seat belt. when the seat belt is fully retracted. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

SSS0641 SSS0988 Front-facing — step 8 Front-facing — step 11 8. After attaching the child restraint, test 10. If the child restraint is installed in the it before you place the child in it. Push front passenger seat, push the igni- it from side to side while holding the tion switch to the ON position. The child restraint near the seat belt path. front passenger air bag status light The child restraint should not move should illuminate. If this light is not more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to illuminated, see “Front passenger air side. Try to tug it forward and check to bag and status light” (P.1-38). Have the see if the belt holds the restraint in system checked. It is recommended place. If the restraint is not secure, you visit a NISSAN dealer for this tighten the seat belt as necessary, or service. put the restraint in another seat and After the child restraint is removed and test it again. You may need to try a the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR different child restraint. Not all child mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP BOOSTER SEATS (for Coupe models) Precautions on booster seats First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt. 1. Flip down the flap marked with a label WARNING as shown in the illustration. 2. Position the top tether strap over the If a booster seat and seat belt are not top of the seatback and secure it to used properly, the risk of a child the tether anchor bracket that pro- being injured in a sudden stop or vides the straightest installation. collision greatly increases: . 3. Tighten the strap according to the Make sure the shoulder portion of manufacturer’s instructions to re- the belt is away from the child’s move any slack. face and neck and the lap portion SSS0929 of the belt does not cross the If you have any questions when instal- Except for NISMO models stomach. ling a top tether strap, it is recom- . mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for Make sure the shoulder belt is not this service. behind the child or under the child’s arm. . A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

JVR0381X NISMO models 1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0455 SSS0363 LRS0454 Booster seats of various sizes are offered . Check the booster seat in your vehicle . If the booster seat is compatible with by several manufacturers. When selecting to be sure it is compatible with the your vehicle, place your child in the any booster seat, keep the following vehicle’s seat and seat belt system. booster seat and check the various points in mind: . Make sure the child’s head will be adjustments to be sure the booster . Choose only a booster seat with a properly supported by the booster seat is compatible with your child. label certifying that it complies with seat or vehicle seat. The seatback Always follow all recommended pro- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard must be at or above the center of cedures. 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety the child’s ears. For example, if a low All U.S. states and Canadian provinces Standard 213. back booster seat is chosen, the or territories require that infants and vehicle seatback must be at or above small children be restrained in an ap- the center of the child’s ears. If the proved child restraint at all times while seatback is lower than the center of the vehicle is being operated. the child’s ears, a high back booster The instructions in this section apply to seat should be used. booster seat installation in the front passenger seat.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child safety”, “Child restraints” and “Boos- ter seats” sections earlier in this section before installing a child restraint. SSS0640 LRS0454 Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the front passenger seat: 1. If you must install a booster seat in 3. The booster seat should be positioned the front seat, adjust the seatback on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. so that it is upright and then move If necessary, adjust or remove the the seat to the rearmost position. Do head restraint/headrest to obtain the not move the seat with the booster correct booster seat fit. If the head seat attached to it. restraint/headrest is removed, store it 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall Only place it in a front-facing direc- the head restraint/headrest when tion. Always follow the booster seat the booster seat is removed. See manufacturer’s instructions. “Head restraints/headrests” (P.1-6) for head restraint adjustment, removal and installation information. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try a different booster

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system seat. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing. SSS0988 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a 7. If the booster seat is installed in the seat belt shown in the “Three-point front passenger seat, push the igni- type seat belt” (P.1-12). tion switch to the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat used. (See “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-38).)

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and from the steering wheel, instrument pa- RESTRAINT SYSTEM rollover supplemental air bag system nel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts” (for Coupe models): This system can help (P.1-10) for instructions and precautions This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) cushion the impact force to the head of on seat belt usage.) section contains important information the driver and front passenger in certain The supplemental air bags operate only concerning the following systems. side-impact or rollover collisions. In a when the ignition switch is in the ON . Driver and passenger supplemental side-impact, the curtain air bags are position. front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad- designed to inflate on the side where After pushing the ignition switch to the vanced Air Bag System) the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, ON position, the supplemental air bag . Front seat-mounted side-impact sup- curtain air bags on both sides are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a warning light illuminates. The supple- plemental air bag mental air bag warning light will turn . short time. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact off after about 7 seconds if the systems and rollover supplemental air bag Curtain air bags are also designed to are operational. (Coupe models) inflate in certain types of rollover colli- . Door-mounted curtain side-impact sions or near rollovers. As a result, certain supplemental air bag (Roadster mod- vehicle movements may cause the cur- els) tain air bags to inflate. . Seat belt with pretensioner Door-mounted curtain side-impact Supplemental front-impact air bag sys- supplemental air bag system (for Road- tem: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- ster models): This system can help cush- tem can help cushion the impact force to ion the impact force to the heads of the the head and chest of the driver and front driver and front passenger in certain side passenger in certain frontal collisions. impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the Front seat-mounted side-impact sup- vehicle is impacted. plemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the These supplemental restraint systems are chest and pelvis area of the driver and designed to supplement the crash pro- front passenger in certain side impact tection provided by the driver and pas- collisions. The front seat side-impact senger seat belts and are not a supplemental air bags are designed to substitute for them. Seat belts should inflate on the side where the vehicle is always be correctly worn and the occu- impacted. pant seated a suitable distance away 1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING

. The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. . The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the front passenger air bag status light is lit or if the SSS0131B front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-38). . The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive ser- SSS0132B ious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 Always sit back against the seat- supplemental front air bag in- back and as far-away as practical flates. from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts. . The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Ad- vanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci- SSS0007 dent. . The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” (P.1-38). . Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them in- SSS0006 side the steering wheel rim could increase the risk of injury if the 1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING

. Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. . Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly SSS0008 SSS0099 restrained. . Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” (P.1-19) for details.

SSS0009 SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 injury in various kinds of accidents. . The curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact, rear impact, rollover (Coupe models) or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. . The seat belts, side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well SSS0059A SSS0159 back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, WARNING leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the Front seat-mounted side-impact front seat or near the side roof supplemental air bags, roof- rails (Coupe models)/door trim mounted curtain side-impact and (Roadster models). Do not allow rollover supplemental air bag (Coupe anyone sitting in the front seats models) or door-mounted curtain to extend their hand out of the side-impact supplemental air bag window or lean against the door. (Roadster models): Some examples of dangerous . The side air bags ordinarily will riding positions are shown in the not inflate in the event of a front previous illustrations. impact, rear impact, rollover, or . Do not use seat covers on the SSS0162 lower severity side collision. Al- front seatbacks. They may inter- ways wear your seat belts to help fere with supplemental side air reduce the risk or severity of 1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system bag inflation.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 mental air bags 9. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) 10. Occupant classification system control unit 11. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) 12. Satellite sensors 13. Seat belt with pretensioner NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS- TEM (front seats) This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is JVR0087X mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box. The front air bags are 1. Crash zone sensor (for Coupe models) designed to inflate in higher severity 2. Supplemental front air bag modules 5. Door-mounted curtain side-impact sup- frontal collisions, although they may in- (NISSAN Advanced Air Bags) plemental air bag inflators (for Roadster flate if the forces in another type of models) 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and collision are similar to those of a higher rollover supplemental air bags (for Coupe 6. Door-mounted curtain side-impact sup- severity frontal impact. They may not models) plemental air bags (for Roadster models) inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and 7. Door satellite sensors damage (or lack of it) is not always an rollover supplemental air bag inflators 8. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- indication of proper front air bag opera- 1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system tion. about the system. If you are considering the air bag module during inflation. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has modification of your vehicle due to a The front air bags deflate quickly after a dual stage air bag inflators. The system disability, you may also contact a NISSAN collision. monitors information from the crash dealer. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner’s Manual. The supplemental front air bags oper- zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit ate only when the ignition switch is in (ACU), seat belt buckle switches and the When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud the ON position. occupant classification sensor (pattern noise may be heard, followed by release sensor). Inflator operation is based on of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and After pushing the ignition switch to the the severity of a collision and seat belt does not indicate a fire. Care should be ON position, the supplemental air bag usage for the driver. For the front pas- taken not to inhale it, as it may cause warning light illuminates. The supple- senger, the occupant classification sensor irritation and choking. Those with a mental air bag warning light will turn is also monitored. Based on information history of a breathing condition should off after about 7 seconds if the system from the sensors, only one front air bag get fresh air promptly. is operational. may inflate in a crash, depending on the Front air bags, along with the use of seat crash severity and whether the front belts, help to cushion the impact force on occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi- the head and chest of the front occu- tionally, the front passenger air bag may pants. They can help save lives and be automatically turned OFF under some reduce serious injuries. However, an in- conditions, depending on the information flating front air bag may cause facial provided by the occupant classification abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags sensor. If the front passenger air bag is do not provide restraint to the lower OFF, the front passenger air bag status body. light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illumi- Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat nated, but the air bag will be off). (See belts should be correctly worn and the “Front passenger air bag and status light” driver and passenger seated upright as (P.1-38) for further details.) One front air far as practical away from the steering bag inflating does not indicate improper wheel or instrument panel. The front air performance of the system. bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of If you have any questions about your air this, the force of the front air bag inflating bag system, it is recommended you visit a can increase the risk of injury if the NISSAN dealer to obtain information occupant is too close to, or is against, Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 child restraints can increase the risk Front passenger air bag: or severity of injury in an accident. The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some condi- Status light: tions as described below as permitted by The front passenger air bag status light U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air is located on the instrument panel. bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The After the ignition switch is placed in the driver air bag and other air bags in your ON position, the front passenger air bag vehicle are not part of this system. status light illuminates for about 7 sec- The purpose of the regulation is to help onds and then turns off or illuminates reduce the risk of injury or death from an depending on the front passenger seat inflating air bag to certain front passen- occupied status. The light operates as ger seat occupants, such as children, by follows: requiring the air bag to be automatically SSS0988 . Unoccupied front passenger seat: The turned OFF. Front passenger air bag status light is OFF and the front passenger air The occupant classification sensor (pat- bag is OFF and will not inflate in a Front passenger air bag and status tern sensor) is in the front passenger seat crash. light . cushion and is designed to detect an Front passenger seat occupied by a occupant and objects on the seat. For small adult, child or child restraint as example, if a child is in the front passen- WARNING outlined in this section: The illu- ger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is minates to indicate that the front designed to turn the front passenger air The front passenger air bag is de- passenger air bag is OFF and will not bag OFF in accordance with the regula- signed to automatically turn OFF inflate in a crash. tions. Also, if a child restraint of the type under some conditions. Read this . Occupied front passenger seat and specified in the regulations is on the seat, section carefully to learn how it the front passenger meets the condi- the occupant classification sensor can operates. Proper use of the seat, tions outlined in this section: The light detect it and cause the air bag to turn seat belt and child restraints is ne- is OFF to indicate that the front OFF. passenger air bag is operational. cessary for most effective protec- Front passenger seat adult occupants tion. Failure to follow all who are properly seated and using the instructions in this manual concern- seat belt as outlined in this manual ing the use of seats, seat belts and should not cause the front passenger air 1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system bag to be automatically turned OFF. For or if two children are on the seat, contrary If the front passenger air bag status light small adults it may be turned OFF, how- to the instructions in this manual. Always will not illuminate even though you be- ever, if the occupant does not sit in the be sure that you and all vehicle occupants lieve that the child restraint, the seat belts seat properly (for example, by not sitting are seated and restrained properly. and the occupant are properly positioned, upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, Using the front passenger air bag status the system may be sensing an unoccu- or by otherwise being out of position), this light, you can monitor when the front pied seat (in which case the air bag is could cause the sensor to turn the air bag passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that OFF. Always be sure to be seated and OFF with the seat occupied. The light will the system is OFF by using a special tool. wearing the seat belt properly for the not illuminate when the front passenger However, until you have confirmed with most effective protection by the seat belt seat is unoccupied. your dealer that your air bag is working and supplemental air bag. properly, do not transport a child in this If an adult occupant is in the seat but the vehicle. The occupant classification sensor is front passenger air bag status light is designed to operate as described above illuminated (indicating that the air bag is The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System to turn the front passenger air bag OFF OFF), it could be that the person is a small and front passenger air bag status light for specified child restraints. Failing to adult, or is not sitting on the seat will take a few seconds to register a properly secure child restrains and to use properly. change in the front passenger seat sta- the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may tus. However, if the seat becomes unoc- allow the restraint to tip or move in an If a child restraint must be used in the cupied, the front passenger air bag status accident or sudden stop. This can also front seat, the front passenger air bag light will remain off. status light may or may not be illumi- result in the front passenger air bag If a malfunction occurs in the front inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. nated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. passenger air bag system, the supple- (See “Child restraints” (P.1-19) for proper mental air bag warning light , located use and installation.) If the front passenger air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air in the meter and gauges area will blink. If the front passenger seat is not occu- bag might inflate in a crash), it could be Have the system checked. It is recom- pied, the front passenger air bag is that the child restraint or seat belt is not mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this designed not to inflate in a crash. How- being used properly. Make sure that the service. ever, heavy objects placed on the seat child restraint is installed properly, the could result in air bag inflation, because of seat belt is used properly and the occu- the object being detected by the occupant is positioned properly. If the front pant classification sensor. Other condi- passenger air bag status light is still not tions could also result in air bag inflation, illuminated, try a different child restraint. such as if a child is standing on the seat,

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 Other supplemental front-impact . Immediately after inflation, sev- example, do not change the front air bag precautions eral front air bag system compo- seats by placing material on the nents will be hot. Do not touch seat cushion or by installing ad- them; you may severely burn ditional trim material, such as WARNING yourself. seat covers, on the seat that is . not specifically designed to as- . No unauthorized changes should Do not place any objects on the be made to any components or sure proper air bag operation. steering wheel pad or on the wiring of the air bag system. This Additionally, do not stow any instrument panel. Also, do not is to prevent accidental inflation objects under the front passen- place any objects between any of the supplemental air bag or ger seat or the seat cushion and occupant and the steering wheel damage to the supplemental air seatback. Such objects may inter- or instrument panel. Such objects bag system. fere with the proper operation of may become dangerous projec- . the occupant classification sen- tiles and cause injury if the front Do not make unauthorized sor. changes to your vehicle’s electri- air bag inflates. . No unauthorized changes should . cal system, suspension system or Do not place objects with sharp front end structure. This could be made to any components or edges on the seat. Also, do not affect proper operation of the wiring of the seat belt system. place heavy objects on the seat front air bag system. This may affect the front air bag that will leave permanent impres- . system. Tampering with the seat sions in the seat. Such objects Tampering with the front air bag belt system may result in serious can damage the seat or occupant system may result in serious per- personal injury. sonal injury. Tampering includes classification sensor (pattern . changes to the steering wheel It is recommended you visit a sensor). This can affect the op- NISSAN dealer for work on and eration of the air bag system and and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the around the front air bag. It is also result in serious personal injury. recommended you visit a NISSAN . steering wheel pad and above the Do not use water or acidic clea- instrument panel or by installing dealer for installation of electrical ners (hot steam cleaners) on the additional trim material around equipment. The Supplemental seat. This can damage the seat or the air bag system. Restraint System (SRS) wiring occupant classification sensor. . harnesses* should not be modi- This can also affect the operation Modifying or tampering with the fied or disconnected. Unauthor- of the air bag system and result in front passenger seat may result ized electrical test equipment serious personal injury. in serious personal injury. For and probing devices should not 1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system be used on the air bag system. similar to those of a higher severity side . impact. They are designed to inflate on A cracked windshield should be the side where the vehicle is impacted. replaced immediately by a quali- They may not inflate in certain side fied repair facility. A cracked collisions. windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag Roof-mounted curtain air bags are also system. designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers (Coupe * The SRS wiring harness connectors are models). As a result, certain vehicle move- yellow and orange for easy identifica- ments may cause the curtain air bags to tion. inflate. When selling your vehicle, we request that Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not you inform the buyer about the front air always an indication of proper supple- bag system and guide the buyer to the mental side air bag and curtain air bag SSS0982 appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man- operation. ual. FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM- When side air bags and curtain air bags PACT AND ROOF/DOOR-MOUNTED inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AND ROLL- is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. OVER (if so equipped) SUPPLEMEN- Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it TAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS may cause irritation and choking. Those The side air bags are located in the with a history of a breathing condition outside of the seatback of the front seats. should get fresh air promptly. The curtain air bags are located in the Side air bags, along with the use of seat side roof rails (Coupe) or upper side of the belts, help to cushion the impact force on door trim (Roadster). All of the informa- the chest and pelvis of the front occu- tion, cautions and warnings in this pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion manual apply and must be followed. the impact force to the head of occu- The side air bags and curtain air bags are pants. They can help save lives and designed to inflate in higher severity side reduce serious injuries. However, inflating collisions, although they may inflate if the side air bags and curtain air bags may forces in another type of collision are cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 bags and curtain air bags do not provide . Tampering with the air bag sys- restraint to the lower body. WARNING tem may result in serious perso- The seat belts should be correctly worn nal injury. For example, do not and the driver and passenger seated . Do not place any objects near the change the front seats by placing upright as far as practical away from the seatback of the front seats. Also, material near the seatback or by side air bag, and seated as far away as do not place any objects (an installing additional trim materi- practical from the door finishers and side umbrella, bag, etc.) between the al, such as seat covers, around roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air front door finisher and the front the side air bags. bags inflate quickly in order to help seat. Such objects may become . It is recommended you visit a protect the occupants. Because of this, dangerous projectiles and cause NISSAN dealer for work on and the force of the side air bags and curtain injury if a side air bag inflates. around the pretensioner system. air bags inflating can increase the risk of . Right after inflation, several side It is also recommended you visit a injury if the occupant is too close to, or is air bags and curtain air bag sys- NISSAN dealer for installation of against, these air bag modules during tem components will be hot. Do electrical equipment. The SRS inflation. The side air bags and curtain air not touch them; you may severely wiring harnesses* should not be bags will remain inflated for a short burn yourself. modified or disconnected. Un- period of time. For Coupe models, in a . authorized electrical test equip- rollover, the curtain air bags on both side- No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or ment and probing devices should impact situations, the curtain air bags will not be used on the side-impact remain inflated for a short period of time. wiring of side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent air bag system. The side air bags and curtain air bags accidental inflation of the side air operate only when the ignition switch is bag and curtain air bag or da- * The SRS wiring harness connectors are in the ON position. yellow and orange for easy identifica- mage to side air bag and curtain tion. After placing the ignition switch in the air bag systems. When selling your vehicle, we request that ON position, the supplemental air bag . Do not make unauthorized warning light illuminates. The air bag you inform the buyer about the side air changes to your vehicle’s electri- bag and curtain air bag systems and warning light will turn off after about 7 cal system, suspension system or seconds if the systems are operational. guide the buyer to the appropriate sec- side panel. This could affect prop- tions in this Owner’s Manual. er operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS and probing devices should not After pretensioner activation, load limiters (front seats) be used on the pretensioner sys- allow the seat belt to release webbing (if tem. necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. . If you need to dispose of the WARNING pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in . it is recommended you visit a The pretensioners cannot be re- NISSAN dealer for this service. the pretensioner system. (See “Supple- used after activation. They must Correct pretensioner disposal mental air bag warning light” (P.1-44) for be replaced together with the procedures are set forth in the more details.) If the operation of the retractor and buckle as a unit. appropriate NISSAN Service Man- supplemental air bag warning light indi- . If the vehicle becomes involved in ual. Incorrect disposal procedures cates there is a malfunction, have the a collision but a pretensioner is could cause personal injury. system checked. It is recommended you not activated, be sure to have the visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. pretensioner system checked The pretensioner system may activate When selling your vehicle, we request that and, if necessary, replaced. It is with the supplemental air bag system in you inform the buyer about the seat belt recommended you visit a NISSAN certain types of collisions. Working with pretensioners and guide the buyer to the dealer for this service. the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man- . No unauthorized changes should seat belt when the vehicle becomes ual. be made to any components or involved in certain types of collisions, wiring of the pretensioner sys- helping to restrain front seat occupants. tem. This is to prevent damage to The pretensioner is encased with the seat or accidental activation of the belt retractor. These seat belts are used pretensioners. Tampering with the same way as conventional seat belts. the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury. When a pretensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may . It is recommended you visit a be heard. The smoke is not harmful, and it NISSAN dealer for work on and does not indicate a fire. Care should be around the pretensioner system. taken not to inhale it as it may cause It is also recommended you visit a irritation and choking. Those with a NISSAN dealer for installation of history of a breathing condition should electrical equipment. Unauthor- get fresh air promptly. ized electrical test equipment Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

SSS1016 SPA1097 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS LIGHT Warning labels about the supplemental The supplemental air bag warning light, front-impact air bag are placed in the displaying in the instrument panel, vehicle as shown in the illustration. monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioners and all related SRS air bag wiring. The warning labels are located on the When the ignition switch is in the ON surface of the sun visors. position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system WARNING is operational. Do not use a rear-facing child re- If any of the following conditions occur, straint on a seat protected by an air the air bag and/or pretensioner systems bag in front of it. If the air bag need servicing:

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system . The supplemental air bag warning REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO- recommended you visit a NISSAN light remains on after approximately CEDURE dealer for this service. The air bag 7 seconds. The front air bags, side air bags, curtain module and pretensioner system . The supplemental air bag warning air bags and pretensioners are designed cannot be repaired. light flashes intermittently. . . to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a The front air bag, side air bag and The supplemental air bag warning reminder, unless it is damaged, the sup- curtain air bag systems and the light does not come on at all. plemental air bag warning light will re- pretensioner system should be Under these conditions, the air bag and/ main illuminated after inflation has inspected if there is any damage or pretensioner systems may not operate occurred. These systems should be re- to the front end or side portion of properly. They must be checked and paired and/or replaced as soon as possi- the vehicle. It is recommended repaired. It is recommended you visit a ble. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN you visit a NISSAN dealer for this NISSAN dealer for this service. dealer for this service. service. When maintenance work is required on . If you need to dispose of the WARNING the vehicle, the front air bags, side air supplemental air bag or preten- bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and sioner systems or scrap the vehi- related parts should be pointed out to the If the supplemental air bag warning cle, it is recommended you visit a person conducting the maintenance. The light is on, it could mean that the NISSAN dealer. Correct supple- ignition switch should always be in the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air mental air bag and seat belt LOCK position when working under the bag and/or pretensioner systems pretensioner system disposal hood or inside the vehicle. will not operate in an accident. To procedures are set forth in the help avoid injury to yourself or appropriate NISSAN Service Man- ual. Incorrect disposal procedures others, have your vehicle checked WARNING as soon as possible. It is recom- could cause personal injury. mended you visit a NISSAN dealer . Once a front air bag, side air bag, for this service. or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Ad- ditionally, the activated pretensioner must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner system should be replaced. It is Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 MEMO

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit ...... 2-3 Headlight and turn signal switch ...... 2-34 Instrument panel ...... 2-4 Xenon headlights ...... 2-34 Meters and gauges ...... 2-5 Headlight switch ...... 2-34 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-6 Turn signal switch ...... 2-37 Tachometer ...... 2-7 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-38 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-7 Horn ...... 2-38 Fuel gauge...... 2-8 Heated seats (if so equipped) ...... 2-38 Triple meter ...... 2-8 Climate controlled seats (if so equipped) ...... 2-40 Warning lights, indicator lights and Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ...... 2-41 audible reminders ...... 2-10 Power outlet ...... 2-42 Checking lights ...... 2-11 Storage...... 2-43 Warning lights ...... 2-11 Instrument pocket (except for navigation Indicator lights ...... 2-15 system equipped models) ...... 2-43 Audible reminders ...... 2-18 Cup holders...... 2-43 Vehicle information display ...... 2-19 Glove box ...... 2-44 Operational indicators ...... 2-19 Console box ...... 2-44 Warnings and alerts ...... 2-21 Rear parcel box ...... 2-45 Maintenance indicators ...... 2-23 Cargo cover (if so equipped)...... 2-45 Trip computer...... 2-23 Windows ...... 2-46 Security systems ...... 2-29 Power windows ...... 2-46 Vehicle Security System ...... 2-29 Interior lights ...... 2-50 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 2-30 Map lights ...... 2-50 Wiper and washer switch...... 2-32 Interior light control switch ...... 2-50 Rear window defroster switch...... 2-33 Vanity mirror lights ...... 2-51 Cargo area courtesy light (Roadster models) ...... 2-51 Operating the HomeLink® Cargo light (Coupe models) ...... 2-52 Universal Transceiver ...... 2-55 Trunk light (Roadster models) ...... 2-52 Programming troubleshooting ...... 2-55 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if Clearing the programmed information...... 2-55 so equipped) ...... 2-52 Reprogramming a single Programming HomeLink® ...... 2-53 HomeLink® button ...... 2-55 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian If your vehicle is stolen ...... 2-56 customers and gate openers ...... 2-54 COCKPIT

— BACK switch (P.4-73) — Phone switch (if so equipped) (P.4-76) — Volume control switches (P.4-73) — Source select switch (P.4-73) 10. Tilt steering lever (P.3-38) 11. Steering wheel — Horn (P.2-38) — Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-30) 12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side) — Cruise control switches (P.5-22) 13. Shift lever — Automatic Transmission (AT) (P.5-12) — Manual Transmission (MT) (P.5-17) 14. Parking brake (P.5-21)

SSI0652

1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch 6. Hood release handle (P.3-17) (P.5-30) 7. Intelligent Key port (P.5-10) 2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch 8. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-14) (P.2-34) 9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left 3. Meters and Gauges (combimeter) (P.2-5) side) 4. Triple meter (P.2-8) — Menu control switch or tuning switch 5. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-32) (P.4-73)

Instruments and controls 2-3 INSTRUMENT PANEL

SSI0653

2-4 Instruments and controls METERS AND GAUGES

SSI0521

10. Odometer/Twin trip odometer control knob (P.2-6) 11. Odometer/Twin trip odometer (P.2-6) 12. Engine oil temperature gauge (P.2-8) 13. Voltmeter (P.2-9) 14. Clock (P.2-9, P.2-27)

SSI0509 CAUTION 1. ENTER/NEXT switch (P.2-23) 7. Vehicle information display (P.2-19) 2. Fuel gauge (P.2-8) 8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-7) . For cleaning, use a soft cloth, 3. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-10) 9. Transmission position indicator (if so dampened with water. Never use 4. Tachometer (P.2-7) equipped) (P.2-18) a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or 5. Speedometer (P.2-6) — SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) indicator (if so equipped) (P.5-18) paper towel with a chemical 6. Instrument brightness control switch cleaning agent. They will scratch (P.2-37) or cause discoloration to the lens. Instruments and controls 2-5 . Do not spray any liquid such as Odometer/twin trip odometer water on the meter lens. Spraying The odometer and twin trip odometer liquid may cause the system to are displayed when the ignition switch malfunction. is in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips. Changing the display: Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET knob changes the display as follows: TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A SIC3973 Resetting the trip odometer: SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET knob for more than 1 second resets the trip Speedometer odometer to zero. The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

2-6 Instruments and controls CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6- 17) for immediate action required. SIC3974 SIC3975 TACHOMETER ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE The tachometer indicates engine speed in GAUGE revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev The gauge indicates the engine coolant the engine into the red zone . temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge points CAUTION within the zone shown in the illustration. When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or The engine coolant temperature varies reduce engine speed. Operating the with the outside air temperature and engine in the red zone may cause driving conditions. serious engine damage.

Instruments and controls 2-7 The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the SIC3976 vehicle inspected. It is recom- SIC4003 mended you visit a NISSAN dealer Triple meter FUEL GAUGE for this service. 1. Engine oil temperature gauge The gauge indicates the approximate . For additional information, see 2. Voltmeter fuel level in the tank. “Malfunction Indicator Light 3. Clock (MIL)” (P.2-16). The gauge may move slightly during TRIPLE METER braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. Engine oil temperature gauge Refill the fuel tank before the gauge Oil temperature, as well as the rate of registers “E” (Empty). temperature change, will vary based on The low fuel warning appears on the ambient conditions and driving pat- vehicle information display when the terns. Under normal operating condi- amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. tions, oil temperature will remain below Refuel as soon as it is convenient, pre- 280°F (140°C). ferably before the gauge reaches “E”. If the engine oil temperature gauge There will be a small reserve of fuel in indicates more than 280°F (140°C) while the tank when the fuel gauge reaches “E”. driving, reduce the engine speed (RPM).

2-8 Instruments and controls When the engine oil temperature is high, the engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Voltmeter When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the volt meter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage. While cranking the engine, the volts drop below the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal range (11 to 15 volts) while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Clock If necessary, adjust the clock on the vehicle information display. (See “Clock” (P.2-27).) If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the time.

Instruments and controls 2-9 WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Rear fog light indicator light (if so Master warning light Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn- equipped) ing light Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light Automatic Transmission check warn- Soft top indicator light (Roadster Supplemental air bag warning light ing light (if so equipped) models) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn- SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) ing light indicator (if so equipped) Brake warning light Transmission position indicator (if so Cruise indicator light equipped) Charge warning light Exterior light indicator Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light indicator light Intelligent Key system warning light High beam indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-10 Instruments and controls CHECKING LIGHTS WARNING LIGHTS or Brake warning light With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the or Anti-lock Braking Sys- This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. ignition switch in the ON position without tem (ABS) warning light starting the engine. The following lights (if When the ignition switch is in the ON Parking brake indicator: so equipped) will come on: position, the Anti-lock Braking System When the ignition switch is in the ON , or , , (ABS) warning light illuminates and then position, the light comes on when the The following lights (if so equipped) come turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera- parking brake is applied. on briefly and then go off: tional. Low brake fluid warning light: , or , , , , , If the ABS warning light illuminates while When the ignition switch is in the ON If any light does not come on or operates the engine is running, or while driving, it position, the light warns of a low brake in a way other than described, it may may indicate the ABS is not functioning fluid level. If the light comes on while the indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a properly. Have the system checked. It is engine is running with the parking brake system malfunction. It is recommended recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer not applied, stop the vehicle and perform you have the system checked by a for this service. the following: NISSAN dealer. If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti- 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake Some indicators and warnings are also lock function is turned off. The brake fluid as necessary. (See “Brake and displayed on the vehicle information dis- system then operates normally, but with- clutch fluid” (P.8-9).) play. (See “Vehicle information display” out anti-lock assistance. (See “Brake system” (P.5-27).) 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have (P.2-19).) the warning system checked. It is recommended you have this service Automatic transmission check performed by a NISSAN dealer. warning light (if so equipped) Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning When the ignition switch is pushed to the indicator: ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any When the parking brake is released and other time, it may indicate the transmis- the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both sion is not functioning properly. It is the brake warning light and the Anti-lock recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer Braking System (ABS) warning light illu- to check and repair the transmission. minate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake Instruments and controls 2-11 system checked, and if necessary repaired. It is recommended you visit a Charge warning light CAUTION NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Anti- If the light comes on while the engine is lock Braking System (ABS) warning light” running, it may indicate the charging Running the engine with the engine (P.2-11).) system is not functioning properly. Turn oil pressure warning light on could the engine off and check the alternator cause serious damage to the engine belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or WARNING almost immediately. Such damage is if the light remains on, have your vehicle not covered by warranty. Turn off the serviced immediately. It is recommended engine as soon as it is safe to do so. . Your brake system may not be you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, CAUTION Intelligent Key system warn- drive carefully to the nearest ing light service station for repairs. Other- Do not continue driving if the alter- After the ignition switch is pushed to the wise, have your vehicle towed nator belt is loose, broken or miss- ON position, this light comes on for about because driving it could be dan- ing. 2 seconds and then turns off. gerous. This light warns of a malfunction with the . Pressing the brake pedal with the Intelligent Key system. engine stopped and/or low brake Engine oil pressure warning If the light comes on while the engine is fluid level may increase your light stopping distance and braking stopped, it may be impossible to start the will require greater pedal effort This light warns of low engine oil pres- engine. If the light comes on while the as well as pedal travel. sure. If the light flickers or comes on engine is running, you can drive the during normal driving, pull off the road in vehicle. However in these cases, it is . If the brake fluid level is below the a safe area, stop the engine immediately recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer minimum or MIN mark on the and call a NISSAN dealer or other author- for repair as soon as possible. brake fluid reservoir, do not drive ized repair shop. until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended you The engine oil pressure warning light is visit a NISSAN dealer for this not designed to indicate a low oil level. service. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” (P.8-6).)

2-12 Instruments and controls tire pressure gauge to check the tire Low tire pressure warning pressure. WARNING light The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap- Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire pears each time the ignition switch is . If the light does not illuminate Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that placed in the ON position as long as the with the ignition switch pushed monitors the tire pressure of all tires low tire pressure warning light remains ON, have the vehicle checked as except the spare. illuminated. soon as possible. It is recom- The low tire pressure warning light warns For additional information, see “Vehicle mended you visit a NISSAN dealer of low tire pressure or indicates that the information display” (P.2-19), “Tire Pres- for this service. TPMS is not functioning properly. sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3) . If the light illuminates while driv- After the ignition switch is pushed ON, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System ing, avoid sudden steering man- this light illuminates for about 1 second (TPMS)” (P.6-3). euvers or abrupt braking, reduce and turns off. TPMS malfunction: vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the Low tire pressure warning: If the TPMS is not functioning properly, vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- If the vehicle is being driven with low tire the low tire pressure warning light will ing with under-inflated tires may pressure, the warning light will illuminate. flash for approximately 1 minute when the permanently damage the tires ignition switch is pushed ON. The light will A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also and increase the likelihood of tire remain on after the 1 minute. Have the appears in the vehicle information dis- failure. Serious vehicle damage system checked. It is recommended you play. could occur and may lead to an visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. accident and could result in ser- When the low tire pressure warning light The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does ious personal injury. Check the illuminates, you should stop and adjust not appear if the low tire pressure warn- tire pressure for all four tires. the tire pressure to the recommended ing light illuminates to indicate a TPMS Adjust the tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and malfunction. recommended COLD tire pressure Loading Information label. The low tire shown on the Tire and Loading pressure warning light does not automa- For additional information, see “Tire Pres- Information label to turn the low tically turn off when the tire pressure is sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3). tire pressure warning light OFF. If adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the the light still illuminates while recommended pressure, the vehicle must driving after adjusting the tire be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 pressure, a tire may be flat or km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the TPMS may be malfunctioning. the low tire pressure warning light. Use a Instruments and controls 2-13 If you have a flat tire, replace it Be sure to check the tire pressure Seat belt warning light and with a spare tire (if so equipped) regularly. chime or repair it with the tire puncture . If the vehicle is being driven at repair kit (if so equipped) as soon speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 The light and chime remind you to fasten as possible. If no tire is flat and all km/h), the TPMS may not operate seat belts. The light illuminates whenever tires are properly inflated, it is correctly. the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, and will remain illuminated until recommended you consult a . NISSAN dealer. Be sure to install the specified the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the size of tires to the four wheels . same time, the chime will sound for about Since the spare tire is not correctly. equipped with the TPMS, when a 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is spare tire is mounted or a wheel securely fastened. The seat belt warning light for the front is replaced, the TPMS will not Master warning light function and the low tire pressure passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is warning light will flash for ap- When the ignition switch is in the ON not fastened when the front passenger’s proximately 1 minute. The light position, the master warning light illumi- seat is occupied. For approximately 5 will remain on after the 1 minute. nates if any of the following are displayed seconds after the ignition switch is in Have your tires replaced and/or on the vehicle information display: the ON position, the system does not TPMS system reset as soon as . No key warning activate the warning light for the front possible. It is recommended you . Low fuel warning passenger. visit a NISSAN dealer for these . Low washer fluid warning See “Seat belts” (P.1-10) for precautions on services. . Parking brake release warning seat belt usage. . Replacing tires with those not . Door/rear hatch/trunk open warning originally specified by NISSAN . Loose fuel cap warning Supplemental air bag warning could affect the proper operation . light of the TPMS. Check tire pressure warning . Extended storage fuse warning After pushing the ignition switch to the See “Vehicle information display” (P.2-19). ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The air bag CAUTION warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the front air bag, side air bag . The TPMS is not a substitute for and curtain air bag systems and/or pre- the regular tire pressure check. tensioner system are operational. 2-14 Instruments and controls If any of the following conditions occur, INDICATOR LIGHTS the front air bag, side air bag and curtain Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) air bag systems and/or pretensioner warning light Cruise indicator light system need servicing. When the ignition switch is in the ON . The supplemental air bag warning position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control Cruise main switch indicator: light remains on after approximately (VDC) warning light illuminates and then This light illuminates when the cruise 7 seconds. turns off. control main switch is pushed. The light . The supplemental air bag warning The light will blink when the VDC system turns off when the main switch is pushed light flashes intermittently. or the traction control system is operat- again. When the cruise main switch in- . The supplemental air bag warning ing, thus alerting the driver that the dicator light illuminates, the cruise control light does not come on at all. vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The system is operational. (See “Cruise control” (P.5-22).) It is recommended you visit a NISSAN road surface may be slippery. dealer for these services. When the VDC warning light illuminates Cruise malfunction: Unless checked and repaired, the Supple- when the VDC system is turned on, this If the cruise indicator light blinks while the mental Restraint Systems and/or the light alerts the driver to the fact that the engine is running, it may indicate the pretensioner seat belt may not function VDC system’s fail-safe mode is operating, cruise control system is not functioning properly. for example the VDC system may not be properly. Have the system checked. It is For additional information, see “Supple- functioning properly. Have the system recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer mental restraint system” (P.1-30). checked. It is recommended you visit a for this service. (See “Cruise control” (P.5- NISSAN dealer for this service. If a mal- 22).) function occurs in the system, the VDC WARNING system function will be canceled but the Exterior light indicator vehicle is still driveable. For additional This indicator illuminates when the head- If the supplemental air bag warning information, see “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-30) of this manual. light switch is turned to the AUTO, or light is on, it could mean that the position and the front parking lights, front air bag, side air bag and curtain instrument panel lights, rear combination air bag systems and/or pretensioner lights, license plate lights or headlights system will not operate in an acci- are on. The indicator turns off when these dent. To help avoid injury to yourself lights are turned off. or others, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Instruments and controls 2-15 (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. towed to the dealer. Front passenger air bag sta- After a few driving trips, the light . Malfunction indicator light blinking — tus light should turn off if no other potential An engine misfire has been detected The front passenger air bag status light emission control system malfunction ex- which may damage the emission ( ), located on the center of the instru- ists. control system. ment panel, will be lit and the passenger If this indicator light remains on for 20 To reduce or avoid emission control front air bag will be OFF depending on seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds system damage: how the front passenger seat is being when the engine is not running, it indi- 1) Do not drive at speeds above 45 used. cates that the vehicle is not ready for an MPH (72 km/h). For front passenger air bag status light emission control system inspection/ 2) Avoid hard acceleration or decel- operation, see “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag maintenance test. (See “Readiness for eration. System (front seats)” (P.1-36) of this man- Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test” (P.10- 3) Avoid steep uphill grades. ual. 25).) 4) If possible, reduce the amount of Operation: cargo being hauled or towed. High beam indicator light The malfunction indicator light will come The malfunction indicator light may This light comes on when the headlight on in one of two ways: stop blinking and remain on. high beam is on and goes out when the Have the vehicle inspected. It is re- . Malfunction indicator light on steady low beam is selected. commended you visit a NISSAN dealer — An emission control system mal- for this service. You do not need to function has been detected. Check have your vehicle towed to the dealer. Malfunction Indicator Light the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL (MIL) CAP warning appears in the vehicle If the malfunction indicator light comes information display. If the fuel-filler CAUTION on steady or blinks while the engine is cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive running, it may indicate a potential emis- Continued vehicle operation without the vehicle. The light should turn sion control malfunction. having the emission control system off after a few driving trips. If the checked and repaired as necessary The malfunction indicator light may also light does not turn off after a few could lead to poor driveability, re- come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is driving trips, have the vehicle in- duced fuel economy, and possible loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out spected. It is recommended you visit damage to the emission control sys- of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler a NISSAN dealer for this service. You tem. cap is installed and closed tightly, and do not need to have your vehicle that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons 2-16 Instruments and controls . When the shift lever is in the R . When the temperature of the soft top Rear fog light indicator light (if (Reverse) position. system becomes extremely high. so equipped) Be sure to fully open or close the soft top Release the operating switch, and push it The rear fog light indicator light illumi- when driving the vehicle. again under the above conditions until nates when the rear fog light is on. (See The soft top can be moved with the soft the top is fully opened or closed. The soft “Fog light switch” (P.2-38).) top operating switch only under all of the top indicator light will turn off when the following conditions: top operation is completely finished. Security indicator light . When the vehicle is stopped. If the soft top indicator light illuminates with the ignition switch ON, it may The light blinks when the ignition switch . When the ignition switch is ON. indicate the electric soft top control unit is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This . When the trunk is closed. is not functioning properly. Have your function indicates the security system . When the shift lever is in a position vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is equipped on the vehicle is operational. other than the R (Reverse) position. recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer If the security system is malfunctioning, for this service. this light will remain on while the ignition For more details about the electric soft switch is in the ON position. For additional CAUTION top operation, see “Soft top (Roadster information, see “Security systems” (P.2- models)” (P.3-23). 29). Operate the soft top with the engine running to prevent a discharged Soft top indicator light (Road- battery. SynchroRev Match mode (S- ster models) MODE) indicator (if so equipped) When the soft top is operating, if any of This indicator will illuminate when the This light illuminates when the soft top is the above conditions are discontinued or SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) is being operated or it is stopped before any of the following conditions are met, activated. (See “SynchroRev Match mode reaching a full open/close state. When the the top will stop operating. (S-MODE) (if so equipped for Manual top is fully opened or closed, the light will Transmission models)” (P.5-18).) turn off. . When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. The light blinks while the soft top is not . fully opened or closed under the following When the vehicle moves at a speed of conditions: 3 MPH (5 km/h) or more. . When the battery voltage is extremely . When the vehicle is driven. low.

Instruments and controls 2-17 AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning Transmission position indica- Key reminder chime The disc brake pads have audible wear tor (if so equipped) warnings. When a brake pad requires When the ignition switch is pushed to the A chime will sound if the driver side door replacement, it will make a high pitched ON position, the indicator shows the is opened while the ignition switch is scraping sound when the vehicle is in transmission position. pushed to the ACC position or pushed motion. This scraping sound will first to the OFF or LOCK position with the For AT models: occur only when the brake pedal is Intelligent Key left in the Intelligent Key depressed. After more wear of the brake In the manual shift mode, when the port. Make sure the ignition switch is pad the sound will always be heard even transmission does not shift to the se- pushed to the OFF position, and take if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have lected gear due to the transmission the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the brakes checked as soon as possible if protection mode, the AT position indica- the vehicle. the warning sound is heard. tor light will blink and a buzzer will sound. (See “Driving the vehicle” (P.5-12).) Light reminder chime A chime will sound when the driver side Turn signal/hazard indicator door is opened with the light switch in the or position and the ignition lights switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. The light flashes when the turn signal Turn the light switch off when you leave switch lever or hazard switch is turned on. the vehicle. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Parking brake reminder chime off indicator light A chime will sound if the vehicle speed is When the ignition switch is in the ON above 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control brake applied. Stop the vehicle and re- (VDC) off indicator light illuminates and lease the parking brake. then turns off. The light comes on when the VDC off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates that the VDC system and traction control system are not operating.

2-18 Instruments and controls VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

SIC3977 The vehicle information display displays the warnings and information.

JVI0351X OPERATIONAL INDICATORS start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. 1. Engine start operation indicator (Automatic transmission models) 2. Key insertion indicator This indicator appears when the shift This indicator appears when the key lever is in the P (Park) position. needs to be inserted into the key port. (For example, the Intelligent Key battery is This indicator means that the engine will discharged.) Instruments and controls 2-19 If this indicator appears, insert the key more details. 7. Intelligent Key battery discharge into the key port in the correct direction. indicator (See “Push-button ignition switch” (P.5-8).) 5. SHIFT “P” warning (Automatic Transmission models) This indicator appears when the Intelli- gent Key battery is running out of power. 3. Intelligent Key removal indicator This warning appears when the ignition This indicator appears when the driver’s switch is pushed to stop the engine with If this indicator appears, replace the door is opened with the ignition switch in the shift lever in any position except the P battery with a new one. (See “Intelligent the OFF or LOCK position and the Intelli- (Park) position. Key battery replacement” (P.8-20).) gent Key placed in the key port. A key If this warning appears, move the shift reminder chime also sounds. 8. Engine start operation indicator lever to the P (Park) position or push the (Manual Transmission models) If this indicator appears, remove the ignition switch to the ON position. Intelligent Key from the key port and take This indicator means that the engine will An inside warning chime will also sound. it with you when leaving the vehicle. start by pushing the ignition switch with (See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7).) the clutch pedal depressed. 4. NO KEY warning 6. “PUSH” warning (Automatic This warning appears in either of the Transmission models) following conditions. This warning appears when the shift lever No Intelligent Key inside the vehicle: is moved to the P (Park) position with the The warning appears when the door is ignition switch in the ACC position after closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the SHIFT “P” warning appears. the vehicle and the ignition switch in the To push the ignition switch to the OFF ACC or ON position. Make sure that the position, perform the following proce- Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. dure: Unregistered Intelligent Key: SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the shift lever ? ? The warning appears when the ignition to “P”) PUSH warning (Push the ? switch is pushed from the LOCK position ignition switch ignition switch position ? ? and the Intelligent Key cannot be recog- is turned to ON) PUSH warning ? nized by the system. You cannot start the (Push the ignition switch ignition engine with an unregistered key. Use the switch position is turned to OFF) registered Intelligent Key. See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7) for 2-20 Instruments and controls reaches the empty (E) position. 3. Low washer fluid warning This warning appears when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See “Window washer fluid” (P.8-10).) 4. Door/rear hatch/trunk open warning (ignition switch is in the ON position) This warning appears if any of the doors and/or the rear hatch/trunk are open or not closed securely. The vehicle icon indicates which door is open on the display. 5. Loose fuel cap warning This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. (See “Fuel-filler cap” (P.3-36).)

JVI1600X 6. Check tire pressure warning This warning appears when the low tire WARNINGS AND ALERTS 2. Low fuel warning pressure warning light in the meter 1. Parking brake release warning This warning appears when the fuel level illuminates and low tire pressure is de- in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon tected. The warning appears each time This warning appears when the vehicle as it is convenient, preferably before the the ignition switch is placed in the ON speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the fuel gauge reaches the empty (E) position. position as long as the low tire pressure parking brake is applied. There is a small reserve of fuel remain- warning light remains illuminated. If this ing in the tank when the fuel gauge warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the pressure to the recommended Instruments and controls 2-21 COLD tire pressure shown on the recom- 10. Extended storage fuse warning mended COLD tire pressure shown on the This warning may appear if the extended Tire and Loading Information label. (See storage fuse switch is not pushed in “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (switched on). When this warning ap- (P.5-3) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- pears, push in (switch on) the extended tem (TPMS)” (P.6-3). storage fuse switch to turn off the warn- 7. “TIMER” indicator ing. For more information, see “Extended storage fuse switch” (P.8-19). This indicator appears when the set “TIMER” indicator activates. You can set the time for up to 6 hours. (See “Trip computer” (P.2-23).) 8. Low outside temperature warning This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The warning can be set not to be displayed. (See “Trip computer” (P.2-23).) 9. SynchroRev Match mode (S- MODE) warning This warning appears if a system malfunction occurs. When the warning ap- SIC4237 pears, the S-MODE function will not operate, but the manual transmission will operate normally and driving can be continued. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-22 Instruments and controls MAINTENANCE INDICATORS tain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the 1. Engine oil replacement indicator tire replacement indicator as a guide This indicator appears when the set time only and always perform regular tire comes for changing the engine oil. You checks. Failure to perform regular can set or reset the distance for changing tire checks, including tire pressure the engine oil. (See “Trip computer” (P.2- checks could result in tire failure. 23).) Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which 2. Oil filter replacement indicator could result in serious personal in- This indicator appears when the set time jury or death. comes for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter. (See “Trip computer” (P.2-23).) 4. “OTHER” indicator This indicator appears when the set time SIC3978 3. Tire replacement indicator comes for replacing items other than the This indicator appears when the set time engine oil, oil filter and tires. You can set TRIP COMPUTER comes for replacing tires. You can set or or reset the distance for replacing the Switches for the trip computer are lo- reset the distance for replacing tires. (See items. (See “Trip computer” (P.2-23).) cated on the left side of the combination “Trip computer” (P.2-23).) Models with navigation system: meter panel. To operate the trip computer, push the switches as shown above. More maintenance reminders are also WARNING available on the center display. (See ENTER switch “How to use INFO button” (P.4-8).) NEXT switch The tire replacement indicator is not When the ignition switch is pushed to the a substitute for regular tire checks, ON position, modes of the trip computer including tire pressure checks. See can be selected by pushing the switch “Changing wheels and tires” (P.8-33). . Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road Each time the switch is pushed, the conditions affect tire wear and when display will change as follows: tires should be replaced. Setting the Current fuel consumption ? Average fuel tire replacement indicator for a cer- consumption and speed ? Elapsed time Instruments and controls 2-23 and trip odometer ? Distance to empty ? Outside air temperature ? Clock ? Setting ? Warning check ? Current fuel consumption

SIC3673 SIC3674

Current fuel consumption (MPG or l Average fuel consumption (MPG or l (liter)/100 km) (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or The current fuel consumption mode km/h) shows the current fuel consumption. Fuel consumption: The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second. (The average speed is also reset at the same time.) The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the display shows “——”.

2-24 Instruments and controls Speed: The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the switch for longer than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is also reset at the same time.) The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows “——”.

SIC4226 SIC3676

Elapsed time and trip odometer Distance to empty (MILES or km) (MILES or km) The distance to empty (dte) mode pro- Elapsed time: vides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refuel- The elapsed time mode shows the time ing. The dte is constantly being calcu- since the last reset. The displayed time lated, based on the amount of fuel in the can be reset by pushing the switch fuel tank and the actual fuel consump- for longer than 1 second. (The trip od- tion. ometer is also reset at the same time.) The display is updated every 30 seconds. Trip odometer: The dte mode includes a low range The trip odometer mode shows the total warning feature. If the fuel level is low, distance the vehicle has been driven since the warning is displayed on the screen. the last reset. Resetting is done by push- When the fuel level drops even lower, the ing the switch for longer than 1 dte display will change to “——”. second. (The elapsed time is also reset at the same time.) Instruments and controls 2-25 . If the amount of fuel added is small, billboards. the display just before the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position may continue to be displayed. . When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

SIC4037

Outside air temperature (°F or °C) The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or °C in the range of −22 to 131°F (−30 to 55°C). The outside air temperature mode includes a low temperature warning feature. If the outside air temperature is below 37°F (3°C), the warning “ICY” is displayed on the screen. The outside temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind directions and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or 2-26 Instruments and controls 3. Push the switch for a short time to complete the clock adjustment. Resetting the time: Push the switch for more than 1 second to reset the time.

JVI1447X JVI1452X

Clock Setting Clock can be adjusted in this mode. Setting cannot be made while driving. A Adjusting the time: message “Setting can only be operated when stopped” is also displayed on the To adjust the time, perform the following vehicle information display. procedure. The switch and switch are 1. Push the switch for a short time. used in the setting mode to select and The hours display will start to flash. decide a menu. Keep pushing the switch to SKIP: adjust the hours. Push the switch to move to the 2. Push the switch for a short time. warning check mode. The minutes display will start to flash. Push the switch to select other Keep pushing the switch to menus. adjust the minutes.

Instruments and controls 2-27 ALERT: . OTHER Alert menu can be set to notify the Select this submenu and set or reset following items. the distance for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. . UPSHIFT To return to the top page of the setting Select this submenu to set the engine mode, select “BACK”. speed (RPM) of the upshift indicator. See “Upshift indicator” (P.5-20) (MT OPTIONS: models) or “Manual shift mode” (P.5- The 3 option menus can be set to your 14) (AT models). preference. . TIMER . LANGUAGE Select this submenu to specify when Select this submenu to choose English the “TIMER” indicator activates. or French for display. . ICY . UNIT SIC3993 Select this submenu to display the low Select this submenu to choose the outside temperature warning. unit from US or METRIC. Warning check To return to the top page of the setting . EFFECTS mode, select “BACK”. To see if there are any of the following Select this menu to set the dial effects warnings and corresponding details, se- MAINTENANCE: described below to on or off. lect this menu. The maintenance intervals of the follow- — The indicator needles sweep in the . ing items can be set or reset for the meters when the engine is started. No key warning . reminders. To return to the top page of the setting Low fuel warning . . OIL mode, select “BACK”. Low washer fluid warning . Select this submenu to set or reset the Parking brake release warning . distance for changing the engine oil. Door/rear hatch/trunk open warning . . FILTER Loose fuel cap warning . Select this submenu to set or reset the Check tire pressure warning distance for replacing the oil filter. SKIP: . TIRE Push the switch to move to the Select this submenu to set or reset the warning check mode. distance for replacing tires. 2-28 Instruments and controls SECURITY SYSTEMS

Push the switch to select other cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the menus. theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure DETAIL: your vehicle even if parking for a brief This item is available only when a warning period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) is displayed. in the vehicle, and always lock it when Select this menu to see the details of unattended. Be aware of your surround- warnings. ings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and speci- alty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also SIC2132 offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be Your vehicle has two types of security eligible for discounts for various theft systems, as follows: protection features. . Vehicle security system . NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood or rear hatch/ trunk when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. The system helps deter vehicle theft but

Instruments and controls 2-29 5. Confirm that the security indicator . Unlocking the door or opening the light comes on. The security indicator rear hatch without using the button light stays on for about 30 seconds. on the Intelligent Key, the door handle The vehicle security system is now request switch or the mechanical key. pre-armed. After about 30 seconds (Even if the door is opened by releas- the vehicle security system automati- ing the door inside lock knob, the cally shifts into the armed phase. The alarm will activate.) security light begins to flash once . Opening the hood. every approximately 3 seconds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm time How to stop an activated alarm period, the door is unlocked, or the The alarm will stop by unlocking a door ignition switch is pushed to ACC or by pushing the unlock button on the ON, the system will not arm. Intelligent Key, the door handle request Even when the driver and/or passen- switch or using the mechanical key. The SIC2045 gers are in the vehicle, the system will alarm will not stop if the ignition switch is activate with all doors, hood and rear pushed to the ACC or ON position. How to arm the vehicle security hatch locked with the ignition switch in If the system does not operate as system the LOCK position. When pushing the described above, it is recommended ignition switch to the ACC or ON posi- 1. Close all windows. you have it checked by a NISSAN dealer. tion, the system will be released. The system can be armed even if the NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS- windows are open. Vehicle security system activation TEM 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF The vehicle security system will give the The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System position. following alarm: will not allow the engine to start without 3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the . The headlights blink and the horn the use of the registered Intelligent Key. vehicle. sounds intermittently. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. . 4. Close all doors, hood and rear hatch/ The alarm automatically turns off For USA: trunk. Lock all doors and trunk (Road- after approximately 1 minute. How- This device complies with Part 15 of the ster models). The doors can be locked ever, the alarm reactivates if the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the with the Intelligent Key, door handle vehicle is tampered with again. following two conditions: request switch, power door lock The alarm is activated by: (1) This device may not cause harmful switch or mechanical key. interference, and (2) this device must 2-30 Instruments and controls accept any interference received, in- soon as possible. Please bring all In- cluding interference that may cause telligent Keys that you have. It is re- undesired operation. commended you visit a NISSAN dealer Note: Changes or modifications not for this service. expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- SIC2045 ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference Security indicator light that may cause undesired operation of The security indicator light is located on the device. the meter panel. It indicates the status of the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. The light blinks after the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ACC or OFF position. This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as

Instruments and controls 2-31 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

not use the window washer re- WARNING servoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water. In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con- JVI1012X tinuously for more than 30 sec- The windshield wiper and washer oper- onds. ates when the ignition switch is in the ON . Do not operate the washer if the position. reservoir tank is empty. Push the lever down to operate the wiper . Do not fill the window washer at the following speed: reservoir tank with washer fluid Intermittent — intermittent operation can concentrates at full strength. be adjusted by turning the knob toward Some methyl alcohol based (Slower) or (Faster). washer fluid concentrates may When the speed sensing wiper interval permanently stain the grille if function (for models with navigation sys- spilled while filling the window tem) is turned on, the intermittent opera- washer reservoir tank. tion speed varies in accordance with the . vehicle speed. (For example, when the Pre-mix washer fluid concen- vehicle speed is high, the intermittent trates with water to the manu- operation speed will be faster.) facturer’s recommended levels Models with navigation system: before pouring the fluid into the Note that the function is set to disabled window washer reservoir tank. Do 2-32 Instruments and controls REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH

as the factory default setting. To turn this To defog/defrost the rear window glass function on and off, see “How to use and outside mirrors, start the engine and SETTING button” (P.4-11). push the switch on. The indicator light Low — continuous low speed operation will come on. Push the switch again to High — continuous high speed operation turn the defroster off. Push the lever up to have one sweep It will automatically turn off in approxi- operation of the wiper. mately 15 minutes. Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times. CAUTION Wiper drip wipe system: . When cleaning the inner side of The wiper will also operate once about 3 the rear window, be careful not to seconds after the washer and wiper are scratch or damage the rear win- operated. This operation is to wipe SIC3980 dow defroster. washer fluid that has dripped on the Type A (if so equipped) . windshield. Do not use the rear window defroster switch while the soft top is being operated or fully opened. The heat may damage the top material and/or components (for Roadster models).

SIC3979 Type B (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-33 HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

XENON HEADLIGHTS . The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to WARNING turn off the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the HIGH VOLTAGE vehicle stops at a traffic signal). . . If the xenon headlight bulb is close When xenon headlights are on, to burning out, the brightness will they produce a high voltage. To drastically decrease, the light will prevent an electric shock, never start blinking, or the color of the attempt to modify or disassem- light will become reddish. If one or ble. Always have your xenon more of the above signs appear, it is headlights replaced by a certified recommended you visit a NISSAN service technician. dealer. . Xenon headlights provide consid- SIC3994 erably more light than conventional headlights. If they are not HEADLIGHT SWITCH correctly aimed, they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver Lighting or the driver ahead of you and Turn the switch to the position: cause a serious accident. If head- The front parking, side marker, tail, license lights are not aimed correctly, it is plate, instrument lights and daytime run- recommended you immediately ning lights will come on. take your vehicle to a NISSAN Turn the switch to the position: dealer and have the headlights Headlights will come on and all the other adjusted correctly. lights remain on. However, the daytime running lights will turn off. When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its brightness or color varies slightly. However, the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

2-34 Instruments and controls headlights automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light. If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights remain on for 5 minutes. Automatic headlights off delay: You can keep the headlights on for 45 seconds after you push the ignition switch to OFF and open any door then close all the doors. Models with navigation system: SIC3995 SIC3784A You can adjust the period of the automatic headlights off delay from 0 seconds Autolight system Be sure not to put anything on top of (OFF) to 180 seconds. The factory default the photo sensor located on the top The autolight system allows the head- setting is 45 seconds. of the instrument panel. The photo lights to be set so they turn on and off For automatic headlights off delay sensor controls the autolight; if it is automatically. setting, see “Light Off Delay” (P.4-15). covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it To set the autolight system: is dark and the headlights will illumi- 1. Make sure the headlight switch is in nate. the AUTO position . 2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, or position. The autolight system can turn on the

Instruments and controls 2-35 Battery saver system if the headlights turn off auto- A chime will sound when the driver side matically. door is opened with the light switch in the or position and the ignition Daytime running light system switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. The daytime running lights automatically When the headlight switch is in the or illuminate when the engine is started with position while the ignition switch is in the parking brake released. The daytime the ON position, the lights will automati- running lights operate with the headlight cally turn off after a period of time when switch in the OFF position or in the the ignition switch has been pushed to position. Turn the headlight switch to the the OFF position. position for full illumination when When the headlight switch remains in the driving at night. However, the daytime or position after the lights auto- running lights will turn off. matically turn off, the lights will turn on SIC3996 If the parking brake is applied before the when the ignition switch is pushed to the engine is started, the daytime running ON position. Headlight beam select lights do not illuminate. The daytime To select the low beam, put the lever in running lights illuminate once the parking the neutral position as shown. brake is released. The daytime running To select the high beam, push the lever CAUTION lights will remain on until the ignition forward while the switch is in the . switch is pushed to the OFF position. position. Pull it back to select the low When you turn on the headlight beam. switch again after the lights auto- Pulling the lever toward you will flash the matically turn off, the lights will WARNING headlight high beam even when the not turn off automatically. Be headlight switch is in the OFF position. sure to turn the light switch to When the daytime running light sys- the OFF position when you leave tem is active, tail lights on your the vehicle for extended periods vehicle are not on. It is necessary at of time, otherwise the battery will dusk to turn on your headlights. be discharged. Failure to do so could cause an . Never leave the light switch on accident injuring yourself and when the engine is not running others. for extended periods of time even 2-36 Instruments and controls signal will automatically flash three times. Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

SIC3981 SIC3997

Instrument brightness control TURN SIGNAL SWITCH The instrument brightness control oper- Turn signal ates when the headlight control switch is Move the lever up or down to signal the in the , or AUTO position (with the turning direction. When the turn is com- autolights activated). pleted, the turn signals cancel automati- Push the upper or lower switch to cally. brighten or dim the instrument panel lights when driving at night. Lane change signal Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed. Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn Instruments and controls 2-37 HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in those body parts in contact with the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

SIC4066 SIC3982 CAUTION FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) To sound the horn, push the center pad . area of the steering wheel. The battery could run down if the To turn on the rear fog light, turn the seat heater is operated while the headlight switch to the position, then engine is not running. turn the fog light switch to the . Do not use the seat heater for position. WARNING extended periods or when no one The switch returns to the OFF position Do not disassemble the horn. Doing is using the seat. automatically, and the rear fog light will so could affect proper operation of . Do not put anything on the seat illuminate. the supplemental front air bag sys- which insulates heat, such as a Make sure the indicator light on the tem. Tampering with the supple- blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. instrument panel illuminates. mental front air bag system may Otherwise, the seat may become To turn off the rear fog light, turn the fog result in serious personal injury. overheated. light switch to the position again. . Do not place anything hard or Make sure the indicator light on the heavy on the seat or pierce it with instrument panel turns off. a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

2-38 Instruments and controls . Any liquid spilled on the heated The heater is controlled by a thermo- seat should be removed immedi- stat, automatically turning the heater ately with a dry cloth. on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on. . When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, materials. or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the switch. . If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SIC2770 The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the center console can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine. 2. Select the desired heat range. . For high heat, push the HI side of the switch . . For low heat, push the LO side of the switch . . The indicator light will illuminate when the heater is on. 3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to the level position. Make sure that the indicator light turns off.

Instruments and controls 2-39 CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if so equipped)

will illuminate. 3. Adjust the desired amount of the air CAUTION using the control knob . 4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed . Do not place objects in front of or cooled, and/or before you leave the the intake inlets located behind vehicle, be sure to turn the control and under the front seat. Doing knob to the OFF position (center). The so could cause improper opera- indicator light on the control knob tion or interruption of the opera- goes off at the OFF position. tion. The climate controlled seat has air . The battery could run down if the filters. If the climate controlled seat is climate controlled seat is oper- not functioning properly, it may indi- ated while the engine is not run- cate the air filters may be clogged. To ning. SIC2771 check the air filters for the climate . Do not use the climate controlled controlled seat, it is recommended seat for extended periods or The climate controlled seat warms up or you visit a NISSAN dealer. when no one is using the seat. cools down the front seats by blowing . Do not put anything on the seat warm or cool air from the surface of the which insulates heat, such as a seat. The switches located on the center WARNING blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. console can be operated independently Otherwise, the seat may become of each other. Do not use or allow occupants to use overheated. The surface temperature of the climate the climate controlled seat if you or . Do not place anything hard or controlled seats is automatically con- the occupants cannot monitor seat heavy on the seat or pierce it with trolled at an optimum temperature. How- temperatures or have an inability to a pin or similar object. This may ever, adjust the temperature using the feel pain in those body parts in result in damage to the climate control knob if the seats are too hot or contact with the seat. Use of the controlled seat. cold. climate controlled seats by such people could result in serious injury. . Any liquid spilled on the seat 1. Start the engine. should be removed immediately 2. Turn the control knob to the heat with a dry cloth. side or to the cool side . The indicator light on the control knob 2-40 Instruments and controls VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH

. The climate controlled seat has Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart air filters. Do not operate the the engine to turn on the system. (See climate controlled seat without “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” the air filters. This may result in (P.5-30).) damage to the system. . When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials. . If any malfunctions are found or the climate controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. SSD1161 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions. If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator light will illuminate.

Instruments and controls 2-41 POWER OUTLET

The power outlet is located in the center . When not in use, be sure to close console and on the lower glove box. the cap. Do not allow water or any liquid to contact the outlet. CAUTION

. The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. . Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. . Use power outlet with the engine SIC3984 running to avoid discharging the Center console vehicle battery. . Avoid using power outlet when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on. . This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. . Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow. . Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical SIC3985 accessory being used is turned Lower glove box OFF. 2-42 Instruments and controls STORAGE

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

. Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. . Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

SIC3987 SIC4071 INSTRUMENT POCKET (except for A cup holder is located on the center navigation system equipped mod- console. els) To open the lid, push the knob up . To close, push the lid down.

WARNING

Keep the pocket lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Instruments and controls 2-43 SIC3988 SIC3999 SIC4070

Soft bottle holder GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX To open the console box, push the button WARNING and pull up the lid. CAUTION To close, push the lid down until latched. . Do not use bottle holder for any Keep glove box lid closed while driv- other objects that could be ing to help prevent injury in an thrown about in the vehicle and accident or a sudden stop. possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. To open the glove box, pull the handle . . Do not use bottle holder for open To close, push the lid in until the lock liquid containers. latches. To lock /unlock the glove box, use the mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage, see “Keys” (P.3-3).

2-44 Instruments and controls WARNING

Keep the rear parcel box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

SIC3989 REAR PARCEL BOX The rear parcel box is located behind the right-side seat. To open the rear parcel box, pull the upper part of the lid to position or . To remove the rear parcel box, pull the lid to position with a greater force until it SIC4026 unlatches. And then, pull the rear parcel box to direction . CARGO COVER (if so equipped) To install, make sure the two hinges of The cargo cover keeps the contents in the rear parcel box engaged with the the cargo area hidden from the outside. holders, then perform the steps above in To use the cargo cover, pull it out and the reverse order. hang both sides on the hooks located on the inside of the rear hatch.

Instruments and controls 2-45 WINDOWS

from sliding or shifting. Do not POWER WINDOWS place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could WARNING cause personal injury. . . Properly secure cargo and do not Make sure that all passengers allow it to contact the top tether have their hands, etc. inside the strap when it is attached to the vehicle while it is in motion and top tether anchor. Cargo that is before closing the windows. Use not properly secured or cargo the window lock switch to pre- that contacts the top tether strap vent unexpected use of the may damage the top tether strap power windows. during a collision. If the cargo . To help avoid risk of injury or cover contacts the top tether death through unintended opera- SIC3990 strap when it is attached to the tion of the vehicle and or its To remove the cargo cover unit, stow the top tether anchor, remove the systems, including entrapment cover and pull the holder to the cargo cover from the vehicle or in windows or inadvertent door opposite side. secure it on the cargo floor below lock activation, do not leave chil- its attachment location. If the dren, people who require the cargo cover is not removed, it assistance of others or pets un- WARNING may damage the top tether strap attended in your vehicle. Addi- during a collision. Your child tionally, the temperature inside a . Never put anything on the cargo could be seriously injured or closed vehicle on a warm day can cover, no matter how small. Any killed in a collision if the child quickly become high enough to object on it could cause an injury restraint top tether strap is da- cause a significant risk of injury in an accident or sudden stop. maged. or death to people and pets. . Do not leave the cargo cover in The power windows operate when the the vehicle with it disengaged ignition switch is in the ON position or for from the holder. about 45 seconds after the ignition . Properly secure all cargo with switch is pushed to the OFF position. If ropes or straps to help prevent it the driver’s or front passenger’s door is

2-46 Instruments and controls opened during this period of about 45 Locking passengers’ window seconds, power to the windows is can- When the lock button is pushed in, only celed. the driver side window can be opened or The power window switches will be closed. Push it in again to cancel. deactivated during soft top operation (Roadster models).

JVI1248X

1. Driver side window 2. Front passenger side window 3. Window lock button Main power window switch (driver’s side) To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-47 Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the SIC3241 JVI1203X window will be immediately lowered. The auto reverse function can be acti- Passenger side power window Automatic operation vated when the window is closed by switch To fully open or close the window, com- automatic operation when the ignition The passenger side switch will open or pletely push down or pull up the switch switch is in the ON position or for 45 close only the corresponding window. To and release it; it need not be held. The seconds after the ignition switch is open or close the window, push down or window will automatically open or close pushed to the OFF position. pull up the switch and hold it. all the way. To stop the window, just push Depending on the environment or driv- or lift the switch in the opposite direction. ing conditions, the auto reverse func- A light push or pull on the switch will tion may be activated if an impact or cause the window to open or close until load similar to something being caught the switch is released. in the window occurs.

2-48 Instruments and controls Automatic window lowering . When the door is opened, the window vehicle checked. It is recommended you (Roadster models) lowers for approximately 2 seconds. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. . While the door is open, the window When the soft top operating switch is cannot be raised. pressed, the power windows will automatically be lowered completely. The If the windows do not close auto- windows do not rise automatically after matically the soft top open/close operation is completed. Use the power window If the power window automatic function switches to raise them. (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initi- Automatic adjusting function alize the power window system. 1. Push the ignition switch to the ON CAUTION position. 2. Close the door and soft top (Roadster When the battery cable is removed models). from the battery terminal, do not 3. Open the window completely by op- close either of the front doors. The erating the power window switch. automatic window adjusting func- 4. Pull the power window switch and tion will not work and the side roof hold it to close the window, and then panel may be damaged. hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed completely. The power window has an automatic 5. Release the power window switch. adjusting function. When the door is Operate the window by the automatic being opened, the window is automati- function to confirm the initialization is cally lowered slightly to avoid contact complete. between the window and the side roof 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for panel. When the door is closed, the other windows. window is automatically raised slightly. If the power window automatic function While the automatic adjusting function does not operate properly after perform- does not work, the window will be con- ing the procedure above, have your trolled as follows: Instruments and controls 2-49 INTERIOR LIGHTS

. doors are unlocked by pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key or door handle request switch with the ignition switch in the LOCK position — remain on for about 15 seconds. . any door is opened and then closed with the ignition switch in the LOCK position — remain on for about 15 seconds. . any door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position — remain on while the door is opened. When the door is closed, the lights SIC4238 SIC4239 go off. MAP LIGHTS INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH The lights will also turn off after a Push the button as illustrated to turn the The interior light control switch has three period of time when the lights remain light on or off. positions: ON, DOOR and OFF. illuminated after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF or LOCK posi- ON position tion to prevent the battery from becom- When the switch is in the ON position ing discharged. the map lights will illuminate. Models with navigation system: When the auto interior illumination is set DOOR position to the OFF position (see “Vehicle informa- When the switch is in the DOOR position tion and settings (models with navigation , the map lights will illuminate under the system)” (P.4-8)), the lights will illuminate following conditions: under the following condition: . ignition switch is switched to the OFF . any door is opened with the ignition or LOCK position switch in any position — remain on for about 15 seconds.

2-50 Instruments and controls CARGO AREA COURTESY LIGHT VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS (Roadster models)

— remain on while the door is opened. The light illuminates simultaneously with When the door is closed, the lights the map light. See “Interior lights” (P.2-50). go off. OFF position When the switch is in the OFF position , the lights will not illuminate, regardless of the condition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. SIC3869 The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. When the cover is closed, the light will turn off. The lights will also turn off after a period of time when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

Instruments and controls 2-51 HomeLink® UNIVERSAL CARGO LIGHT (Coupe models) TRUNK LIGHT (Roadster models) TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The light illuminates when the rear hatch The light illuminates when the trunk lid is The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is opened. When the rear hatch is closed, opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the provides a convenient way to consolidate the light will turn off. light turns off. the functions of up to three individual The light will also turn off after a period hand-held transmitters into one built-in of time when the light remains illumi- device. nated after the ignition switch has been HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: pushed to the OFF or LOCK position to . Will operate most Radio Frequency prevent the battery from becoming (RF) devices such as garage doors, discharged. gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. . Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming. When the HomeLink® Universal Trans- ceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle pur- chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” (P.2-53).

WARNING

. Do not use the HomeLink® Uni- versal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety

2-52 Instruments and controls stop and reverse features as re- PROGRAMMING HomeLink® quired by federal safety stan- If you have any questions or are having dards. (These standards became difficulty programming your HomeLink® effective for opener models man- buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site ufactured after April 1, 1982). A at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- garage door opener which cannot 3515. detect an object in the path of a NOTE: closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, It is also recommended that a new does not meet current federal battery be placed in the hand-held safety standards. Using a garage transmitter of the device being pro- door opener without these fea- grammed to HomeLink® for quicker tures increases the risk of serious programming and accurate transmis- injury or death. sion of the radio-frequency. . During the programming proce- 1. Position the end of your hand-held JVI0428X dure your garage door or security transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface, keeping 2. Using both hands, simultaneously gate will open and close (if the press and hold the desired HomeLink® transmitter is within range). Make the HomeLink® indicator light in view. button and handheld transmitter but- sure that people or objects are ton. DO NOT release until the clear of the garage door, gate, HomeLink® indicator light flashes etc. that you are programming. slowly and then rapidly. When the . Your vehicle’s engine should be indicator light flashes rapidly, both turned off while programming buttons may be released. (The rapid the HomeLink® Universal Trans- flashing indicates successful pro- ceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gramming.) gases; they contain colorless NOTE: and odorless carbon monoxide. Some devices to be programmed Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It may require you to replace Step 2 can cause unconsciousness or with the cycling procedure noted in death. the “Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers” (P.2-54). Instruments and controls 2-53 4. At the receiver located on the garage PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR door opener motor in the garage, CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE locate the “learn” or “smart” button (the name and color of the button OPENERS may vary by manufacturer but it is Canadian radio-frequency laws require usually located near where the hang- transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) ing antenna wire is attached to the after several seconds of transmission – unit). If there is difficulty locating the which may not be long enough for button, reference the garage door HomeLink® to pick up the signal during opener’s manual. programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are de- 5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” signed to “time-out” in the same manner. button. If you live in Canada or you are having NOTE: difficulties programming a gate operator Once the button is pressed, you have or garage door opener by using the JVI0429X approximately 30 seconds to initiate “Programming HomeLink®” procedures, the next step. 3. Press and hold the programmed replace “Programming HomeLink®” Step HomeLink® button and observe the 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press 2 with the following: indicator light. and hold the programmed HomeLink® NOTE: . If the indicator light is solid/ button for two seconds and release. continuous, programming is com- Repeat the “press/hold/release” se- When programming a garage door plete and your device should acti- quence up to 3 times to complete opener, etc., unplug the device during vate when the HomeLink® button is the programming process. HomeLink® the “cycling” process to prevent possi- pressed and released. should now activate your rolling code ble damage to the garage door opener components. . If the indicator light blinks rapidly equipped device. for two seconds and then turns to a 7. If you have any questions or are Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously solid/continuous light, continue having difficulty programming your press and hold the desired HomeLink® with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code HomeLink® buttons, refer to the button and the hand-held transmitter device. A second person may make HomeLink® web site at: www. button. During programming, your hand- the following steps easier. Use a homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. held transmitter may automatically stop ladder or other device. Do not stand transmitting. Continue to press and hold on your vehicle to perform the next the desired HomeLink® button while you steps. press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand- 2-54 Instruments and controls held transmitter every two seconds until PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN- the frequency signal has been learned. ING FORMATION The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn The following procedure clears the pro- seconds upon successful programming. the hand-held transmitter information: grammed information from both buttons. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® . replace the hand-held transmitter Individual buttons cannot be cleared. indicator light flashes slowly and then batteries with new batteries. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed, see “Reprogramming a sin- rapidly. When the indicator light flashes . position the hand-held transmitter gle HomeLink® button” (P.2-55). rapidly, both buttons may be released. with its battery area facing away from The rapid flashing indicates successful the HomeLink® surface. To clear all programming programming. . press and hold both the HomeLink® 1. Press and hold the two outer Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” and hand-held transmitter buttons HomeLink® buttons until the indicator step 3 to complete. without interruption. light begins to flash in approximately . Remember to plug the device back in position the hand-held transmitter 1-3 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer when programming is completed. in (26-76 mm) away from the than 20 seconds. HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit- OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNI- ter in that position for up to 15 2. Release both buttons. VERSAL TRANSCEIVER seconds. If HomeLink® is not pro- HomeLink® is now in the programming The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, grammed within that time, try holding mode and can be programmed at any after it is programmed, can be used to the transmitter in another position - time beginning with “Programming activate the programmed device. To op- keeping the indicator light in view at HomeLink®” - Step 1. erate, simply press and release the appro- all times. REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE priate programmed HomeLink® Universal If you have any questions or are having HomeLink® BUTTON Transceiver button. The amber indicator difficulty programming your HomeLink® light will illuminate while the signal is buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal being transmitted. at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515. Transceiver button, complete the following. For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® time. button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with

Instruments and controls 2-55 “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1. interference received, including inter- For questions or comments, contact ference that may cause undesired op- HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or 1- eration. 800-355-3515. NOTE: The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver Changes or modifications not expressly button has now been reprogrammed. approved by the party responsible for The new device can be activated by compliance could void the user’s pushing the HomeLink® button that was authority to operate the equipment. just programmed. This procedure will not For Canada: affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons. This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN Operation is subject to the following If your vehicle is stolen, you should two conditions: (1) this device may not change the codes of any non-rolling code cause interference, and (2) this device device that has been programmed into must accept any interference, including HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual interference that may cause undesired of each device or call the manufacturer or operation of the device. retailer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni- versal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any

2-56 Instruments and controls 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ...... 3-3 Trunk lid (Roadster models) ...... 3-20 Intelligent Key ...... 3-3 Trunk lid opener switch ...... 3-21 Valet hand-off...... 3-4 Trunk release power cancel switch ...... 3-21 Doors ...... 3-5 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-21 Locking with mechanical key ...... 3-5 Secondary trunk lid release ...... 3-22 Opening and closing windows with the Soft top (Roadster models) ...... 3-23 mechanical key ...... 3-5 Before operating the top ...... 3-23 Locking with inside lock knob ...... 3-6 When operating the top ...... 3-25 Locking with power door lock switch...... 3-6 Opening the top ...... 3-27 Automatic door locks ...... 3-6 Closing the top...... 3-27 Intelligent Key system ...... 3-7 Opening the top using the Intelligent Key ...... 3-28 Intelligent Key operating range ...... 3-9 Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-29 Door locks/unlocks precaution ...... 3-9 If the top does not open or Intelligent Key operation ...... 3-10 close electrically ...... 3-30 Battery saver system ...... 3-12 Care of the soft top and the vehicle body...... 3-33 Warning signals ...... 3-12 Front, side and rear unique parts Troubleshooting guide ...... 3-13 (NISMO models) ...... 3-34 Remote keyless entry system ...... 3-14 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-35 How to use remote keyless entry system ...... 3-14 Opening the fuel-filler door...... 3-35 Hood...... 3-17 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-36 Rear hatch (Coupe models) ...... 3-18 Tilt steering...... 3-38 Rear hatch opener switch ...... 3-18 Manual operation ...... 3-38 Rear hatch release switch ...... 3-19 Sun visors...... 3-38 Secondary rear hatch release ...... 3-20 Mirrors ...... 3-39 Outside mirrors ...... 3-40 Inside mirror...... 3-39 Vanity mirror ...... 3-41 KEYS

A key number plate is supplied with your Intelligent Key components when regis- keys. Record the key number and keep it tering new keys, be sure to take all in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in Intelligent Keys that you have to the the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is NISSAN dealer. recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer It is possible that the Intelligent Key for duplicates by using the key number. functions become canceled. Contact a NISSAN does not record any key numbers NISSAN dealer. so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you CAUTION have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it . Be sure to carry the Intelligent can be duplicated without knowing the Key with you when driving. The key number. Intelligent Key is a precision de- SPA2406 vice with a built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note 1. Intelligent Keys (2) the following. 2. Mechanical keys (inside the Keys) (2) 3. Key number plate (1) — The Intelligent Key is water resistant; however, wetting INTELLIGENT KEY may damage the Intelligent Your vehicle can only be driven with the Key. If the Intelligent Key gets Intelligent Keys which are registered to wet, immediately wipe until it your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com- is completely dry. ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer — Do not bend, drop or strike it System components. As many as 4 In- against another object. telligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be — If the outside temperature is registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use below 14°F (-10°C) degrees, the with the Intelligent Key system and battery of the Intelligent Key NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of may not function properly. your vehicle. Since the registration pro- — Do not place the Intelligent cess requires erasing all memory in the Key for an extended period in Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 a place where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). CAUTION — Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key. Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Key. — Do not use a magnet key holder. VALET HAND-OFF — Do not place the Intelligent When you have to leave a key with a valet, Key near an electric appliance give them the Intelligent Key itself and such as a television set, per- keep the mechanical key with you to sonal computer or cellular protect your belongings. phone. To prevent the glove box from being — Do not allow the Intelligent opened during valet hand-off, follow the Key to come into contact with SPA2033 procedures below. water or salt water, and do 1. Push the trunk release power cancel not wash it in a washing Mechanical key machine. This could affect switch to the OFF side (Roadster To remove the mechanical key, release models). the system function. the lock knob at the back of the Intelli- . 2. Remove the mechanical key from the If an Intelligent Key is lost or gent Key. Intelligent Key. stolen, NISSAN recommends To install the mechanical key, firmly insert erasing the ID code of that Intel- 3. Lock the glove box with the mechan- it into the Intelligent Key until the lock ical key. ligent Key. This will prevent the knob returns to the lock position. Intelligent Key from unauthorized 4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, use to unlock the vehicle. For Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock keeping the mechanical key in your information regarding the eras- the doors, and glove box. pocket or bag for insertion into the ing procedure, it is recommended See “Doors” (P.3-5) and “Storage” (P.2-43). Intelligent Key when you retrieve your you visit a NISSAN dealer. vehicle. See “Storage” (P.2-43).

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments DOORS

(See “How to use SETTING button” (P.4- WARNING 11).) OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS . Always have the doors locked WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY while driving. Along with the use The driver’s door key operation also of seat belts, this provides great- allows you to open and close the window er safety in the event of an that is equipped with the automatic accident by helping to prevent open/close function. (See “Power win- persons from being thrown from dows” (P.2-46).) the vehicle. This also helps keep To open the window, turn the driver’s children and others from unin- door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle tentionally opening the doors, for longer than 1 second. The door is and will help keep out intruders. unlocked and the window keeps opening . Before opening any door, always SPA2565 while turning the key. look for and avoid oncoming This function can also be performed by traffic. LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY pushing and holding the UNLOCK button . To help avoid risk of injury or The power door lock system allows you to on the Intelligent Key. (See “Remote key- death through unintended opera- lock or unlock all doors simultaneously less entry system” (P.3-14).) tion of the vehicle and or its using the mechanical key. To close the window, turn the driver’s systems, including entrapment . Turning the driver’s door key cylinder door key cylinder to the front of the in windows or inadvertent door to the front of the vehicle will lock all vehicle for longer than 1 second. The lock activation, do not leave chil- doors. door is locked and the window keeps dren, people who require the . closing while turning the key. assistance of others or pets un- Turning the driver’s door key cylinder attended in your vehicle. Addi- once to the rear of the vehicle will tionally, the temperature inside a unlock the driver’s door. After return- closed vehicle on a warm day can ing the key to the neutral position , quickly become high enough to turning it to the rear again within 60 cause a significant risk of injury seconds will unlock all doors. or death to people and pets. . You can switch the lock system to the mode that allows you to open all the doors when the key is turned once. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 switch to the unlock position . Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open, all doors and the trunk lid will lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any door open, all doors and the trunk lid will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door and/or the trunk lid are closed. SPA2566 SPA2300 These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK locked inside the vehicle. To lock the door individually, move the SWITCH AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS inside lock knob to the lock position Operating the power door lock switch will . All doors lock automatically when the then close the door. lock or unlock all the doors and trunk lid. vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 The switches are located on the driver’s To unlock, move the inside lock knob to km/h). the unlock position . and front passenger’s door armrests. . All doors unlock automatically when When locking the door without an To lock the doors and trunk lid, push the the ignition switch is placed in the OFF Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the power door lock switch to the lock position. position with the driver’s or front Intelligent Key inside the vehicle. The automatic unlock function can be passenger’s door open, then close the deactivated or activated. To deactivate door and trunk lid. or activate the automatic door unlock When locking the door this way, be system, perform the following procedure: certain not to leave the Intelligent Key 1. Close all doors. inside the vehicle. 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON To unlock the doors, the fuel-filler door position. and the trunk, push the power door lock 3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2, push and hold the power door lock CAUTION switch to the position (UNLOCK) WARNING for more than 5 seconds. . Radio waves could adversely af- . Be sure to carry the Intelligent 4. When activated, the hazard indicator fect electric medical equipment. Key with you when operating the will flash twice. When deactivated, the Those who use a pacemaker vehicle. hazard indicator will flash once. should contact the electric med- . Never leave the Intelligent Key in 5. The ignition switch must be placed in ical equipment manufacturer for the vehicle when you leave the the OFF and ON position again be- the possible influences before vehicle. tween each setting change. use. When the automatic door unlock system . The Intelligent Key transmits The Intelligent Key is always communi- is deactivated, the doors do not unlock radio waves when the buttons cating with the vehicle as it receives radio when the ignition switch is placed in the are pushed. The FAA advises that waves. The Intelligent Key system trans- OFF position. To unlock the door manu- the radio waves may affect air- mits weak radio waves. Environmental ally, use the inside lock knob or the power craft navigation and communica- conditions may interfere with the opera- door lock switch (driver’s or front passen- tion systems. Do not operate the tion of the Intelligent Key system under ger’s side). Intelligent Key while on an air- the following operating conditions. plane. Make sure the buttons are . When operating near a location where not operated unintentionally strong radio waves are transmitted, when the unit is stored during a such as a TV tower, power station and flight. broadcasting station. . When in possession of wireless equip- The Intelligent Key system can operate all ment, such as a cellular telephone, the door and rear hatch/trunk lid locks transceiver, and CB radio. using the remote controller function or . When the Intelligent Key is in contact pushing the request switch on the vehicle with or covered by metallic materials. without taking the key out from a pocket . or purse. The operating environment When any type of radio wave remote and/or conditions may affect the Intelli- control is used nearby. gent Key system operation. . When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a perso- Be sure to read the following before using nal computer. the Intelligent Key system. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 . When the vehicle is parked near a magnetic field, such as a TV, parking meter. CAUTION audio equipment, personal com- In such cases, correct the operating puter or cellular phone. conditions before using the Intelligent . Do not allow the Intelligent Key, Key function or use the mechanical key. which contains electrical compo- If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, Although the life of the battery varies nents, to come into contact with NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code depending on the operating conditions, water or salt water. This could of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. the battery’s life is approximately 2 years. affect the system function. This may prevent the unauthorized use of If the battery is discharged, replace it with . Do not drop the Intelligent Key. the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. a new one. . For information regarding the erasing Do not strike the Intelligent Key procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer. When the Intelligent Key battery is almost sharply against another object. discharged, insert the Intelligent Key into . The Intelligent Key function can be dis- the Intelligent Key port to start the Do not change or modify the abled. For information about disabling engine. Replace the discharged battery Intelligent Key. the Intelligent Key function, contact a with a new one as soon as possible. For . Wetting may damage the Intelli- NISSAN dealer. more details, see “Push-button ignition gent Key. If the Intelligent Key switch” (P.5-8). gets wet, immediately wipe until Since the Intelligent Key is continuously it is completely dry. receiving radio waves, if the key is left . If the outside temperature is be- near equipment which transmits strong low 14°F (−10°C), the battery of the radio waves, such as signals from a TV Intelligent Key may not function and personal computer, the battery life properly. may become shorter. . Do not place the Intelligent Key For information regarding replacement of for an extended period in an area a battery, see “Intelligent Key battery where temperatures exceed replacement” (P.8-20). 140°F (60°C). As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be . Do not attach the Intelligent Key registered and used with one vehicle. For with a key holder that contains a information about the purchase and use magnet. of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a . Do not place the Intelligent Key NISSAN dealer. near equipment that produces a 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments charged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly. The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch . If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock/unlock SPA2568 the doors including the rear hatch/trunk lid. DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU- TION . Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have SPA2567 difficulty recognizing that the Intelli- INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING gent Key is outside the vehicle. . After locking with the door handle RANGE request switch, verify the doors are The Intelligent Key functions can only be securely locked by testing them. used when the Intelligent Key is within . To prevent the Intelligent Key from the specified operating range from the being left inside the vehicle, make sure request switch . you carry the key with you and then When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- lock the doors.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 . Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door. . Models with navigation system: The Intelligent Key system (opening/ closing doors with the door handle request switch) can be set to remain inactive. (See “Vehicle information and settings (models with navigation system)” (P.4-8).)

SPA2569 SPA2570 Coupe models INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out from your pocket or bag.

SPA2571 Coupe models

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Locking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid Unlocking doors, rear hatch/trunk and fuel-filler door lid and fuel-filler door 1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF 1. Push the door handle request switch position and make sure you carry the (driver’s or front passenger’s) or the Intelligent Key with you.*1 rear hatch/trunk request switch once 2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch/ while carrying the Intelligent Key with trunk lid.*2 you. 3. Push the door handle request switch 2. The hazard indicator flashes once and (driver’s or front passenger’s) or the outside chime sounds once. The cor- rear hatch/trunk request switch while responding door and the fuel-filler carrying the Intelligent Key with you.*3 door or the rear hatch/trunk lid will unlock. 4. All the doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and fuel-filler door will lock. 3. Push the door handle request switch SPA2680 or the rear hatch/trunk request 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice Roadster models switch again within 60 seconds. and the outside chime sounds twice. When you carry the Intelligent Key with 4. The hazard indicator flashes once and *1: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will you, you can lock or unlock all doors and lock with the Intelligent Key while the outside chime sounds once again. All the rear hatch/trunk lid by pushing the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON the doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid door handle request switch (driver’s or position. will unlock. front passenger’s) or the rear hatch/ *2: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will not All doors, the rear hatch/trunk lid and the trunk request switch within the range lock with the Intelligent Key while any fuel-filler door will be locked automati- of operation. door or the rear hatch/trunk lid is open. cally unless one of the following opera- When you lock or unlock the doors and *3: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will not tions is performed within 1 minute after the rear hatch/trunk lid, the hazard lock by pushing the door handle request pushing the request switch while the indicator will flash and the horn (or the switch or the rear hatch/trunk request doors are locked. switch with the Intelligent Key inside the outside chime) will sound as a confirma- vehicle. However, when an Intelligent Key . Opening any door and/or the rear tion. For details, see “Setting hazard is inside the vehicle, doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid indicator and horn mode” (P.3-15). hatch/trunk lid can be locked with an- . Pushing the ignition switch other registered Intelligent Key. . Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 During this 1-minute time period, if the BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key When all the following conditions are met is pushed, all doors will be locked auto- for a period of time, the battery saver matically after another 1 minute. system will cut off the power supply to Opening rear hatch/trunk lid prevent battery discharge. . To open only the rear hatch/trunk lid, The ignition switch is in the ACC perform the following procedure. position, and . 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. All doors are closed, and . The shift lever is in the P (Park) 2. Push the rear hatch/trunk lid opener position (Automatic Transmission switch . models). 3. The rear hatch/trunk lid will open. WARNING SIGNALS Lockout protection: To help prevent the vehicle from moving To prevent the Intelligent Key from being unexpectedly by erroneous operation of accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout the Intelligent Key listed on the following protection is equipped with the Intelligent chart or to help prevent the vehicle from Key system. being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside When the trunk lid is closed with the and outside the vehicle and a warning Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the out- displays in the vehicle information display. side buzzer will sound and all doors and When a chime or beep sounds or the the trunk lid will unlock. warning displays, be sure to check the vehicle and Intelligent Key. See “Troubleshooting guide” (P.3-13) and “Vehicle information display” (P.2-19).

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Symptom Possible cause Action to take The SHIFT P warning appears on the When pushing the ignition display and the inside warning chime The shift lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) switch to stop the engine sounds continuously (Automatic Trans- position. position. mission models). The ignition switch is in the ACC Push the ignition switch to the OFF When opening the driver’s The inside warning chime sounds con- position. position. door to get out of the vehicle tinuously. The Intelligent Key is in the Intelli- Remove the Intelligent Key from the gent Key port. Intelligent Key port. The NO KEY warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds 3 The ignition switch is in the ACC or Push the ignition switch to the OFF times and the inside warning chime ON position. position. When closing the door after sounds for approximately a few seconds. getting out of the vehicle The SHIFT P warning appears on the The ignition switch is in the ACC or Move the shift lever to the P (Park) display and the outside chime sounds OFF position and the shift lever is position and push the ignition switch continuously (Automatic Transmission not in the P (Park) position. to the OFF position. models). When closing the door with The outside chime sounds for a few The Intelligent Key is inside the the inside lock knob turned seconds and all the doors unlock. vehicle and cargo/trunk room Carry the Intelligent Key with you. to LOCK area. The Intelligent Key is inside the When pushing the door han- The outside chime sounds for a few vehicle and cargo/trunk room Carry the Intelligent Key with you. dle request switch to lock the seconds. area. door A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely. When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for a few The Intelligent Key is inside the Carry the Intelligent Key with you. (Roadster models) seconds and all doors unlock. trunk. When shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) position The inside warning chime sounds con- The ignition switch is in the ON The ignition switch is in the OFF (Automatic Transmission tinuously. position. position. models)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Intelligent Key will not operate when: . the distance between the Intelligent WARNING Key and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m). . The Intelligent Key transmits radio the Intelligent Key battery is dis- waves when the buttons are pushed. charged. The FAA advises that the radio waves After locking with the remote keyless may affect aircraft navigation and entry function, pull the door handle to communication systems. Do not op- make sure the doors are securely locked. erate the Intelligent Key while on an The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range var- airplane. Make sure the buttons are ies depending on the environment. To not operated unintentionally when securely operate the lock and unlock the unit is stored during a flight. buttons, approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door. It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel- SPA2252B filler door, activate the panic alarm and open the windows by pushing the but- 1. LOCK button tons on the Intelligent Key from outside 2. UNLOCK button the vehicle. 3. PANIC button Before locking the doors, make sure the HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle. ENTRY SYSTEM The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli- When you lock or unlock the doors and gent Key can operate at a distance of rear hatch/trunk lid, the hazard indicator approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the will flash and the horn (or the outside vehicle. (The effective distance depends chime) will sound as a confirmation. For upon the conditions around the vehicle.) details, see “Setting hazard indicator and As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used horn mode” (P.3-15). with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. The lock and unlock buttons on the 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Locking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid hatch/trunk lid will unlock. lock. (See “Doors” (P.3-5).) and fuel-filler door All doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will Using panic alarm 1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 If you are near your vehicle and feel position and make sure you carry the threatened, you may activate the alarm Intelligent Key with you.* minute after pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key while the to call attention as follows: 2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch/ doors are locked. If during this 1-minute 1. Push the PANIC button on the trunk lid. time period, the UNLOCK button on Key for more than 1 second. 3. Push the LOCK button on the the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors and 2. The theft warning alarm and head- Intelligent Key. the rear hatch/trunk lid will be locked lights will stay on for 25 seconds. automatically after another 1 minute. 4. All the doors, the rear hatch/trunk lid 3. The panic alarm stops when: and fuel-filler door will lock. . Opening any door . It has run for 25 seconds, or . 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice Pushing the ignition switch . Any of the buttons on the Intelligent and the horn chirps once. . Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button *: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will Intelligent Key port should be pushed for more than 1 lock with the Intelligent Key while the second.) ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Opening windows position. The UNLOCK button operation also Setting hazard indicator and horn Unlocking doors, rear hatch/trunk allows you to open a window that is mode equipped with the automatic open/close lid and fuel-filler door This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and function. (See “Power windows” (P.2-46).) horn mode when you first receive the 1. Push the UNLOCK button on To open the window, push the door vehicle. the Intelligent Key once. UNLOCK button on the Intelligent In hazard indicator and horn mode, when 2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The Key for about 3 seconds after the door is the LOCK button is pushed, the driver’s door and fuel-filler door will unlocked. hazard indicator flashes twice and the unlock. To stop opening, release the UNLOCK horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK 3. Push the UNLOCK button on the button. button is pushed, the hazard indicator Intelligent Key again within 60 sec- Window cannot be closed using the flashes once. onds. Intelligent Key. If horns are not necessary, the system 4. The hazard indicator flashes once The door window can be opened or can be switched to the hazard indicator again. All the doors and the rear closed by turning the metal key in a door mode. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK Hazard indicator and horn mode: button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice. When the UNLOCK DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard Intelligent Key system HAZARD - once (Using door handle or rear hatch/ HAZARD - twice indicator nor the horn operates. OUTSIDE CHIME - once trunk request switch) OUTSIDE CHIME - twice Remote keyless entry system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once (Using or button) HORN - once HORN - none Hazard indicator mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK Intelligent Key system HAZARD - none (Using door handle or rear hatch/ HAZARD - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - none trunk request switch) OUTSIDE CHIME - none Remote keyless entry system HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none (Using or button) HORN - none HORN - none

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments HOOD

Switching procedure: To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime) operation, push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the Intel- ligent Key simultaneously for more than 2 seconds. . When the hazard indicator mode is set, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times. . When the hazard indicator and horn mode is set, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once.

SPA2572

When opening the hood: 2. Slowly lower the hood to about 8 to 12 1. Pull the hood lock release handle in (20 to 30 cm) above the hood lock, located below the instrument panel; then let it drop. the hood will then spring up slightly. 3. Make sure it is securely latched. 2. Pull the lever up at the front of the hood with your fingertips and raise the hood. WARNING 3. Hold the insulator of the support . Make sure the hood is completely rod and insert its end into the slot closed and latched before driving. on the front edge of the hood. Failure to do so could cause the When closing the hood: hood to fly open and result in an 1. While supporting the hood, return the accident. support rod to its original position. . If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 REAR HATCH (Coupe models)

open the hood. WARNING

Do not drive with the rear hatch open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” (P.5-2) of this manual.

SPA2573 REAR HATCH OPENER SWITCH The rear hatch can be opened by pushing the rear hatch opener switch when the Intelligent Key is within the operating range of the rear hatch lock/unlock function regardless of the inside lock knob position. (See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7).) To close the rear hatch, push it down securely.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Always hold area to open or close the rear hatch.

JVP0499X REAR HATCH RELEASE SWITCH The rear hatch release switch is located on the center console. Pull the rear hatch release switch to release the rear hatch.

JVP0317X

NISMO models

CAUTION

Do not use the rear spoiler to open or close the rear hatch. Doing so may damage the rear spoiler. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 TRUNK LID (Roadster models)

4. Firmly pull the release handle until the rear hatch releases. WARNING

. Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” (P.5-2) of this manual. . Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they SPA2580 could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk SECONDARY REAR HATCH RELEASE closed, when not in use, and prevent children’s access to In- The secondary rear hatch release me- telligent Keys. chanism allows opening the rear hatch in the event of discharged battery or emergency. The release handle is located under the cargo room carpet. To open the rear hatch from the passenger compartment, perform the following procedure. 1. Remove the cargo room carpet. 2. Find the rear hatch release handle as shown in the illustration. 3. Free the release handle that is fixed with velcro.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments To connect the power to the trunk lid, push the switch to the ON position. INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk lid securely latched, when not in use, and pre- SPA2692 SPA2681 vent children’s access to Intelligent Keys. TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL The trunk lid can be opened by pushing SWITCH The interior trunk lid release mechanism the trunk lid opener switch when the When the switch located inside the glove allows opening of the trunk lid in the Intelligent Key is within the operating box is in the OFF position , the power to event that people become locked inside range of the trunk lock/unlock function the trunk lid will be canceled and the the trunk. regardless of the inside lock knob posi- trunk lid cannot be opened by the trunk tion. (See “Intelligent Key system” (P.3-7).) lid opener or trunk request switch. When you have to leave the vehicle with a valet and want to keep your belongings safe in the glove box and the trunk, push this switch to OFF and lock the glove box with the mechanical key. Then leave the vehicle and the Intelligent Key with the valet and keep the mechanical key with you. See “Keys” (P.3-3). Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 SPA2682 SPA2683

Releasing inside the trunk SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull The secondary trunk lid release mechan- the release handle until the lock ism allows opening the trunk lid in the releases and push up on the trunk lid. event of discharged battery or emer- The release lever is made of a material gency. that glows in the dark after a brief 1. Open the rear parcel box. exposure to ambient light. 2. Remove the cap with a suitable tool The handle is located inside the trunk . compartment as illustrated. 3. Insert the key into the key cylinder and turn it counterclockwise. The trunk lid will open.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments SOFT TOP (Roadster models)

tion switch is in the ON position, but run the engine to prevent a discharged battery.

Be sure to follow the operating instructions, and all the warnings and cautions in this section. Improper operation of the top could cause a system malfunction, damage, or deterioration of the top material and related parts.

WARNING

SPA2685 . Park the vehicle in a safe and Interior/exterior view level place and apply the parking 1. Soft top indicator light (on the combina- ditions: brake. tion meter) . When the trunk is closed. . Make sure the area is clear of 2. Soft top operating switch . When the vehicle is stopped. obstacles and there is enough 3. Top lock hole . When the engine is running. clearance over the top (for exam- 4. Soft top ple, in a garage or a covered . When the ignition switch is in the ON 5. Top storage lid area). More than approximately position. 6. Trunk lid 6.6 ft (2 m) from the ground is . When the shift lever is in a position 7. Rear window required to open or close the top other than the R (Reverse) position. safely. Otherwise, the top may BEFORE OPERATING THE TOP damage any objects above it The soft top of this vehicle is electrically while moving. The top operating operated. You can fully open or close the CAUTION system could also be damaged. top only by pressing the operating switch . Do not operate the top in a strong located on the center console. Always keep the engine running wind. It could be blown by the The soft top operating switch must be while operating the soft top. The top will also operate when the igni- wind, striking someone or da- operated under all of the following con- mage the top. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 . Do not allow anyone to stand up rial. or extend any portion of their body out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the top is being operated. . In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle with an open top. Always use seat belts and proper child restraints.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the top when the SPA2691 temperature is below 32°F (0°C). This may result in damage to the top material or operating system. CAUTION . Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the top, and dry the . Do not place any objects between surface of the top completely the top cloth and the structure. before opening it. Doing so could interfere with top operation and cause damage to . Do not open the top when it is the top operating system or the wet or damp. This may cause objects. interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material. . Do not place anything on the top and the storage lid. Even small . Be sure to turn off the rear items may interfere with the top window defroster switch. Never operation and could cause da- turn it on while the top is being mage to the top or the vehicle operated or fully opened. The body. heat may damage the top mate-

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments NOTE: . Do not place anything in the top . In case of low battery or low tem- storage area. The top will not fit perature, the top may temporarily there properly, and this could stop moving during the operation. damage the top and/or the vehi- This functions to protect the top cle body. control mechanism, and it is not a . Do not sit or place excessive malfunction. weight on the top and the sto- . If the top is opened and closed rage lid, especially when the top repeatedly in a short period of time is being operated. The top may be or the top operation is stopped while damaged. opening or closing, the top opera- . Do not drive the vehicle with the tion may be automatically stopped top partially opened. Always to protect the system. Wait for ap- make sure the top is either fully proximately 5 minutes before oper- opened or closed before driving. SPA2706 ating the top again. . Secure items so that they cannot be blown from the vehicle while WHEN OPERATING THE TOP driving with the top open. . Do not operate the top manually WARNING except for emergency cases. Manual operation may damage Keep hands and other parts of the the top. body away from moving parts such . Be sure to fully open or fully close as the top, storage lid, side flap the top. Do not release the switch and power windows. half way through the roof opening or closing process. If the top is only partially opened, significant damage to the top could occur. CAUTION

Make sure the trunk lid is securely closed Keep all parts of the top linkage clear before operating the top. of obstructions, or the top latch may not be securely locked. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 when driving the vehicle. Automatic window lowering When the soft top is operating, and any of When the soft top operating switch is the following conditions occur, the top pressed, the power windows will auto- will stop operating. matically be lowered completely. The . When the shift lever is in the R windows do not rise automatically after (Reverse) position. the top operation is completed. Use the . When the vehicle moves at a speed of power window switches to raise them. 3 MPH (5 km/h) or more. . When the battery voltage is extremely low. . When the temperature of the soft top system becomes extremely high. Release the soft top operating switch, SPA1691 and push the switch again to move the top to the fully opened or closed position. Soft top indicator light The soft top indicator light will turn off The soft top indicator light in the instru- when the top operation is completely ment panel shows the conditions of top finished. operation. The light illuminates when the If the soft top indicator light illuminates soft top is being operated or if it is with the ignition switch ON (whether the stopped before reaching the fully opened top is operated or not, and when the top or closed position. When the top is fully is engaged), it may indicate the top opened or closed, the light will turn off. operating system is not functioning prop- The light blinks while the soft top is not erly. Have your vehicle checked as soon fully opened or closed under the following as possible. It is recommended you visit a conditions: NISSAN dealer for this service. . When the vehicle is driven. . When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. Be sure to fully open or close the soft top

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments NOTE: If you release the switch and press it again while the top is being opened, the top will slightly move to the closing direction, then start moving to the opening direction again. The top is designed to move in this way. It is not a malfunction.

SPA2632 SPA2633 OPENING THE TOP CLOSING THE TOP 1. Start the engine. 1. Start the engine. 2. Push OPEN on the soft top operating 2. Push CLOSE on the soft top operating switch and hold it until the top is fully switch and hold it until the top is fully opened. closed. . The soft top indicator light will . The soft top indicator light will illuminate while the top is in mo- illuminate while the top is in motion. (In about 20 seconds, the tion. (In about 20 seconds, the opening movement will finish and closing movement will finish.) the indicator light turns off.) . Windows will automatically be fully . Windows will automatically be fully opened. opened. 3. Release the switch when the top is 3. Release the switch when the top is fully closed. (The indicator light will fully opened. (The indicator light turns turn off.) off.)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 OPENING THE TOP USING THE IN- TELLIGENT KEY The soft top can be opened using the request switch.

SPA2570

Opening the soft top Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and make sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. Push the door handle request switch (driver’s or passenger’s) and hold it until the soft top is fully open.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE If the soft top stops halfway during operation or does not operate normally, follow the procedures shown in the following table. If the procedures in the following table do not solve the symptom, have your vehicle inspected immediately. It is recommended to visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Symptom Beep Possible cause Possible solution The OPEN side of the soft top operating Push the CLOSE side of the soft top operating switch is pushed while the soft top is fully switch when the soft top is fully open. Push Sounds twice open, or the CLOSE side of the soft top the OPEN side of the soft top operating switch operating switch is pushed while the soft when the soft top is fully closed. top is fully closed. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position (automatic transmission The OPEN side of the soft top oper- models only), or shift the shift lever to the N ating switch is pushed, but the soft Sounds twice The shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. (Neutral) position (manual transmission mod- top does not operate. els only), and then operate the soft top. Sounds twice The trunk lid is opened. Fully close the trunk lid. Does not The battery voltage is low. Start the engine again and operate the soft sound top. Does not The operation stops to protect the system. Wait for approximately 5 minutes. sound Check that an object is not trapped inside the rear parcel shelf, side flap and soft top. After Objects are trapped in the moving structure Sounds twice the check, place the ignition switch in the OFF The soft top stops halfway during of the soft top. position, start the engine again and then operation. operate the soft top. Sounds twice The battery voltage is low. Start the engine again and operate the soft top. When the vehicle is being driven, the Sounds con- Immediately park the vehicle in a safe location beep sounds. tinuously The soft top is partially opened. and fully open or fully close the soft top.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 IF THE TOP DOES NOT OPEN OR CLOSE ELECTRICALLY WARNING If you cannot operate the soft top with . the operating switch, first check whether Do not drive with the top partially all the following operating conditions are opened. met. . If the top cannot be operated . vehicle is stopped properly, have your vehicle . ignition switch is ON (Run the engine checked as soon as possible. It is when operating the top.) recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. . the trunk is closed . the shift lever is in a position other than the R (Reverse) position If the top still does not move under the CAUTION above conditions or has any system SPA2715 malfunction, it is recommended you visit The storage lid is extremely heavy. 1. Open the trunk lid. In the event of a a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. The storage lid should be manually discharged battery, the secondary When you must close the top by yourself, opened or closed by two people. trunk release mechanism should be in the event of emergency or when an operated. (See “Secondary trunk lid immediate dealer service is not available, release” (P.3-22).) close the top manually according to the procedures shown in this section. 2. Open the top storage lid When closing the soft top manually: a. Remove the board inside of the trunk by removing the clips . . Move the vehicle to a safe place, away from traffic. b. Pull the lock release cables (right . Two people should perform this pro- and left) as illustrated, then close cedure, as some of the top parts are the trunk lid. extremely heavy. NOTE: The top cannot be opened manually. Use a cloth or other tool to protect your hands when pulling on the lock release cables .

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments SPA2686 SPA2703 c. Pull up the storage lid from the left 3. Close the soft top. and right side of the vehicle by a. Pull up the top simultaneously from hand. the right and left side of the vehicle while holding the storage lid. CAUTION

Make sure to close the trunk lid SPA2704 before opening the storage lid. The storage lid may contact the trunk lid b. When the rear top is pulled up and damage it. from the storage area, one person must hold the storage lid and another person must pull up the soft top. c. Pull up the top using both hands, holding the rear top as illustrated. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31 CAUTION CAUTION

Make sure to hold the rear top to Make sure to close the storage lid avoid the front and rear parts separ- completely. The storage lid may ating. Otherwise the top may be contact the soft top and damage it. damaged.

SPA2705 d. Pull down and slide the storage lid to close while holding the rear soft top from the right and left side of the vehicle.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments speeds. The rear of the top is not locked completely, and this may allow wind and rain to get into your vehicle.

CARE OF THE SOFT TOP AND THE VEHICLE BODY To use your Roadster safely and comfor- tably, you need to observe all the warnings and cautions shown in the previous pages. Also, to maintain a good appearance of the soft top and the vehicle body, you need to care for them by cleaning SPA2688 SPA2689 and/or washing properly. e. Close the front and rear parts of the 4. Lock the front part of the soft top. soft top at the same time as a. Remove the cap as illustrated. CAUTION illustrated. b. Insert a suitable tool (located in . the trunk) into the hole and turn Do not use an automatic car wash clockwise. or a high-pressure car wash to clean your vehicle. The top may be damaged and water may leak CAUTION into the inside of the vehicle. . Store the vehicle with the top . After closing the top manually, closed if it is not to be used for have the system checked and/or long periods. Keeping the top repaired as soon as possible. It is stowed for long periods may recommended you visit a NISSAN cause wrinkles on the surface of dealer for this service. the top. . Avoid leaving the vehicle outside for long periods or driving at high See “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2) for detailed

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33 FRONT, SIDE AND REAR UNIQUE PARTS (NISMO models) instructions. The NISMO models have the following . A protective clear tape is applied to unique parts on the front, side and rear of the top storage lid painted surface the vehicle. where the soft top contacts the sur- . Front bumper with an aerodynamic face. When the top is fully closed, the splitter tape may transmit some light, visible . Side sill extensions from the inside of the vehicle. This . Rear bumper with an aerodynamic does not affect the water and air diffuser tightness of the seal. . Large-diameter exhaust pipes . The inner surface of the trunk and top These parts are close to the ground and storage lids may show a fibrous, or may be damaged if they contact objects marbled pattern. This is the normal such as curbs, parking blocks, etc. appearance of the material used in these parts. CAUTION

Reduce vehicle speed to decrease the possibility of damaging these parts when: . driving on bumpy or rutted roads . entering or exiting parking gar- ages and driveways . driving over speed bumps

JVP0315X 3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments FUEL-FILLER DOOR

JVP0318X JVP0316X SPA2581 OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR CAUTION CAUTION To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-filler door by using one of the follow- The approach and departure angles Do not step on the front bumper with ing operations, then push the left side of are small. Reduce vehicle speed an aerodynamic splitter. Doing so the door. when the vehicle approaches or could damage it. . Push the door handle request switch leaves a steep hill. Otherwise, the with the Intelligent Key carried with front bumper with an aerodynamic you. splitter, rear bumper with an aero- . Push the UNLOCK button on the dynamic diffuser and exhaust pipes Intelligent Key. may contact the road surface and be . damaged. Insert the mechanical key into the door lock cylinder and turn it to the rear of the vehicle. . Push the power door lock switch to the UNLOCK position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35 To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely also cause the malfunction indi- avoid paint damage. and lock all doors by operating the door cator light to come on. . Insert the cap straight into the handle request switch, the LOCK button . on the Intelligent Key, the mechanical key Never pour fuel into the throttle fuel-filler tube, then tighten until or the power door lock switch. body to attempt to start your the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to vehicle. tighten the fuel-filler cap properly FUEL-FILLER CAP . Do not fill a portable fuel contain- may cause the malfunction er in the vehicle or trailer. Static indicator light (MIL) to illuminate. WARNING electricity can cause an explosion If the light illuminates be- of flammable liquid, vapor or gas cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the . Gasoline is extremely flammable in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death cap and continue to drive the and highly explosive under cer- vehicle. The light should turn tain conditions. You could be when filling portable fuel containers: off after a few driving trips. If the burned or seriously injured if it is light does not turn off after a misused or mishandled. Always — Always place the container on few driving trips, have the vehicle stop engine and do not smoke or the ground when filling. inspected. It is recommended you allow open flames or sparks near — Do not use electronic devices visit a NISSAN dealer for this the vehicle when refueling. when filling. service. . Do not attempt to top off the fuel — Keep the pump nozzle in con- . The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will tank after the fuel pump nozzle tact with the container while appear if the fuel-filler cap is not shuts off automatically. Contin- you are filling it. properly tightened. It may take a ued refueling may cause fuel few driving trips for the message overflow, resulting in fuel spray — Use only approved portable to be displayed. Failure to tighten and possibly a fire. fuel containers for flammable the fuel-filler cap properly after . Use only an original equipment liquid. the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning type fuel-filler cap as a replace- appears may cause the Mal- ment. It has a built-in safety valve function Indicator Light (MIL) to needed for proper operation of illuminate. the fuel system and emission CAUTION control system. An incorrect cap . can result in a serious malfunc- If fuel is spilled on the vehicle tion and possible injury. It could body, flush it away with water to 3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments CAP warning after tightening the fuel cap.

SPA2837 SPA2810

To remove the fuel-filler cap: LOOSE FUEL CAP warning 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock- The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on wise to remove. the vehicle information display when the 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly holder on the hook while refueling. after the vehicle has been refueled. It may To install the fuel-filler cap: take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube. To turn off the warning, perform the following steps: 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard. 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. (See “Fuel-filler cap” (P.3-36).) 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks. 3. Push the switch for about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37 TILT STEERING SUN VISORS

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. . Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of SPA2583 position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a MANUAL OPERATION crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air Tilt operation bag if you are up against it when Push the lock lever down and adjust it inflates. Always sit back against the steering wheel up or down to the the seatback and as far away as desired position. practical from the steering wheel. Pull the lock lever up securely to lock the Always use the seat belts. steering wheel in place.

SIC3451 3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments MIRRORS

CAUTION

. Do not store the main sun visor before storing the extension sun visor. . Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downwards.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor . 2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side . SPA2447 SPA2143 3. Draw out the extension sun visor (if so equipped) from the main sun visor INSIDE MIRROR Manual anti-glare type to block further glare. Adjust the height and the angle of the The night position will reduce glare inside mirror to the desired position. from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night. Use the day position when driving in daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39 switch to turn the system on. Do not allow any object to cover the sensors or apply glass cleaner on them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in improper operation. For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, see “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” (P.2-52). OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING SPA2450 SPA2319 Objects viewed in the outside mirror Automatic anti-glare type on the passenger side are closer Adjusting outside mirrors than they appear. Be careful when The inside mirror is designed so that it moving to the right. Using only this The outside mirror control switch is automatically changes reflection accord- mirror could cause an accident. Use located on the armrest. ing to the intensity of the headlights of the inside mirror or glance over your The outside mirror will operate only when the following vehicle. shoulder to properly judge distances the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON The anti-glare system will be automati- to other objects. position. cally turned on when the ignition switch is Turn the switch right or left to select the pushed to the ON position. right or left side mirror , then adjust When the anti-glare system is turned on, using the control switch . the indicator light will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. Push the “*” switch to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally. The indicator light will turn off. Push the “I”

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Defrosting outside mirrors (if so equipped) The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear window defroster switch is operated.

SPA1829 SIC3869

Foldable outside mirrors VANITY MIRROR Fold the outside mirror by pushing it To use the front vanity mirror, pull down toward the rear of the vehicle. the sun visor and pull up the cover.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41 MEMO

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments 4 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Safety note ...... 4-3 Ventilators ...... 4-24 Center multi-function control panel (models with Center ventilators ...... 4-24 navigation system) ...... 4-4 Side ventilators ...... 4-24 How to use multi-function controller...... 4-4 Heater and air conditioner...... 4-25 How to use touch screen...... 4-5 Automatic air conditioner (Type A) (if Menu options ...... 4-7 so equipped)...... 4-26 How to select menus on the screen...... 4-7 Automatic air conditioner (Type B) (if Vehicle information and settings (models with so equipped)...... 4-28 navigation system) ...... 4-8 Operating tips ...... 4-30 How to use STATUS button ...... 4-8 In-cabin microfilter ...... 4-30 How to use brightness control and display Servicing air conditioner...... 4-30 ON/OFF button ...... 4-8 Audio system ...... 4-30 How to use INFO button ...... 4-8 Audio operation precautions ...... 4-30 How to use SETTING button ...... 4-11 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc RearView Monitor (models with (CD) player ...... 4-43 navigation system) ...... 4-17 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc RearView Monitor system operation ...... 4-18 (CD) player ...... 4-52 How to read displayed lines...... 4-18 DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player operation How to park with predictive course lines ...... 4-19 (models with navigation system) ...... 4-55 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-22 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port Predictive course line settings ...... 4-22 (models with navigation system) ...... 4-59 RearView Monitor system limitations...... 4-22 Bluetooth® streaming audio (models with navigation system) ...... 4-63 System maintenance ...... 4-23 iPod® player operation (models with Phone setting ...... 4-84 navigation system) ...... 4-68 Troubleshooting guide ...... 4-85 Auxiliary input jacks (models with Bluetooth® hands-free phone system (models navigation system) ...... 4-70 without navigation system) ...... 4-86 CD/DVD/USB memory care and cleaning ...... 4-72 Regulatory information ...... 4-87 Steering-wheel-mounted controls Using the system...... 4-88 for audio...... 4-73 Control buttons ...... 4-90 Antenna ...... 4-74 Getting started ...... 4-90 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-75 List of voice commands...... 4-92 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode ...... 4-96 (models with navigation system) ...... 4-76 Troubleshooting guide ...... 4-98 Regulatory information ...... 4-77 NISSAN Voice Recognition System Voice commands ...... 4-77 (models with navigation system)...... 4-99 Control buttons...... 4-78 NISSAN voice recognition Connecting procedure ...... 4-78 Standard Mode...... 4-99 Phone selection...... 4-79 Using the system...... 4-102 Quick Dial ...... 4-79 NISSAN voice recognition Alternate Making a call ...... 4-82 Command Mode ...... 4-110 Receiving a call ...... 4-82 Using the system...... 4-119 During a call ...... 4-83 Troubleshooting guide ...... 4-124 SAFETY NOTE

Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme temperature conditions [below WARNING −4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)]. Operating this system under these con- . Do not disassemble or modify ditions may result in system malfunc- this system. If you do, it may tions. result in accidents, fire, or electric shock. . Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. . In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric shock. . Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake to view the images on the front center display screen.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL (models with navigation system)

SAA2273 SAA2274

1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-8) HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTION 2, 3, 7, 8, 9. CONTROLLER For navigation system control buttons Choose an item on the display using the (Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.) main directional buttons (or additional directional buttons with navigation 4. Multi-function controller (P.4-4) system) or center dial , and push the 5. “PHONE” Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone ENTER button for operation. System button (P.4-76) 6. “ OFF” brightness control and display Push the BACK button to return the ON/OFF button (P.4-8) display to the previous screen or delete 10. “INFO” vehicle and navigation information characters. Pushing BACK may or may button (P.4-8) not save the settings depending on the 11. “SETTING” button (P.4-11) menu. For the VOICE button functions, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

4-4 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system. CAUTION WARNING . The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is . ALWAYS give your full attention to hit with a hard or sharp object. If driving. the glass screen breaks, do not . Avoid using vehicle features that touch it. Doing so could result in could distract you. If distracted, an injury. you could lose control of your . To clean the display, use a soft, vehicle and cause an accident. dry cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft SAA2473 cloth. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any Touch screen operation kind of solvent or paper towel With this system, the same operations as with a chemical cleaning agent. those for the multi-function controller are They will scratch or deteriorate possible using the touch screen opera- the panel. tion. . Do not splash any liquid such as Selecting the item: water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will Touch an item to select it. To select the cause the system to malfunction. “Audio” settings, touch the “Audio” area on the screen. To ensure safe driving, some functions Touch the BACK button to return to the cannot be operated while driving. previous screen. The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 . Delete: Deletes the last character that has been input with one touch. Push and hold the button to delete all of the characters. . OK: Completes character inputs. Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. SAA2474 SAA2475 Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the screen. Adjusting an item: Inputting characters: Touch the + or − button to adjust the Touch the letter or number . settings. There are some options available when Touch the or button to move inputting characters. to the previous or next item. . Uppercase: Touch the or button to move Shows uppercase characters. to the previous or next page. . Lowercase: Shows lowercase characters. . Symbols: Shows symbols such as the question mark (?). . Space: Inserts a space.

4-6 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SAA2143 SAA2476 SAA2477

MENU OPTIONS Available items HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE The start menu can be displayed using SCREEN Destination/Route: the menu control switch on the steering- Vehicle functions are viewed on the dis- wheel-mounted controls. These items are for the navigation sys- play screen in menus. To select each key tem. See the separate Navigation System 1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is item, highlight the preferred item using Owner’s Manual for details. displayed, push and hold the menu the multi-function controller and push control switch until the “Menu Op- Info: the ENTER button. tions” screen appears. Displays the information screen. It is the Whenever a menu selection is made or 2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting same screen that appears when you push menu item is highlighted, different areas the menu control switch up or down, the INFO button. on the screen provide you with important and then push the menu control information. See the following for details. Settings: switch to select it. 1. Header: Displays the settings screen. It is the same screen that appears when you push the Shows the path used to get to the SETTING button. current screen. (i.e. push SETTING button > choose “Comfort” menu item.) Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS (models with navigation system)

2. Menu Selections: HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON Shows the options to choose within You can check information related to the that menu screen. audio, climate control system, fuel con- 3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator: sumption and navigation system by Shows that the multi-function con- pressing the STATUS button repeatedly. troller may be used to move UP/ HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON- DOWN on the screen and select more TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUT- options. TON 4. Menu Items Counter: Push the “ OFF” button to switch the Shows the total number of items display brightness to the daytime mode listed across all pages for the current or the nighttime mode, and to adjust the menu (i.e. 3/7). display brightness using the multi-func- 5. Footer/Information Line: tion controller while the indicator is displayed at the bottom of the screen. SAA2478 Provides more information (if available) about the menu selection cur- The display brightness can also be ad- 1. Push the INFO button on the control rently highlighted. (i.e. Adjust head justed using the brightness UP button (+) panel. lamp on time after shut-off.) or brightness DOWN button (−). 2. Select an item from the INFO menu. Push and hold the “ OFF” button for 3. After viewing or adjusting the infor- more than 2 seconds to turn the display mation on the following screens, push off. Push the button again to turn the the BACK button to return to the INFO display on. menu. HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON See the separate Navigation System The display screen shows vehicle and Owner’s Manual for the following items: navigation information for your conveni- . Where am I? ence. . Traffic Info The information shown on the screen . Weather Info should be a guide to determine the . Map Update condition of the vehicle. See the following . Navigation Version for details. *When the ignition switch is in the ON 4-8 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems position, the “Navigation Version” key is Fuel Economy information displayed after selecting the “Others” key. The approximate distance to empty, average fuel economy and current fuel economy will be displayed for reference. To reset the average fuel economy (Avg Fuel Econ), select the “Reset Fuel Eco” key. If the “Fuel Eco History” key is selected, the average fuel consumption history will be displayed in graph form along with the average for the previous Reset-to-Reset period. The unit can be converted between “US” and “Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING SAA2479 button” (P.4-11).) The fuel economy information may differ from the information displayed on the vehicle information display. This is due to the timing difference in updating the information and does not indicate a malfunction.

SAA2480

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 SAA2481 SAA2482 SAA3003 Example Maintenance information 1. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance schedule. To determine the The Reminder will be automatically dis- The maintenance intervals can be dis- recommended maintenance interval, played when the specified distance has played for the engine oil, oil filter, tire and refer to the “9. Maintenance and been driven and every time the ignition other reminders. schedules” section. switch is pushed to the ACC or ON To set a maintenance interval, select a position. The reminder will not appear 2. To display the reminder automatically while driving. preferred item from the list. when the desired distance is reached, You can also set to display a message to select the “Reminder” key. Select the “OK” key to hide the reminder for the rest of the current drive. remind you that the maintenance needs 3. Reset the driving distance to the new to be performed. maintenance schedule. To stop the reminder from appearing, The following example shows how to set perform one of the following actions: 4. To return to the previous screen, push . the engine oil maintenance information. the BACK button. Select the “Reset Distance”. Use the same steps to set the other . Deactivate the “Reminder”. maintenance information. The unit can be converted between “US” . and “Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING Increase the “Interval” distance to be button” (P.4-11).) more than the current distance being tracked.

4-10 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SAA2483 SAA2484 SAA2485 Example HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON Others information Audio settings The Others information display will ap- The display as illustrated will appear when the SETTING button is pushed. The display as illustrated will appear pear when pushing the INFO button and when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the “Others” key. For navigation settings, refer to the selecting the “Audio” key. separate Navigation System Owner’s GPS Position: Manual. Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade: For the details of this item, see the To adjust the speaker tone quality and separate Navigation System Owner’s sound balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, Manual. “Balance” or “Fade” key and adjust it with Voice Recognition: the multi-function controller. For the details of this item, see “NISSAN These items can also be adjusted by Voice Recognition System (models with pushing and turning the AUDIO knob. navigation system)” (P.4-99). Speed Sensitive Vol.: The audio system’s volume is increased with the vehicle speed. Select the “Speed Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 Sensitive Vol.” and adjust the effect level Bluetooth® settings with the multi-function controller. The For details of the “Bluetooth” settings, see Speed Sensitive Volume function is “Bluetooth® hands-free phone system turned off when the level is set to “OFF”. (models with navigation system)” (P.4-76) Increasing the value will cause the vo- or “Bluetooth® streaming audio (models lume to increase faster with vehicle with navigation system)” (P.4-63). speed. DivX® Registration Code: The registration code for a device that is used to download DivX® files will be displayed on the screen. If a disc is loaded or a USB memory is connected to the audio system, this function will not be activated. SAA2554 Display Album Cover Art: Example When this item is turned to ON, the album Volume and Beeps settings cover image is displayed when playing iPod® or MP3 music files through a CD, The display as illustrated will appear DVD or USB memory. When the image is when pushing the SETTING button, selecting the “Volume & Beeps” key. not properly embedded in the file or device, the image will not be displayed. Audio Volume: Phone settings To increase or decrease the audio volume, select the “Audio Volume” and For details of the “Phone” settings, see adjust it with the multi-function control- “Bluetooth® hands-free phone system ler. You can also adjust the audio volume (models with navigation system)” (P.4-76). by turning the VOLUME control knob. Guidance Volume: To adjust the guidance voice volume, select the “Guidance Volume” and adjust it with the multi-function controller.

4-12 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call: the screen off, the screen turns on for For the details of these items, see “Blue- further operation. The screen will turn off tooth® hands-free phone system (models automatically 5 seconds after the opera- with navigation system)” (P.4-76). tion is finished. To turn on the screen, set this item to the Switch Beeps: ON position, or push and hold the “ When this item is turned to ON, you will OFF” button. hear a beep sound when you use a . Brightness/Contrast/Background button. Color Guidance Voice: To adjust the brightness and contrast of When this item is turned to ON, you will the screen, select the “Brightness” or hear voice guidance in the navigation “Contrast” key. operation or in other operations. Then, you can adjust the brightness and SAA2486 contrast using the multi-function controller. Display settings For information on the “Background Col- The display as illustrated will appear or” key, refer to the separate Navigation when pushing the SETTING button and System Owner’s Manual. selecting the “Display” key. For Roadster models: Display Adjustment: Depending on the driver’s seat position, To adjust the display settings, select the the display could be hard to read. Adjust “Display Adjustment” key. The following the brightness and contrast of the display settings are available. on the setting screen. . Display Color Theme: To turn off the screen, push the ENTER Choose the theme color of the menu button and turn the “Display” indicator off. screen from “Black”, “Blue” or “Red”. The other method is to push and hold the “ OFF” button for more than 2 seconds. When any mode button is pushed with Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 Clock Format (24h): When this item is turned to ON, the 24- hour clock is displayed. When this item is not turned to ON, the 12-hour clock is displayed. Offset (hour)/(min): Adjust the time by increasing or decreas- ing per hour or per minute. Daylight Saving Time: Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time application. Time Zone: SAA2487 Choose the time zone from the following JVH0308M . Clock settings Pacific Others settings . Mountain The display as illustrated will appear . The Others settings display will appear when pushing the SETTING button and Central when pushing the SETTING button and selecting the “Clock” key. . Eastern selecting the “Others” key. . The clock settings display cannot be Atlantic The following items are available: . Newfoundland operated while driving. Stop the vehicle . Comfort in a safe place and apply the parking . Hawaii . Language & Units brake before setting the clock. . Alaska . Voice Recognition On-screen Clock: . Camera When this item is turned to ON, a clock is . Image Viewer always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system. 4-14 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Light Off Delay: Choose the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 second periods. Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: When this item is turned to ON, the wiper interval is adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed. Selective Door Unlock: When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation. When the door SAA2488 handle request switch on the driver’s or SAA2490 front passenger’s side door is pushed to Example be unlocked, only the corresponding door Language & Units settings Comfort settings is unlocked first. All the doors can be The Language & Units settings display will The display as illustrated will appear unlocked if the door unlock operation is when pushing the SETTING button and performed again within 60 seconds. appear when pushing the SETTING but- selecting the “Others” key, and then ton, selecting the “Others” key, and then When this item is turned to OFF, all the selecting the “Language & Units” key. selecting the “Comfort” key. This key does doors will be unlocked after the door not appear on the display until the igni- unlock operation is performed once. Select Language: tion switch is pushed to the ON position. Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock: Select the “Select Language” key. Choose Auto Interior Illumination: “English”, “Français” or “Español” for your When this item is turned to ON, door lock/ favorite display appearance. When this item is turned to ON, the unlock function by pushing the door interior lights will illuminate if any door is handle request switch will be activated. If you select the “Français” key, the French unlocked. language will be displayed, so please use Return All Settings to Default: the French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a Light Sensitivity: Select this item and then select “YES” to French Owner’s Manual, see “Owner’s Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic return all settings to the default. Manual/Service Manual order informa- headlights higher (right) or lower (left). tion” (P.10-26).

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 Select Units: Select the “Select Units” key. Choose “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, °C, L/100 km) for your favorite display appearance. Voice Recognition settings For details about the “Voice Recognition” settings, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System (models with navigation system)” (P.4-99). Camera settings The “Camera” screen will appear when selecting the “Camera” key. For details about the camera system SAA2491 SAA2492 operation, see “RearView Monitor (models Full Screen Display: with navigation system)” (P.4-17). Image Viewer The image files in the USB memory will be The full screen display will appear when displayed. To display the Image Viewer, selecting the “Full Screen Display” key. push the SETTING button, select the To operate the Image Viewer or to “Other” key and then select the “Image change the settings, select the desired Viewer” key. The image of the selected file key using the multi-function controller. is displayed on the right side of the . (Start) screen. Select the “ ” key to start playing When a number of folders are included in the slideshow. the USB memory, select a folder from the . (Stop) list to display the file list. Select the “ ” key to stop the Images will not be shown on the display slideshow. while the vehicle is in any drive position to . (Next) reduce driver distraction. To view images, Select the “ ” key to display the next stop the vehicle in a safe location and file. apply the parking brake. 4-16 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems REARVIEW MONITOR (models with navigation system)

. (Previous) — Colors: 32768 (15-bit) Select the “ ” key to display the — Maximum File Name lengths: 253- WARNING previous file. Bytes Setting the Image Viewer: — Maximum Folders: 500 Failure to follow the warnings and — Maximum Images per Folder: 1024 instructions for proper use of the The Image Viewer setting display will . appear when selecting the “Settings” key If an electronic device (such as a RearView Monitor system could re- on the full screen display. The following digital camera) is directly connected sult in serious injury or death. settings are available for the full screen to the vehicle using a USB cable, no . The RearView Monitor is a conve- display. image will be displayed on the screen. nience but it is not a substitute . If the file name is too long, some file . Slideshow Speed for proper backing. Always turn names may not be entirely displayed. Select the “Slideshow Speed” key. and look out the windows, and . When the total number of characters From the following display, select the check mirrors to be sure that it is in the file name exceeds 100 or if 1 file changing time from 5, 10, 30, 60 safe to move before operating name in a directory exceeds 100 seconds or “No Auto Change”. the vehicle. Always back up characters, all files will show a shor- slowly. . Slideshow Order tened 8-character version. The image . The system is designed as an aid Select the “Slideshow Order” key. From will still be displayed when selected. the following display, select “Random” to the driver in showing large or “Order List”. For “Order List”, the stationary objects directly behind image order is the order of the files as the vehicle, to help avoid dama- stored on the USB memory. ging the vehicle. . The distance guide line and the Operating tips: vehicle width line should be used . Only files that meet the following as a reference only when the conditions will be displayed. vehicle is on a level paved sur- — Image type: JPEG face. The distance viewed on the — File Extensions: *.jpg, *jpeg monitor is for reference only and — Maximum Resolution: 2048 × 1536 may be different than the actual pixels distance between the vehicle and displayed objects. — Maximum Size: 2-MB

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is placed in the “R” (Reverse) position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active. JVH1353X SAA1896 To display the rear view, the RearView HOW TO READ DISPLAYED LINES Monitor system uses a camera located Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle just above the vehicle’s license plate . width and distances to objects with REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OP- reference to the bumper line are ERATION displayed on the monitor. With the ignition switch in the “ON” Distance guide lines: position, move the shift lever to the “R” Indicate distances from the bumper. (Reverse) position to operate the Rear- . Red line : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) View Monitor. . Yellow line : approx. 3 ft (1 m) . Green line : approx. 7 ft (2 m) . Green line : approx. 10 ft (3 m) Vehicle width guide lines : Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

4-18 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Predictive course lines : vehicle. Indicate the predictive course when backing up. The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES

WARNING

. If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predictive course line may not be displayed correctly. SAA1897 . On a snow-covered or slippery 1. Visually check that the parking space road, there may be a difference is safe before parking your vehicle. between the predictive course line and the actual course line. 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen when the shift . The displayed lines will appear lever is moved to the “R” (Reverse) slightly off to the right because position. the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic Transmission models) or in an appropriate gear (Manual Transmission models) and apply the parking brake. Difference between predictive and actual distances The displayed guide lines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guide lines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

SAA1898 JVH1355X

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting Backing up on a steep uphill: the steering wheel so that the pre- When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dictive course lines enter the park- distance guide lines and the vehicle width ing space . guide lines are shown closer than the 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make actual distance. Note that any object on the vehicle width guide lines parallel the hill is further than it appears on the to the parking space while referring monitor. to the predictive course lines. 4-20 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems JVH1356X SAA1923 SAA1924

Backing up on a steep downhill: Backing up near a projecting object: Backing up behind a projecting object: When backing up the vehicle down a hill, The predictive course lines do not The position is shown further than the the distance guide lines and the vehicle touch the object in the display. However, position in the display. However, the width guide lines are shown further than the vehicle may hit the object if it projects position is actually at the same dis- the actual distance. Note that any object over the actual backing up course. tance as the position . The vehicle may on the hill is closer than it appears on the hit the object when backing up to the monitor. position if the object projects over the actual backing up course. Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 ADJUSTING THE SCREEN REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIM- To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, ITATIONS Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor, push the SETTING button with the RearView Monitor on, WARNING select the “Display” key on the screen and select the item key and adjust the Listed below are the system limita- level using the multifunction controller. tions for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, with these system limitations could Contrast and Black Level of the Rear View result in serious injury or death. Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied. . The system cannot completely NOTE: eliminate blind spots and may not show every object. SAA2404 Do not adjust any of the display settings . of the RearView Monitor while the Underneath the bumper and the vehicle is moving. Make sure the park- PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE SET- corner areas of the bumper can- ing brake is firmly applied. TINGS not be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring To toggle on and off the predictive course range limitation. The system will lines: not show small objects below the 1. Push the SETTING button. bumper, and may not show ob- 2. Select “Others” key and push the jects close to the bumper or on ENTER button. the ground. 3. Select “Camera” key and push the . Objects viewed in the RearView ENTER button. Monitor differ from actual dis- Predictive Course Lines: tance because a wide-angle lens is used. When this item is turned on, the predictive . course lines will be displayed on the Objects in the RearView Monitor monitor when the shift lever is in the “R” will appear visually opposite (Reverse) position. compared to when viewed in the rear view and outside mirrors.

4-22 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . Use the displayed lines as a re- display objects. ference. The lines are highly af- . When strong light is directly coming fected by the number of on the camera, objects may not be occupants, fuel level, vehicle po- displayed clearly. sition, road conditions and road . Vertical lines may be seen in objects grade. on the screen. This is due to strong . Make sure that the trunk lid or reflected light from the bumper. rear hatch is securely closed . The screen may flicker under fluores- when backing up. cent light. . . Do not put anything on the rear- The colors of objects on the RearView view camera. The rearview cam- Monitor may differ somewhat from era is installed above the license the actual color of objects. plate. . Objects on the monitor may not be . clear in a dark environment. When washing the vehicle with . JVH1353X high-pressure water, be sure not If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on to spray it around the camera. the camera, the RearView Monitor SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Otherwise, water may enter the may not display objects clearly. Clean camera unit causing water con- the camera. densation on the lens, a malfunc- . Do not use wax on the camera win- CAUTION tion, fire or an electric shock. dow. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent . Do not use alcohol, benzine or . Do not strike the camera. It is a diluted with water. thinner to clean the camera. This precision instrument. Otherwise, will cause discoloration. To clean it may malfunction or cause da- the camera, wipe with a cloth mage resulting in a fire or an dampened with diluted mild electric shock. cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth. The following are operating limitations . and do not represent a system malfunc- Do not damage the camera as the tion: monitor screen may be adversely affected. . When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 VENTILATORS

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera , RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

SAA2275 SAA2288 CENTER VENTILATORS SIDE VENTILATORS Open or close, and adjust the air flow Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators. direction of ventilators as illustrated.

4-24 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the WARNING vehicle. . The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. . Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly SAA2493 fatal injuries to people or animals. . Do not use the recirculation mode For the models with navigation system, for long periods as it may cause push the “STATUS” button to display the the interior air to become stale heater and air conditioner status screen. and the windows to fog up. (See “How to use STATUS button” (P.4-8).)

Start the engine and operate the heater and air conditioner system. NOTE: . Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. . When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. . The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically. A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. Dehumidified defrosting or defogging: 1. Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial SAA2277 to the desired position.

1. “ ” fan speed control dial 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER “ ” position. 2. Temperature control dial* (Type A) (if so equipped) * The display of degrees: 3. Turn the temperature control dial to “60-75-90” is used for °F (US). Automatic operation set the desired temperature. . “18-25-32” is used for °C (Canada). To quickly remove ice from the Cooling and/or dehumidified heating outside of the windows, turn the 3. Air flow control dial (AUTO): “ ” fan speed control dial to the 4. “A/C” air conditioner button This mode may be used all year round. maximum position. 5. Intake air control button (“ ” outside air The system works automatically to con- . As soon as possible after the wind- and “ ” air recirculation) trol the inside temperature, air flow dis- shield is clean, turn the air flow 6. “ ” rear window defroster button (See tribution and fan speed after the control dial to the “AUTO” position “Rear window defroster switch” (P.2-33).) preferred temperature is set manually. to return to the auto mode. 1. Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial . When the air flow control dial is and air flow control dial to the “AUTO” turned to the “ ”or“ ” position, position. The air conditioner will auto- the air conditioner will automati- matically turn on. cally be turned on at outside temperatures above 23°F (−5°C) to 4-26 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems defog the windshield, and the air . Push the “ ” air intake control To turn the system off recirculation mode will automati- button to draw outside air into the Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to cally be turned off. passenger compartment. The indica- the “OFF” position. Outside air is drawn into the pas- tor light on the “ ” side will illumi- senger compartment to improve nate. the defogging performance. . To switch to the automatic control mode, push the “ ” air intake Manual operation control button for approximately 2 Fan speed control: seconds. The indicator lights (both air recirculation and outside air circula- Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial tion sides) will flash twice, and then clockwise (+) or counterclockwise (−) to the air intake will be controlled auto- manually control the fan speed. matically. Turn the dial to the “AUTO” position to return to automatic control of the fan Air flow control: speed. Turning the air flow control dial selects the air outlet to: Temperature control: Turn the temperature control dial to set : Air flows from center and side ventilators. the desired temperature. : Air flows from center and side venti- . The temperature can be set within the lators and foot outlets. following range. : Air flows mainly from foot outlets. — For U.S.: 60 to 90°F (16 to 32°C) : Air flows from defroster and foot — For Canada: 64 to 90°F (18 to 32°C) outlets. Air intake control: : Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. . Push the “ ” air intake control button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the “ ” side will illuminate. The air recirculation mode cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode “ ”. Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature. . The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed will also be controlled automatically. A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction. Dehumidified defrosting or defogging: 1. Push the “ ” front defroster button. SAA2876 (The indicator light on the button will come on.) 1. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button/ AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER 2. Turn the temperature control dial to “ ” fan speed control dial (Type B) (if so equipped) 2. “ ” front defroster button set the desired temperature. . 3. “ ” intake air control button Automatic operation To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, turn the “ ” fan 4. “AUTO” automatic air conditioner ON Cooling and/or dehumidified heating button/Temperature control dial speed control dial and set it to the (AUTO): 5. “ ” rear window defroster button (See maximum position. “Rear window defroster switch” (P.2-33).) This mode may be used all year round. . As soon as possible after the wind- 6. “MODE” manual air flow control button The system works automatically to con- shield is clean, push the “AUTO” button 7. “OFF” button trol the inside temperature, air flow dis- to return to the auto mode. tribution and fan speed after the . When the “ ” front defroster button preferred temperature is set manually. is pushed, the air conditioner will 1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The automatically be turned on at outside indicator on the button will illuminate temperatures above 23°F (−5°C) to and AUTO will be displayed.) defog the windshield, and the air recirculate mode will automatically be turned off. 4-28 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Outside air is drawn into the passen- . To switch to the automatic control ger compartment to improve the mode, push the “ ” air intake control defogging performance. button for approximately 2 seconds. The indicator light will flash, and then Manual operation the air intake will be controlled auto- Fan speed control: matically. Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to Air flow control: manually control the fan speed. Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow Push the “AUTO” button to return to control button selects the air outlet to: automatic control of the fan speed. : Air flows from center and side venti- Temperature control: lators. Turn the temperature control dial to set : Air flows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets. the desired temperature. : Air flows mainly from foot outlets. SAA2324 . The temperature can be set within the : Air flows from defroster and foot following range. outlets. — For U.S.: 60 to 90°F (16 to 32°C) — For Canada: 64 to 90°F (18 to 32°C) To turn the system off Air intake control: Push the “OFF” button. . Push the “ ” air intake control button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light “ ” will come on. The air recirculation mode cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode “ ”. . Push the “ ” air intake control button to switch to the outside air intake mode. The indicator light “ ” SAA2315 will turn off.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 AUDIO SYSTEM

OPERATING TIPS SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS When the engine coolant temperature The air conditioning system in your and outside air temperature are low, the NISSAN is charged with a refrigerant Radio air flow from the foot outlets may not designed with the environment in mind. Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON operate. This is not a malfunction. After This refrigerant will not harm the position and push the radio band select the coolant temperature warms up, air earth’s ozone layer. However, special button to turn on the radio. If you listen to will flow normally from the foot outlets. charging equipment and lubricant are the radio with the engine not running, the The sensors and on the instrument required when servicing your NISSAN air ignition switch should be pushed to the panel helps maintain a constant tem- conditioner. Using improper refrigerants ACC position. perature. Do not put anything on or or lubricants will cause severe damage to Radio reception is affected by station around this sensor. your air conditioning system. (See “Capa- signal strength, distance from radio cities and recommended fluids/lubri- transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains IN-CABIN MICROFILTER cants” (P.10-2) for air conditioning and other external influences. Intermit- The air conditioning system is equipped system refrigerant and lubricant recom- tent changes in reception quality nor- with an in-cabin microfilter which collects mendations.) mally are caused by these external dirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure the air Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service influences. conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates your environmentally friendly air condi- Using a cellular phone in or near the efficiently, replace the filter in accordance tioning system. vehicle may influence radio reception with the specified maintenance intervals quality. listed in the “9. Maintenance and schedules” section. It is recommended to see a WARNING Radio reception: NISSAN dealer to replace the filter. Your NISSAN radio system is equipped The filter should be replaced if air flow The system contains refrigerant un- with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to is extremely decreased or when win- der high pressure. To avoid personal enhance radio reception. These circuits dows fog up easily when operating injury, any air conditioner service are designed to extend reception range, heater or air conditioning system. should be done only by an experi- and to enhance the quality of that recep- enced technician with the proper tion. equipment. However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics 4-30 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems are completely normal in a given recep- signals will tend to fade and/or drift. tion area, and do not indicate any mal- Static and flutter: During signal interfer- function in your NISSAN radio system. ence from buildings, large hills or due to Reception conditions will constantly antenna position, usually in conjunction change because of vehicle movement. with increased distance from the station Buildings, terrain, signal distance and transmitter, static or flutter can be heard. interference from other vehicles can work This can be reduced by lowering the against ideal reception. Described below treble setting to reduce the treble re- are some of the factors that can affect sponse. your radio reception. Multipath reception: Because of the re- Some cellular phones or other devices flective characteristics of FM signals, di- may cause interference or a buzzing rect and reflected signals reach the noise to come from the audio system receiver at the same time. The signals speakers. Storing the device in a different may cancel each other, resulting in mo- location may reduce or eliminate the SAA0306 mentary flutter or loss of sound. noise. FM radio reception: AM radio reception: Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 AM signals, because of their low fre- to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural quency, can bend around objects and (single channel) FM having slightly more skip along the ground. In addition, the range than stereo FM. External influences signals can be bounced off the iono- may sometimes interfere with FM station sphere and bent back to earth. Because reception even if the FM station is within of these characteristics. AM signals are 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM also subject to interference as they travel signal is directly related to the distance from transmitter to receiver. between the transmitter and receiver. FM Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is pas- signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibit- sing through freeway underpasses or in ing many of the same characteristics as areas with many tall buildings. It can also light. For example they will reflect off occur for several seconds during iono- objects. spheric turbulence even in areas where Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves no obstacles exist. away from a station transmitter, the Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electri- Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 cal power lines, electric signs and even . During cold weather or rainy days, the traffic lights. player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD Satellite radio reception (if so and dehumidify or ventilate the player equipped): completely. When the satellite radio is used for the . The player may skip while driving on first time or the battery has been re- rough roads. placed, the satellite radio may not work . The CD player sometimes cannot properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait function when the passenger com- more than 10 minutes with the satellite partment temperature is extremely radio ON and the vehicle outside of any high. Decrease the temperature be- metal or large building for the satellite fore use. radio to receive all of the necessary data. . Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) The satellite radio mode requires an round discs that have the “COMPACT active SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscrip- disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc tion. The satellite radio is not available in or packaging. Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. . Do not expose the CD to direct sun- The satellite radio performance may be light. affected if cargo carried on the roof . CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, blocks the satellite radio signal. scratched, covered with fingerprints, If possible, do not put cargo near the or that have pin holes may not work satellite antenna. properly. . A build up of ice on the satellite radio SAA0480 The following CDs may not work antenna can affect satellite radio perfor- properly: mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite Compact Disc (CD) player — Copy control compact discs (CCCD) radio reception. . Do not force a compact disc into the — Recordable compact discs (CD-R) CD insert slot. This could damage the — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) CD and/or CD changer/player. . Do not use the following CDs as they . Trying to load a CD with the CD door may cause the CD player to malfunc- closed could damage the CD and/or tion. CD changer.

4-32 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems — 3.1 in (8 cm) discs DVD and dehumidify or ventilate the — CDs that are not round player completely. — CDs with a paper label . The player may skip while driving on — CDs that are warped, scratched, or rough roads. have abnormal edges . The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot . This audio system can only play pre- function when the passenger com- recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to partment temperature is extremely record or burn CDs. high. Decrease the temperature before use. . If the CD cannot be played, one of the . following messages will be displayed. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT CHECK DISC: disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video” — Confirm that the CD is inserted logo on the disc or packaging. correctly (the label side is facing . Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct up, etc.). sunlight. — Confirm that the CD is not bent or . CD/DVDs that are of poor quality, warped and it is free of scratches. dirty, scratched, covered with finger- PUSH EJECT: prints, or that have pinholes may not This is an error due to the tempera- work properly. ture inside the player is too high. . The following CD/DVDs are not guar- Remove the CD by pushing the EJECT anteed to play: button, and after a short time reinsert LHA0484 — Copy control compact discs (CCCD) the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns — Recordable compact discs (CD-R) to normal. DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player — Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) UNPLAYABLE: (models with navigation system) — Recordable DVDs (DVD±R, DVD±R . The file is unplayable in this audio Do not force a compact disc into the DL) system (only MP3 or WMA CD). CD/DVD insert slot. This could damage — Rewritable DVDs (DVD±RW, DVD±RW the CD/DVD player. DL) . During cold weather or rainy days, the . Do not use the following CD/DVDs as player may malfunction due to hu- they may cause the CD/DVD player to midity. If this occurs, remove the CD/ malfunction.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 — 3.1 in (8 cm) discs Unplayable File: . Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are — CD/DVDs that are not round — The file may be copy protected. trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. — CD/DVDs with a paper label — The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A . DTS and DTS 2.0 “ ” are registered — CD/DVDs that are warped, or DivX® type. trademarks of DTS, Inc. scratched or have abnormal edges Region Invalid: Parental level (parental control): — This audio system can only play — The DVD is not for region 1 or all DVDs with the parental control setting prerecorded CD/DVDs. It has no regions. Use DVDs with a region can be played with this system. Please capabilities to record or burn CD/ code “1”, “ALL” or “1 included” for use your own judgement to set the DVDs. your DVD entertainment system. parental control with the system. . If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one (The region code is displayed as of the following messages will be a small symbol printed on the top Disc selection: displayed. of the DVD .) This vehicle-installed The following disc formats can be played Disc Read Error: DVD player cannot play DVDs with a with the DVD drive. region code other than “1” or “ALL”. — Confirm that the CD/DVD is in- . DVD-VIDEO serted correctly (the label side is Copyright and trademark: . VIDEO-CD facing up, etc.). . The technology protected by the U.S. . CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc) — Confirm that the CD/DVD is not patent and other intellectual property . DTS-CD bent or warped and it is free of rights owned by Macrovision Corpora- scratches. tion and other right holders is USB (Universal Serial Bus) connec- Please Eject Disc: adopted for this system. tion port — This may be an error due to the . This copyright protected technology temperature inside the player being cannot be used without a permit from too high. Remove the CD/DVD by Macrovision Corporation. It is limited WARNING pushing the EJECT button, and to be personal use, etc., as long as the after a short time reinsert the CD/ permit from Macrovision Corporation Do not connect, disconnect or oper- DVD. The CD/DVD can be played is not issued. ate the USB device while driving. when the temperature of the player . Modifying or disassembling is prohib- Doing so can be a distraction. If returns to normal. If the error ited. distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident persists, consult your local dealer. . Dolby digital is manufactured under or serious injury. license from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

4-34 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems This system supports various USB mem- trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the CAUTION ory devices, USB hard drives and iPod® U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a players. Some USB devices may not be trademark of Apple Inc. supported by this system. . Do not force the USB device into . Improperly plugging in the iPod® may the USB connection port. Insert- . Partitioned USB devices may not be cause a checkmark to be displayed on ing the USB device tilted or up- played correctly. and off (flickering). Always make sure side-down into the port may da- . Some characters used in other lan- that the iPod® is connected properly. mage the port. Make sure that guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may . An iPod nano® (1st Generation) may the USB device is connected cor- not appear properly in the display. remain in fast forward or rewind mode rectly into the USB connection Using English language characters if it is connected during a seek opera- port. with a USB device is recommended. tion. In this case, please manually . Do not grab the USB connection General notes for USB use: reset the iPod®. . port cover (if so equipped) when Refer to your device manufacturer’s own- An iPod nano® (2nd Generation) will pulling the USB device out of the er information regarding the proper use continue to fast-forward or rewind if it port. This could damage the port and care of the device. is disconnected during a seek operation. and the cover. Notes for iPod® use: . . An incorrect song title may appear Do not leave the USB cable in a “Made for iPod®”, “Made for iPhone®”, and place where it can be pulled when the Play Mode is changed while “Made for iPad®” mean that an electronic using an iPod nano® (2nd Generation) unintentionally. Pulling the cable accessory has been designed to connect may damage the port. . Audiobooks may not play in the same specifically to iPod®, iPhone®, or iPad®, order as they appear on an iPod®. respectively, and has been certified by the . The vehicle is not equipped with a USB developer to meet Apple performance Large video files cause slow responses device. USB devices should be purchased standards. in an iPod®. The vehicle center display separately as necessary. may momentarily black out, but will Apple is not responsible for the operation This system cannot be used to format soon recover. of this device or its compliance with . If an iPod® automatically selects large USB devices. To format a USB device, use safety and regulatory standards. a personal computer. video files while in the shuffle mode, Please note that the use of this accessory the vehicle center display may mo- In some states/area, the USB device for with iPod®, iPhone®, or iPad® may affect mentarily black out, but will soon the front seats plays only sound without wireless performance. recover. images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked. iPad®, iPhone®, iPod®, iPod classic®, iPod nano®, iPod shuffle®, and iPod touch® are Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 Compressed Audio Files (MP3/ authorized Microsoft subsidiary and Artist/Track title line on the display. WMA/AAC) (if so equipped) third parties. * Windows® and Windows Media® are . AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding registered trademarks or trademarks of Explanation of terms: (AAC) is a lossy audio compression Microsoft Corporation in the United . MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pic- format. Audio files that have been States of America and/or other countries. tures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. encoded with AAC are generally smal- MP3 is the most well known com- ler in size and deliver a higher quality pressed digital audio file format. This of sound than MP3. format allows for near “CD quality” . Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number sound, but at a fraction of the size of of bits per second used by a digital normal audio files. MP3 conversion of music file. The size and quality of a an audio track can reduce the file size compressed digital audio file is deter- by approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sam- mined by the bit rate used when pling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with encoding the file. virtually no perceptible loss in quality. . Sampling frequency — Sampling fre- The compression reduces certain quency is the rate at which the parts of sound that seem inaudible samples of a signal are converted to most people. from analog to digital (A/D conver- . WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is sion) per second. a compressed audio format created . Multisession — Multisession is one of by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. the methods for writing data to med- The WMA codec offers greater file ia. Writing data once to the media is compression than the MP3 codec, called a single session, and writing enabling storage of more digital audio more than once is called a multises- tracks in the same amount of space sion. when compared to MP3s at the same . ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is level of quality. the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA This product is protected by certain file that contains information about intellectual property rights of Micro- the digital music file such as song title, soft Corporation and third parties. Use artist, album title, encoding bit rate, or distribution of such technology track time duration, etc. ID3 tag in- outside of this product is prohibited formation is displayed on the Album/ without a license from Microsoft or an 4-36 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order. . Music playback order of compressed audio files is as illustrated.

SAA2494

Playback order: . The folder names of folders not containing compressed audio files are not shown in the display. . If there is a file in the top level of a disc/USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 Specification chart: Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM*5, DVD±R*5, DVD±RW*5, DVD±R DL*5, USB2.0 CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. Models with navigation sys- * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not tem supported. Supported file UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0 systems * VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported. CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet Models without navigation * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. system * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported. USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

4-38 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Models with navigation system: MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 Version Models without navigation system: MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5 MP3 Sampling fre- 8 kHz - 48 kHz quency Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4 Models with navigation system: WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 Supported Version Models without navigation system: versions*1 WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 except WMA9 Pro, WMA9 Lossless, WMA9 Voice WMA*2 Sampling fre- 32 kHz - 48 kHz quency Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR (Ver.9)*4 Version MPEG-AAC Sampling fre- AAC*5 8 kHz - 96 kHz quency Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4 ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only) Tag information (Song title and Artist name) WMA tag (WMA only) With navigation system: Folder levels: 8, Folders: 512 (including root folder), Files: 5000 Folder levels Without navigation system: Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), files: 512 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Displayable character codes*3 Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. *2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played. *3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed. *4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. *5 Models with navigation system Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 Troubleshooting guide: Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD- DA data) will be played. Cannot play Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)”, “.M4A (.m4a)”, or “.AA3 (.aa3)” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright. Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. It takes a relatively long time If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts before the music starts playing. playing. The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing Music cuts off or skips width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed. Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data. Move immediately to the next If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited song when playing. by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song. The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in The songs do not play back in the desired order. the desired order. Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.

4-40 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Compressed Video Files (models Requirement for Supporting Video Playback: with navigation system) Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory Explanation of terms: File Systems CD, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge . DivX® - DivX® refers to the DivX® codec CD-R, (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0 owned by DivX, Inc. used for a lossy CD-RW, - ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. compression of video based on MPEG- DVD, - Files saved using the Live File System component (on a DVD±R, Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported. 4. DVD±RW, - VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported. . AVI - AVI stands for Audio Video DVD±RW DL Interleave. It is a standard file format USB Memory FAT16, FAT32 originated by Microsoft Corporation. A “.divx” encoded file can be saved into File Types .divx, .avi Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6 the “.avi” file format for playback on Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, Dolby this system if it meets the require- Digital, LPCM ments stated in the table in this .asf Video Codec ISO-MPEG4 section. However, not all the “.avi” files Audio Codec G.726 are playable on this system since Bit Rates .divx, .avi Maximum Average 4Mbps different encodings can be used than Maximum Peak 8Mbps the DivX® codec. . ASF - ASF stands for Advanced Sys- Resolution .divx, .avi Minimum 32 × 32 tems Format. It is a file format owned Maximum 720 × 480 by Microsoft Corporation. Note: Only “. .asf Minimum 32 × 32 asf” files that meet the requirements Maximum 720 × 576 stated in the table in this section can be played. . Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital video file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 Bluetooth® Audio player (models . While an audio device is connected with navigation system) through a Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the Bluetooth® is a trademark device may discharge quicker than owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. usual. and licensed to Clarion Co., . Ltd. This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, . Some Bluetooth® audio devices may AVRCP). not be recognized by the in-vehicle . Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Blue- audio system. tooth® functions share the same fre- . It is necessary to set up the wireless quency band (2.4 GHz). Using the connection between a compatible Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN func- Bluetooth® audio device and the in- tions at the same time may slow down vehicle Bluetooth® module before or disconnect the communication and using the Bluetooth® audio player. cause undesired noise. It is recom- . Operating procedure of the Blue- mended that you turn off the wireless tooth® audio player will vary depend- LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth® ing on the device. Make sure it is functions. understood how to operate an audio device before using it with this system. . The Bluetooth® audio player may be stopped under the following conditions: — Receiving a hands-free call. — Checking the connection to the hands-free phone. . Do not place a Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Blue- tooth® module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. 4-42 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 15. Back button 16. TUNE/MENU knob/ENTER button 17. AUX button FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER Audio main operation The audio system operates when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. POWER ON/OFF: To turn on the audio system, push the Power button. . The system will turn on in the mode which was used immediately before the system was turned off. . If there is no CD loaded, the radio will be turned on. To turn off the audio system, push the Power button. Volume control: JVH0923X To control the volume, turn the VOL 1. CD eject button 8. SCAN button control knob. 2. FM·AM button 9. CD button Turn the VOL control knob clockwise to 3. RPT (repeat) button 10. Power button/VOL (volume) control knob make the sound louder. 4. RDM (random play) button 11. Rewind button Turn the VOL control knob counterclock- 5. Radio memory buttons 12. Fast Forward button wise to make the sound quieter. 6. A-Z button 13. DISP (display) button 7. USB button 14. SETUP button

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 SETUP button: Bass control: Set Time ON/OFF Clock Format To configure Audio, Clock, Language or Use this control to enhance or attenuate Set time Scroll direction settings, perform the bass response sound. Set Time: following procedure: Treble control: Select Set Time then adjust the clock as 1. Push the SETUP button. Use this control to enhance or attenuate follows: 2. Push the ENTER button. the treble. 1. The hour display will start flashing. 3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob clockwise Fade control: Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to adjust the hour and push the ENTER button. or counterclockwise, the display will Use this control to adjust the balance of appear in the following order: the volume between the front and rear (if 2. The minute display will start flashing. Audio Clock Language Scroll so equipped) speakers. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to adjust Direction the minute and push the ENTER Balance control: button to finish the clock adjustment. After the desired levels have been set, Use this control to adjust the balance of ON/OFF: push either the back button repeatedly, the volume between the left and right the SETUP button, or wait for 8 seconds speakers. Set the clock display between on or off without pushing any buttons to exit the when the audio unit is turned off. If set in menu screen. AUX VOL (Auxiliary volume) control: the ON position, the clock will be dis- Use this control to adjust the volume played when the audio unit is turned off Audio adjustments: output from the auxiliary source. either by pushing the power button or Push the SETUP button to enter the setup SPD VOL (Speed volume) control: when the ignition switch is placed in the menu screen then select Audio by using “OFF” position. TUNE/MENU knob. This mode controls the volume output from the speakers automatically in rela- Clock Format: Each time the ENTER button is pushed, tion to vehicle speed. Switch the clock display between 24-hour the mode will change as follows: mode and 12-hour clock mode. ? ? ? ? Adjusting the setting to 0 (zero) turns off Bass Treble Fade Balance AUX the speed volume feature. VOL ? SPD VOL ? Audio (setup menu Language setting: screen) Clock setting: Push the SETUP button to enter the setup Turn the TUNE/MENU knob clockwise or Push the SETUP button to enter the setup menu screen then select Language. counterclockwise to adjust the following menu screen then select Clock. Select the appropriate language and items and push the ENTER button to Turn the TUNE/MENU knob, the mode will push the ENTER button. Upon completion, confirm. change as follows: the screen will automatically adapt the

4-44 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems language setting. desired stations. Seek tuning button: Scroll direction: When adjusting the broadcasting station SCAN button: Set the scrolling behavior of the TUNE/ frequency automatically, push the MENU knob to scroll UP or DOWN. button. When the system detects a Push the SCAN button to tune from low broadcasting station, it will stop at the to high frequencies and stops at each FM·AM radio operation station. broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Push- The audio system operates when the ing the SCAN button again during this 5 ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” Radio memory buttons: seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and position. During radio reception, pushing the radio the radio will remain tuned to that memory button for less than 2 seconds station. FM·AM button: will select the stored radio station. If the SCAN button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next When the FM·AM button is pushed while The audio system can store up to 12 FM station. the audio system is off, the audio system station frequencies (six in each of FM 1and will turn on and the radio will turn on. FM 2) and 6 AM station frequencies. CD player operation When the FM·AM button is pushed while To store the station frequency manually: The audio system operates when the another audio source is already operat- 1. Tune to the desired broadcasting ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” ing, it will automatically turn off, and the station frequency by using the position. radio will turn on. button. Loading: To change the radio bands, push the 2. Push and hold a radio memory button FM·AM button until the desired band - until a beep sounds. (The radio Insert a CD into the slot with the label side appears. mutes when the radio memory button facing up. The CD will be guided auto- AM ? FM 1 ? FM 2 ? AM is pushed.) matically into the slot and will start playing. After loading the CD, the number TUNE/MENU knob: 3. The channel indicator will display and of tracks and the playtime will appear on the radio mute disengages, indicating When adjusting the broadcasting station the display. that the memory is stored properly. frequency manually, turn the TUNE/MENU knob until the preferred frequency is 4. Perform steps 1 - 3 for all other achieved. memory buttons. CAUTION If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the audio fuse blows, the radio memory Do not force the CD into the slot. This will be erased. In such a case, reset the could damage the player.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45 NOTE: 2. Push the back button. . The CD player accepts normal audio CD button: CDs or CDs containing MP3/WMA 3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob for the When the CD button is pushed while the preferred folder. files. audio system is off and a CD is loaded, the . The audio unit will automatically audio system will turn on and a CD will 4. Push the ENTER button to access the detect if a CD containing MP3/WMA start playing automatically. If another folder. Push the ENTER button again files is inserted, and “MP3CD” will be audio source is already playing, it will to start playing the first track or turn indicated. automatically turn off and the CD will the TUNE/MENU knob, and push the . An error notification message will be start playing. ENTER button to select another track. displayed when inserting an incom- If the current selected folder contains sub patible disc type (e.g. DVD), or if the Fast Forward/Rewind but- folders, push the ENTER button, a new player cannot read the CD. Eject the tons: screen with a list of sub folders will be disc and insert another disc. displayed. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob for Push and hold the or button to the sub folder then push the ENTER List view: fast forward or rewind through the track. button to select. Select the root folder While the track is being played, push When the button is released, the track will item when songs are recorded addition- either the ENTER button or the back play at normal playing speed. ally in the root folder. button to display the available tracks in Track up/down: To return to the previous folder screen, a listed view mode. To select a track from Pushing the or button once, the push back button. the list, or a track to start listening to, turn track will skip forward to the next track or the TUNE/MENU knob then push the backward to the beginning of the current RPT button: ENTER button. track. Push the or button more than once to skip through the tracks. Push the RPT button and the current Quick search: track will be played continuously. In the list view mode, a quick search can Folder browsing: be performed to find a track from the list. If the recorded media contains folders RDM button: Push the A-Z button, turn the TUNE/ with music files, pushing the or Push the RDM button and all the tracks MENU knob to the first alphabetic letter button will play in sequence the tracks of will be played in a random order. of the song title and then push the ENTER each folder. button. When found, a list of the available To select a preferred folder: songs will be displayed. Select, and push DISP button: the ENTER button to play the preferred 1. Push the ENTER button or the back While a CD with recorded music informa- track. button and a list of tracks in the tion tags (CD-text/ID3-text tags) is being current folder is displayed. 4-46 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems played, the title of the played track is displayed. If the title information is not CD eject button: provided then “Track” is displayed. When the CD eject button is pushed while When the DISP button is pushed repeat- a CD is loaded, the CD will be ejected. edly, further information about the track When the CD eject button is pushed twice, can be displayed along with the track title the CD will be ejected further, and the CD as follows: can be removed with ease. CD: When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or Track time ? Album ? Artist ? Track “LOCK” position it is possible to eject the time CD currently being played. However the audio unit will not be activated. CD with MP3/WMA: ? ? ? If a CD is ejected by pushing the CD eject Track time Album Artist Folder button, and it is not taken out from the name ? Track time loading slot within 8 seconds, the CD will JVH0920X Track details: automatically be reloaded to the slot to Pushing and holding the DISP button will protect the CD. USB (Universal Serial Bus) connec- turn the display into a detailed overview tion port and after a few seconds it returns to the main display. Connecting USB device: The USB connection port is located in the button: center console. Open the console box lid When the SCAN button is pushed while a and connect a USB memory device into CD is being played, the first 10 seconds of the USB connection port. The system all the tracks will be played. switches to the USB mode automatically. When the SCAN button is pushed again, If the system has been turned off while the CD will return to normal play from the the USB memory device was playing, track which is playing. pushing the power button will start playback of the USB memory device.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47 Refer to your device manufacturer’s own- WARNING er information regarding the proper use DISP button: and care of the device. While a track with recorded music infor- Do not connect, disconnect or oper- mation tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the ate the USB device while driving. USB button: title of the played track is displayed. If the Doing so can be a distraction. If tags are not provided then a notification When the USB button is pushed with the message is displayed. distracted you could lose control of system off and the USB memory device is your vehicle and cause an accident inserted, the system will turn on. When the DISP button is pushed repeat- or serious injury. edly, further information about the track USB device main operation: can be displayed along with the track title The following operations are identical to as follows: the audio main operation of the Compact Track time ? Artist ? Album ? Folder CAUTION Disc (CD) operation. For details, see “CD name ? Track time player operation” (P.4-45). Track details: . Do not force the USB device into . List view the USB connection port. Insert- . Pushing and holding the DISP button will Quick search turn the display into a detailed overview ing the USB device tilted or up- . and after a few seconds it returns to the side-down into the port may da- . mage the port. Make sure that RDM (Random play) main display, or push the DISP button the USB device is connected cor- . RPT (Repeat track) briefly. rectly into the USB connection . SCAN port. (Some USB devices come . Folder browsing with a mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction before inserting the device.) . Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.

4-48 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Refer to your device manufacturer’s own- WARNING er information regarding the proper use and care of the device. Do not connect, disconnect or oper- Compatibility: ate the USB device while driving. The following models are supported: Doing so can be a distraction. If . distracted you could lose control of Third generation iPhone® (Firmware your vehicle and cause an accident version IOS4/4.0) or serious injury. . Fourth generation iPhone® (Firmware version IOS4/4.0) . Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version 1.3) CAUTION . First generation iPod Classic® (Firm- ware version 1.1.1 or 1.1.2PC) JVH0921X . Do not force the USB device into . Second generation iPod Classic® the USB connection port. Insert- (Firmware version 2.0.1) iPod® player operation ing the USB device tilted or up- . First generation iPod touch® (Firm- side-down into the port may da- Connecting iPod®: ware version 1.1.5 or 2.2.1) mage the port. Make sure that . The USB connection port is located in the the USB device is connected cor- Second and third generation iPod center console. Open the console box lid rectly into the USB connection touch® (Firmware version 2.2.1 or and connect the iPod® cable to the USB port. (Some USB devices come IOS4/4.0.0) . connection port. The battery of the iPod® with a mark as a guide. Make First generation iPod nano® (Firmware is charged while the connection to the sure that the mark is facing the version 1.3.1) vehicle. correct direction before inserting . Second generation iPod nano® (Firm- Depending on the version of the iPod®, the device.) ware version 1.1.3) . the display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN . Do not leave the USB cable in a Third generation iPod nano® (Firm- or Accessory Attached screen when the place where it can be pulled ware version 1.1.2PC or 1.1.3PC) connection is completed. When the iPod® unintentionally. Pulling the cable . Fourth generation iPod nano® (Firm- is connected to the vehicle, the iPod® may damage the port. ware version 1.0.2 or 1.0.4) music library can only be operated by the . Fifth generation iPod nano® (Firmware vehicle audio controls. version 1.0.1 or 1.0.2)

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49 The iPod touch® may not response The following operations are identical to quickly with the system in some cases. the audio main operation of the Compact Make sure that the iPod® firmware is Disc (CD) operation. For details, see “CD updated. player operation” (P.4-45). . List view Operating tips: . . Quick search iPod Shuffle® and iPod mini® are not . supported. . . RDM (Random play) Some iPod® operations may not be . available with this system. RPT (Repeat track) . Folder browsing USB button: When the USB button is pushed with the DISP button: system off and the iPod® is connected to While a track with recorded music infor- JVH0936X the vehicle, the system will turn on. mation tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the played track is displayed. If the iPod® main operation: tags are not provided then a notification AUX (Auxiliary) input Interface: message is displayed. AUX IN jack: The interface for iPod® operation shown When the DISP button is pushed repeat- The AUX IN jack is located in the center on the audio system display is similar to edly, further information about the track console. The AUX IN audio input jack the iPod® interface. Use the TUNE/MENU can be displayed along with the track title accepts any standard analog audio input knob to play a track on the iPod®. as follows: such as from a portable cassette tape/CD The following items can be chosen from Track time ? Album ? Artist ? Genre ? player, MP3 player or laptop computer. the menu list screen. Track time NISSAN strongly recommends using a . Playlists Track details: stereo mini plug cable when connecting . Artists Pushing and holding the DISP button will your music device to the audio system. . Albums turn the display into a detailed overview Music may not play properly when a monaural cable is used. . Tracks and after a few seconds it returns to the . Genres main display, or push the DISP button For further information about each item, briefly. see the iPod® owner’s manual. 4-50 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems AUX button: Push the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is connected.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51 FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” (P.4-30). The satellite radio mode requires an active SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. It may take some time to receive the activation signal after subscribing the SiriusXM Satellite Radio. After receiving the activation signal, an available channel list will be automatically updated in the radio. Push the ignition switch from LOCK to ACC to update the channel list. Audio main operation Head unit: The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and high frequency ranges automatically in both radio reception and CD playback. SAA2495 ON·OFF/Volume control: 1. DVD·CD EJECT button 6. Radio SCAN tuning button Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON 2. ON·OFF button/VOL (volume) control 7. FM·AM band select button position, and then push the ON·OFF knob 8. RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) play button button while the system is off to turn on 3. Radio station preset select buttons 9. SAT (satellite) button the last audio source, which was playing 4. DISC·AUX (auxiliary) button 10. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) but- immediately before the system was 5. Radio TUNE (tuning) folder selector/ ton for SEEK/TRACK turned off. While the system is on, pushing AUDIO control knob 11. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK the ON·OFF button turns the system off.

4-52 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the FM-AM-SAT radio operation TUNE (Tuning): volume. . For AM and FM radio Adjusting tone quality and speaker radio (FM/AM) band select: Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual balance: Pushing the radio band select button will tuning. To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, change the band as follows: . For SiriusXM Satellite Radio push the Audio control knob. When the AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek display shows the setting you want to channels from all of the categories when any category is not selected. change (Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade), radio (SAT) band select: rotate the Audio control knob to set the desired setting. For the other setting Pushing the radio band select button will change the band as follows: SEEK tuning/CATEGORY methods, see “How to use SETTING but- (CAT): ton” (P.4-11). XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1 . For AM and FM radio This vehicle has some sound effect func- When the radio band select button is Push the SEEK button or to tions as follows: pushed while the ignition switch is in the tune from low to high or high to low . Speed Sensitive Vol. ACC or ON position, the radio will come frequencies and to stop at the next on at the channel last played. For more details, see “How to use SETTING broadcasting station. button” (P.4-11). The last channel played will also come on . For SiriusXM Satellite Radio when the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON. Switching the display: Push the SEEK button or to The satellite radio is not available in tune to the first channel of the next or Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. previous category. the displays as follows: If another audio source is playing when During satellite radio reception, the fol- iPod®/USB ? CD/DVD ? Bluetooth® ? ? the radio band select button is turned to lowing notices will be displayed under Audio AUX iPod®/USB ON, the audio source will automatically be certain conditions. turned off and the last radio channel . NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while played will come on. the SAT tuner is connected.) When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, . OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off) the radio will automatically change from . CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connec- stereo to monaural reception. tion error) . LOADING (When the initial setting is performed)

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53 . UPDATING (When the satellite radio orizing is now complete. Menu-Categories feature. subscription is not active) 5. Other buttons can be set in the same . Favorite Artists & Songs manner. Stores the current artist or song that SCAN tuning: If the battery cable is disconnected, or if is being played. Touch the “Alert” key Push the SCAN tuning button to tune the fuse opens, the radio memory will be to be reminded when the stored artist from low to high frequencies and stop at erased. In that case, reset the desired or song is playing on a station while each broadcasting station/channel for 5 stations/channels. listening to SiriusXM Satellite Radio. seconds. Pushing the button again during . Categories List (AM and FM radio): this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN Selecting a category will go to the first tuning and the radio will remain tuned When the “List” key on the display is channel in that category as defined by to that station/channel. selected while the FM or AM radio is being SiriusXM Satellite Radio. played, the preset station list will be If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed . Direct Tune displayed. within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to Inputs the channel number by using a the next station/channel. If 1 of the 6 preset stations listed is keypad. touched and held, the current station will to Station memory operations: be stored as the new preset. Compact Disc (CD) player operation 12 stations/channels can be set for the Menu (SiriusXM Satellite Radio): Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON FM band (6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) When the “Menu” key on the display is SiriusXM Satellite Radio (6 each for XM1, into the slot with the label side facing up. selected while the SiriusXM Satellite Radio XM2 and XM3) and 6 stations can be set The CD will be guided automatically into is being played, the menu list will be for the AM band. the slot and start playing. displayed. 1. Choose the radio band using the radio After loading the CD, the number of The following items are available. band select button. tracks on the CD and the play time will 2. Tune to the desired station/channel . Preset List appear on the display. using the SEEK/TRACK, SCAN button Displays the preset channel list. If 1 of If the radio is already operating, it will or the radio TUNE knob. the 6 preset stations listed is touched automatically turn off and the CD will 3. Push and hold the desired station and held, the current station will be play. stored as the new preset. preset button to until the radio If the system has been turned off while . Customize Channel List mutes. the CD was playing, pushing the ON·OFF 4. The station indicator will then come Selects specific channels to skip while button will start the CD. using the TUNE, SEEK/CATEGORY or on and the sound will resume. Mem- Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs. 4-54 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems (CD with compressed audio files) PLAY: Next/Previous Track and When the DISC·AUX (CD play) button is Fast Forward/Rewind: pushed with the system off and the CD When the or button is pushed for loaded, the system will turn on and the more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is CD will start to play. being played, the CD will play while fast When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with forwarding or rewinding. When the but- CD EJECT: the CD loaded and the radio playing, the ton is released, the CD will return to When the CD EJECT button is pushed with radio will automatically be turned off and normal play speed. the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected. the CD will start to play. When the or button is pushed for If the CD comes out and is not removed, Menu: less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being it will be pulled back into the slot to played, the next track or the beginning of protect it. When the “Menu” key on the display is the current track on the CD will be played. selected while the CD is being played, the DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) PLAYER menu screen will be displayed. The fol- When the rewind button is pushed for less OPERATION (models with naviga- lowing menu options are available. than 1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current track starts playing, the pre- tion system) . Folder List (for CD with compressed vious track will be played. Push the button Precautions audio files) several times to skip through the tracks. Displays the folder list. Start the engine when using the DVD . entertainment system. Track List REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): Movies will not be shown on the front Displays the track list. When the RPT button is pushed while the . Play Mode display while the vehicle is in any drive CD is played, the play pattern can be position to reduce driver distraction. Select a play mode from the following changed as follows: Audio is available when a movie is played. items. (CD) To view movies in the front display, stop — Normal the vehicle in a safe location, move the — 1 Folder Repeat (for CD with com- shift lever to the P (Park) position and pressed audio files) apply the parking brake. — 1 Track Repeat — 1 Disc Random — 1 Folder Random (for CD with compressed audio files)

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55 . While playing VIDEO-CD media, WARNING this DVD player does not guaran- tee complete functionality of all . The driver must not attempt to VIDEO-CD formats. operate the DVD system or wear the headphones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention Display settings may be given to vehicle opera- To adjust the front display mode, push tion. the SETTING button while the DVD is being played, select the “Others” key and . Do not attempt to modify the then select the “Display” key. system to display a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, being driven. Doing so may dis- tint, color and contrast, select the “Display tract the driver and may cause a Adjustment” key and then select each key. SAA2497 collision and serious personal in- Then you can adjust each item using the jury or death. multi-function controller. After changes have been made push the BACK button Playing a DVD to save the setting. DISC·AUX button: CAUTION Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the . Only operate the DVD while the DVD drive while watching the images. vehicle engine is running. Operat- Push the DISC·AUX button on the instru- ing the DVD for extended periods ment panel and turn the display to the of time with the engine OFF can DVD mode. discharge the vehicle battery. When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed . Do not allow the system to get automatically. wet. Excessive moisture such as The operation screen will be turned on spilled liquids may cause the when the DISC·AUX button located on the system to malfunction. instrument panel is pushed while a DVD is being played, and it will turn off automatically after a period of time. To turn it 4-56 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems on again, push the DISC·AUX button The chapters will advance/go back the again. number of times this key is selected. DVD operation keys: / Commercial Skip: When the DVD is playing without the operation screen being shown, you may This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD- use the touch screen to select items from VR. Select the “ ”or“ ” key to skip the displayed video. You may also use the forward or backwards by the set amount multifunction controller to select an item as defined in the DVD Settings menu. from the displayed video. When the op- Top Menu: eration screen is being shown, use the When the “Top Menu” key is selected in multifunction controller or touch screen the screen while a DVD is being played, to select an item from the displayed the top menu specific to each disc will be menus. displayed. For details, see the instructions on the disc. SAA2498 PAUSE: Example Select the “ ” key to pause the DVD. To resume playing the DVD, use the “PLAY” DVD settings key. Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following settings. PLAY: Key (DVD-VIDEO): Select the “ ” key to start playing the Keys for the DVD menu operation are DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD. displayed.

STOP: Select the “ ” key to stop playing the DVD.

/ Next/Previous Chapter: Select the “ ”or“ ” key to skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward/backward.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57 : Move the cursor to select a DVD to be searched and select the “OK” key. DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD): menu. The specified scene will be played. Select the “DVD Language” key to open Enter: Enter the selected menu. Angle (DVD-VIDEO): the number entry screen. Input the num- Move: Change the display location by mov- ber corresponding to the preferred lan- ing the operation key. If the DVD contains different angles (such as moving images), the current image guage and select the “OK” key. The DVD Back: Return to the previous screen. top menu language will be changed to Hide: Hide the operation key. angle can be switched to another one. Select the “Angle” key. The angle will the one specified. Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO): change each time the “+” side or “−” side Display: Some menus specific to each disc will be is selected. To adjust the image quality of the screen, shown. For details, see the instructions on Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO): select the preferred adjustment items. the disc. When this item is turned on, an angle Audio: Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR): mark will be shown on the bottom of the Select the preferred language for audio. The scene with the specified title will be screen if the scene can be seen from a Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR): displayed each time the “+” side or “−” side different angle. is selected. Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO): Select the preferred language for sub- titles. Group Search (VIDEO CD): DVD menus are automatically configured Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, A scene in the specified group will be and the contents will be played directly displayed each time the “+” side or “−” side when the “Menu Skip” key is turned on. DVD-VR): is selected. Note that some discs may not be played Select from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or directly even if this item is turned on. “Cinema” modes. 10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO): CD-DA, DVD-VR): Title List (DVD-VR): Select the “CM Skip” key. Choose the Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the Select the preferred title from the list. setting time from 15, 30 or 60 seconds number entry screen. Input the number by selecting the “+” side or “−” side. Play Mode: to be searched and select the “OK” key. Select the preferred play mode. The specified Title/Chapter or Group/ DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR): Track will be played. DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto- PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR): Select No. (VIDEO-CD): matically adjusts the soundtrack volume Select the “PG” or “PL” mode. level to maintain a more even sound to Select the “Select No.” key to open the the speakers. number entry screen. Input the number 4-58 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems USB (Universal Serial Bus) CON- and the cover. NECTION PORT (models with navi- . Do not leave the USB cable in a gation system) place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable Audio main operation may damage the port. WARNING Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use Do not connect, disconnect or oper- and care of the device. ate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury. SAA2499 Open the console lid and connect a USB memory as illustrated. Then, push the CAUTION DISC·AUX button repeatedly to switch to the USB memory mode. . Do not force the USB device into If the system has been turned off while the USB connection port. Insert- the USB memory was playing, pushing ing the USB device tilted or up- the ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start side-down into the port may da- the USB memory. mage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connection port. . Do not grab the USB connection port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59 memory is being played, the USB memory will play while forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the USB memory will return to normal play speed. When the or button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the USB memory is being played, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the USB memory will be played. When the rewind button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current track starts playing, the previous track will be played. Push the button several times to skip through the tracks. SAA2500 SAA2501 The multi-function controller can also be File selection Audio file operation used to select tracks when the USB memory is being played. When there are both audio and movie files in the USB memory, the mode select PLAY: Folder selection: screen is displayed. Select the preferred When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with To change to another folder in the USB contents to play. the system off and the USB memory memory, turn the folder selector or When there is only one type of file, the inserted, the system will turn on. choose a folder displayed on the screen using the multi-function controller. audio or movie operation screen is dis- If another audio source is playing with an played and starts to play. USB memory inserted, push the DISC·AUX If a video file restricts the number of button repeatedly until the center display REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): playbacks, a pop-up screen will appear changes to the USB memory mode. When the RPT button is pushed while the to confirm it is ok to play. Answer yes or USB memory is played, the play pattern no as requested by the display. Next/Previous File and Fast can be change as follows. Forward/Rewind: To change the play mode, push the RPT When the or button is pushed for button repeatedly and the mode will more than 1.5 seconds while a USB change as follows. 4-60 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track . Play Mode Repeat ? All Random ? 1 Folder Random Select the preferred play mode. ? Normal

SAA2502

Menu: There are some options available during playback. Select one of the following options that are displayed on the screen if necessary. Refer to the following information for each item. . Movie Playback Switch to the movie playback mode. This item is displayed only when a USB memory contains movie files. . Folder List/Track List Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie Playback” key is also displayed in this list screen, and enables switching to the movie playback mode.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61 Operation keys: selected. To operate the USB memory, select the List: desired key displayed on the operation Select the “List” key on the movie file screen using the multi-function control- operation screen to display the file list. ler.

Pause Select the “ ” key to pause the movie file. To resume playing the movie file, select the “ ” key.

Play Select the “ ” key to start playing a SAA2503 movie file, for example, after pausing a movie file. Movie file operation Park the vehicle in a safe location for STOP the front seat occupants to operate the Select the “ ” key to stop playing a USB memory while watching the movie file. images. Skip (Next chapter) PLAY: Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with of the disc forward. The chapters will the system off and the USB memory advance the number of times the ENTER inserted, the system will turn on. button is pushed. If another audio source is playing with an USB memory inserted, push the DISC·AUX Skip (Previous chapter) button repeatedly until the center display Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) changes to the USB memory mode. of the disc backward. The chapters will go back the number of times the “ ” key is 4-62 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems The specified folder/file will be played. playing and skipping audio files using the . Display AVRCP Bluetooth® profile. All Bluetooth® To adjust the image quality of the Devices do not have the same level of screen, select the preferred adjust- controls for AVRCP. Please consult the ment items. manual for your Bluetooth® Device for . DRC more details. DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) Once your Bluetooth® device is con- automatically adjusts the soundtrack nected to the in-vehicle audio system, it volume level to maintain a more even will automatically reconnect whenever sound to the speakers. the device is present in the vehicle and . Audio you select Bluetooth® Audio from your audio system. You do not need to manu- Select the preferred language for ally reconnect for each usage. audio. . Subtitle Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth® SAA2504 functions share the same frequency band Example Select the preferred language for (2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the Settings: subtitle. wireless LAN functions at the same time . Display Mode Select the “Settings” key to adjust the may slow down or disconnect the com- following settings. Select the “Normal”, “Wide”, “Cinema” or munication and cause undesired noise. It “Full” mode. is recommended that you turn off the . Audio File Playback Bluetooth® STREAMING AUDIO wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Blue- Switch to the audio playback mode. tooth® functions. This item is displayed only when the (models with navigation system) USB memory contains the audio files. Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth® . Play Mode Streaming Audio. If you have a compati- Select the “Normal” or “1 Track Repeat” ble Bluetooth® device with streaming play mode. audio (A2DP profile), you can set up the wireless connection between your Blue- . 10 Key Search tooth® device and the in-vehicle audio Select the “10 Key Search” key to open system. This connection allows you to the number entry screen. listen to the audio from the Bluetooth® Input the number to be searched and device using your vehicle speakers. It also select the “OK” key. may allow basic control of the device for Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63 Regulatory information Bluetooth® trademark: FCC Regulatory information: Bluetooth® is a trademark . owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. CAUTION: To maintain compliance and licensed to Clarion Co., with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, Ltd. use only the supplied antenna. Un- authorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations. . Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) This device may not cause interference and 2) This device must accept any inter- SAA2505 ference, including interference that may cause undesired opera- Connecting procedure tion of the device 1. Push the SETTING button and select IC Regulatory information: the “Bluetooth” key. . Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) This device may not cause interference, and 2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. . This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian In- terference-Causing Equipment Regu- lations.

4-64 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SAA2506 SAA2507 SAA3005 2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key. 3. A confirmation screen will be dis- 4. Choose a PIN code to use with the played. Select “No”. compatible Bluetooth® audio device Note: Selecting “Yes” will only connect using the number input screen. The the hands free phone portion of a PIN code will need to be entered into Bluetooth® device. the Bluetooth® audio device after step 5. Select the “OK” key.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65 DISC·AUX button: When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the system off and the Bluetooth® audio device connected, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the Bluetooth® audio device is connected, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the display changes to the Blue- tooth® audio mode.

Next/Previous Track and Fast Forward/Rewind: When the or button is pushed for SAA3006 SAA2510 more than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® audio file is being played, the Bluetooth® 5. The standby message screen will Audio main operation appear. Operate the compatible Blue- audio device will play while forwarding or tooth® audio device. For the connect- Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON rewinding. When the button is released, ing procedure of the audio device, see position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button the Bluetooth® audio device will return to the Bluetooth® audio instructions. repeatedly to switch to the Bluetooth® normal play speed. audio mode. If the system has been When the connecting is completed, When the or button is pushed for turned off while the Bluetooth® audio less than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth® the screen will return to the Blue- device was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/ tooth® setup display. audio file is being played, the next track or VOL control knob will start the Bluetooth® the beginning of the current track on the audio device. Bluetooth® audio device will be played. The ability to pause, change tracks, fast When the rewind button is pushed for less forward, rewind, randomize and repeat than 1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after music may be different between devices. the current track starts playing, the pre- Some or all of these functions may not be vious track will be played. Push the button supported on each device. several times to skip through the tracks. The multi-function controller can also be

4-66 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems used to select tracks when the Blue- Choose the preferred play mode from the tooth® audio play mode screen is shown following items. on the display. (“Bluetooth audio” will be . Shuffle indicated on the header of the screen.) Choose “Shuffle OFF”, “Shuffle All Tracks” and “Shuffle Group”. REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): . Repeat To change the play mode, push the Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1 button repeatedly and the mode changes Track”, “Repeat All Tracks” and “Repeat as follows. Group”. Normal ? Shuffle All Tracks ? Shuffle Group ? Repeat 1 Track ? Repeat All Tracks ? Repeat Group ? Normal Operation keys: To operate a Bluetooth® audio device, SAA2511 select a key displayed on the operation screen using the multi-function control- Bluetooth® settings ler. To set up the Bluetooth® device system to the preferred settings, push the SETTING Play button and select the “Bluetooth” key. Select the “ ” key to start playing when Bluetooth: pausing. Select this key again to pause If this setting is turned off, the connection the audio play. between the Bluetooth® devices and the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module will be can- Pause celed. Select the “ ” key to pause the Blue- Connect Bluetooth: tooth® audio device. Select this key again Connects to the Bluetooth® device. See to resume playing. “Connecting procedure” (P.4-64). Up to 5 Play Mode: devices can be registered. The play mode setting display will appear when the “Menu” key is selected. Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67 Connected Devices: iPod® PLAYER OPERATION (models . Do not leave the USB cable in a Registered devices are shown on the list. with navigation system) place where it can be pulled Select a Bluetooth® device from the list, unintentionally. Pulling the cable the following options will be available. Connecting iPod® may damage the port. . Select Select “Select” to connect the selected WARNING Refer to your device manufacturer’s own- device to the vehicle. If there is a er information regarding the proper use and care of the device. different device currently connected, Do not connect, disconnect or oper- the selected device will replace the ate the USB device while driving. current device. Doing so can be a distraction. If . Edit distracted you could lose control of Rename the selected Bluetooth® de- your vehicle and cause an accident vice using the keypad displayed on or serious injury. the screen. (See “How to use touch screen” (P.4-5).) . Delete Delete the selected Bluetooth® device. CAUTION Edit Bluetooth Info: . Do not force the USB device into Change the name broadcasted by this the USB connection port. Insert- system over Bluetooth®. Change the PIN ing the USB device tilted or up- code that is entered when connecting a side-down into the port may da- hands free device to this system. mage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected cor- Replace Connected Phone: rectly into the USB connection Replace the Bluetooth® connection with a port. connected Bluetooth® cellular phone. For . Do not grab the USB connection details about Hands-Free Phone System, port cover (if so equipped) when see “Bluetooth® hands-free phone system pulling the USB device out of the (models with navigation system)” (P.4-76). port. This could damage the port and the cover.

4-68 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Compatibility Audio main operation The following models are available: Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON . Fifth generation iPod® (version 1.2.3 or position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button later) repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode. . iPod Classic® (version 1.1.1 or later) If the system has been turned off while . First generation iPod touch® (version the iPod® was playing, pushing the 2.0.0 or later) ON·OFF button will start the iPod®. . Second generation iPod touch® (version 1.2.3 or later) DISC·AUX button: . First generation iPod nano® (version When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with 1.3.1 or later) the system off and the iPod® connected, . Second generation iPod nano® (ver- the system will turn on. If another audio sion 1.1.3 or later) source is playing and the iPod® is con- SAA2512 . Third generation iPod nano® (version nected, push the DISC·AUX button repeat- 1.1 or later) edly until the center display changes to Open the console lid and connect the the iPod® mode. iPod® cable to the USB connection port. If . Fourth generation iPod nano® (version compatible, the battery of the iPod® is 1.0.2 or later) Interface: charged while the connection to the Make sure that the iPod® version is The interface for iPod® operation shown vehicle. updated. on the vehicle center display is similar to Depending on the version of the iPod®, the iPod® interface. Use the multi-func- the display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN tion controller and the ENTER or BACK or Accessory Attached screen when the button to play the iPod® with your connection is completed. When the iPod® favorite settings. is connected to the vehicle, the iPod® The following items can be chosen from music library can only be operated by the the menu list screen. For further informa- vehicle audio controls. tion about each item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual. . Now Playing . Playlists

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69 . Artists vious track will be played. . Albums The multi-function controller can also be . Songs used to select tracks when the iPod® is . Podcasts playing. . Genres . Composers REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM): . Audiobooks When the RPT button is pushed while a . Shuffle Songs track is being played, the play pattern can . Play mode be changed as follows: The following touch-panel buttons shown on the screen are also available: . : returns to the previous screen. . : plays/pauses the music selected. SAA2282

Next/Previous Track and AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS (models Fast Forward/Rewind: with navigation system) When the or button is pushed for The auxiliary input jacks are located in the more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is center console. NTSC/PAL compatible playing, the iPod® will play while fast devices such as video games, camcorders forwarding or rewinding. When the but- and portable video players can be con- ton is released, the iPod® will return to the nected to the auxiliary jacks. Compatible normal play speed. audio devices, such as some MP3 players, When the or button is pushed for can also be connected to the system less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is through the auxiliary jacks. playing, the next track or the beginning of The auxiliary jacks are color coded for the current track on the iPod® will be identification purposes. played. . Yellow - video input When the rewind button is pushed for less . White - left channel audio input than 1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current track starts playing, the pre- 4-70 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . Red - right channel audio input . Low Before connecting a device to a jack, turn . Medium off the power of the portable device. . High With a compatible device connected to Display: the jacks, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the display switches to Adjust the image quality of the screen, the AUX mode. The output from the select the preferred adjustment items. device will be played through the monitor and audio system.

SAA2496

AUX Menu When the “Menu” key on the display is selected while in the AUX mode, the menu screen will be displayed. Display Mode: Choose the display mode from the following items. . Normal . Wide . Cinema Volume Settings: Choose the volume setting from the following items.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71 . A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. USB memory . Do not touch the terminal portion of the USB memory. . Do not place heavy objects on the USB memory. . Do not store the USB memory in highly humid locations. . Do not expose the USB memory to SAA0451 direct sunlight. SAA2555 . With navigation system CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory. CLEANING Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual CD/DVD for the details. . Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never touch the surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc. . Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. . To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for indus- SAA2556 trial use. Without navigation system 4-72 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 1. Audio source switch SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if so equipped): . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 2. Menu control switch (models with naviga- . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will scroll up or down tion system) or audio tuning switch (mod- through the title number. els without navigation system) seconds will scroll up or down through the preset channel. . Pushing the menu control switch will 3. Back switch . select an item from the DVD display. 4. Volume control switch Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds will go to the next or previous . When the transparent operation STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON- category. menu appears, the switch will control TROLS FOR AUDIO . Pushing the menu control switch will the menu. Menu control switch (models with show the XM menu. USB (models with navigation system): navigation system) or audio tuning iPod® (models with navigation system): . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 switch (models without navigation . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds will scroll up or down through the track number. system) seconds will scroll up or down through the track number. . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 While the display is showing a MAP . seconds will scroll up or down (navigation systems only), STATUS or Pushing the menu control switch will show the iPod® menu. through the folder number. Audio screen, tilt the switch upward or . Pushing the menu control switch will downward to select a station, track, CD or CD: show the USB menu. folder. For most audio sources, tilting the . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 switch up/down for more than 1.5 sec- seconds will scroll up or down Bluetooth® Audio (models with naviga- onds provides a different function than through the track number. tion system): tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds. . . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 AM and FM radio: seconds will scroll up or down seconds will scroll up or down through the track number. . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 through the folder number (if playing seconds will scroll up or down compressed audio files). AUX: . through the preset station. Pushing the menu control switch will . Pushing the menu control switch will . Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 show the CD menu. show the AUX menu. seconds will seek up or down to the DVD (models with navigation system): next station. . . Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 Pushing the menu control switch will seconds will scroll up or down show the list of preset stations. through the track number.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73 ANTENNA BACK switch (models with navigation system) Window antenna (for Coupe mod- Push this switch to go back to the els) previous screen or cancel the selection if The antenna pattern is printed inside the it is not completed. rear window. Volume control switches Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch CAUTION to increase or decrease the volume. . Do not place metalized film near Audio source switch the rear window glass or attach Push the audio source switch to change any metal parts to it. This may the mode to available audio source. cause poor reception or noise. . When cleaning the inside of the SAA2374 rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear win- Trunk mounted antenna (for dow antenna. Lightly wipe along Roadster models) the antenna with a dampened Removing the antenna: soft cloth. You can remove the antenna if necessary. Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by turning counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwise and tighten.

CAUTION

. To avoid damaging or deforming the antenna, be sure to remove the antenna under the following 4-74 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a car phone or a CB radio conditions. in your vehicle, be sure to observe the — The vehicle enters an auto- following cautions, otherwise the new CAUTION matic car wash. equipment may adversely affect the elec- . Keep the antenna as far away as — The vehicle enters a garage tronic control modules and electronic control system harness. possible from the electronic con- with a low ceiling. trol modules. — The vehicle is covered with a . Keep the antenna wire more than car cover. WARNING 8 in (20 cm) away from the . Always properly tighten the an- electronic control system har- tenna rod during installation. . A cellular phone should not be ness. Do not route the antenna Otherwise, the antenna rod may used for any purpose while driv- wire next to any harness. break during vehicle operation. ing so full attention may be given . Adjust the antenna standing- to vehicle operation. Some juris- wave ratio as recommended by dictions prohibit the use of cellu- the manufacturer. lar phones while driving. . Connect the ground wire from the . If you must make a call while your CB radio chassis to the body. vehicle is in motion, the hands- . For details, it is recommended free cellular phone operational you visit a NISSAN dealer. mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. . If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75 Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (models with navigation system)

with your cellular phone in your pocket. LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth® WARNING Once a cellular phone is connected to the functions. in-vehicle phone module, no phone con- . Set up the wireless connection be- . Use a phone after stopping your necting procedure is required anymore. tween a compatible cellular phone vehicle in a safe location. If you Your phone is automatically connected and the in-vehicle phone module be- have to use a phone while driving, with the in-vehicle phone module when fore using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free exercise extreme caution at all the ignition switch is pushed to the ON Phone System. . times so full attention may be position with the registered cellular Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular given to vehicle operation. phone turned on and carried in the phones may not be recognized by vehicle. the in-vehicle phone module. Please . If you find yourself unable to visit devote full attention to vehicle You can register up to 5 different Blue- operation while talking on the tooth® cellular phones in the in-vehicle www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a phone, pull off the road to a safe phone module. However, you can talk on recommended phone list. . location and stop your vehicle only one cellular phone at a time. You will not be able to use a hands- before doing so. The NISSAN Voice Recognition system free phone under the following condi- supports the phone commands, so dial- tions: ing a phone number using your voice is — Your vehicle is outside of the tele- possible. For more details, see “NISSAN phone service area. CAUTION Voice Recognition System (models with — Your vehicle is in an area where it is navigation system)” (P.4-99). difficult to receive radio waves; To avoid draining the vehicle battery, Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free such as in a tunnel, in an under- use a phone after starting the en- Phone System, refer to the following ground parking garage, behind a gine. notes. tall building or in a mountainous area. . Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Blue- Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth® tooth® functions share the same fre- — Your cellular phone is locked in Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an quency band (2.4 GHz). Using the order not to be dialed. owner of a compatible Bluetooth® en- . Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN func- When the radio wave condition is not abled cellular phone, you can set up the tions at the same time may slow down ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it wireless connection between your cellu- or disconnect the communication and may be difficult to hear the other lar phone and the in-vehicle phone mod- cause undesired noise. It is recom- person’s voice during a call. ule. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, mended that you turn off the wireless you can make or receive a telephone call 4-76 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . Immediately after the ignition switch . Keep the interior of the vehicle as IC Regulatory information is pushed to the ON position, it may be quiet as possible to hear the caller’s . Operation is subject to the following impossible to receive a call for a short voice clearly as well as to minimize its two conditions: (1) this device may not period of time. echoes. cause interference, and (2) this device . . Do not place the cellular phone in an If reception between callers is unclear, must accept any interference, includ- area surrounded by metal or far away adjusting the incoming or outgoing ing interference that may cause un- from the in-vehicle phone module to call volume may improve the clarity. desired operation of the device. prevent tone quality degradation and REGULATORY INFORMATION . This Class B digital apparatus meets wireless connection disruption. all requirements of the Canadian In- . While a cellular phone is connected FCC Regulatory information terference-Causing Equipment Regu- through the Bluetooth® wireless con- . CAUTION: To maintain compliance lations. nection, the battery power of the with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, cellular phone may discharge quicker use only the supplied antenna. Un- Bluetooth® trademark than usual. authorized antenna, modification, or Bluetooth® is a trademark . If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone attachments could damage the trans- owned by Bluetooth SIG, System seems to be malfunctioning, mitter and may violate FCC regula- Inc., and licensed to Clarion please visit www.nissanusa.com/blue- tions. Co., Ltd. tooth for troubleshooting help. . Operation is subject to the following . Some cellular phones or other devices two conditions: VOICE COMMANDS may cause interference or a buzzing 1. this device may not cause interfer- You can use voice commands to operate noise to come from the audio system ence and various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone speakers. Storing the device in a System features using the NISSAN Voice 2. this device must accept any interfer- Recognition system. different location may reduce or elim- ence, including interference that may inate the noise. cause undesired operation of the For more details, see “NISSAN Voice Re- . Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s device cognition System (models with naviga- Manual regarding the telephone pair- tion system)” (P.4-99). ing procedure specific to your phone, battery charging, cellular phone antenna, etc. . The antenna display on the monitor will not coincide with the antenna display of some cellular phones. Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77 JVH0473X SAA2520 CONNECTING PROCEDURE 2. A message screen is displayed. Oper- 1. Push the PHONE button or the ate the cellular phone according to button, and select the “Connect the message, and then wait until “MY- Phone” key. CAR” is displayed on the cellular phone. After selecting “MY-CAR” on your cellular phone, perform one of the following procedures. . SAA2518 Input the PIN code displayed on the screen. CONTROL BUTTONS . Check that the PIN code displayed 1) PHONE button on the screen is the same as the 2) TALK /PHONE SEND button number displayed on the cellular phone, and then select [Yes]. For phones that support Simple Secure Pairing (SSP), check that the PIN code on the vehicle displayed matches the PIN code dis- 4-78 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems played on the phone. book does not automatically download, The connecting procedure of the the Quick Dial may be set for up to 1.000 cellular phone varies according to entries. This Quick Dial allows the record- each cellular phone. See the cellular ing of a name to speak while using voice phone Owner’s Manual for the details. recognition. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on pairing NISSAN recommended cellular phones. When the connection process is completed, the screen will return to the Phone menu display. PHONE SELECTION JVH1509X Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered 1. Push the PHONE button and select the to the system. To switch to connect “Quick Dial” key. another cellular phone, push PHONE button and select the “Connected Phones” 2. Select the “Add New” key at the top of key. The registered cellular phones are the screen. shown on the list. If you select a cellular phone that is different from the one currently connected, the newly selected phone will be connected to the system. QUICK DIAL This vehicle has two phonebooks available for hands-free use. Depending on the phone, the system may automatically download the entire cell phone’s phonebook into the “ Phonebook”. For the details about downloading a phonebook, see “Phone setting” (P.4-84). If a phone- Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79 . Copy from Call History The system will show a list of incoming, outgoing or missed calls that were downloaded from the connected cellular phone (depending on the phone’s compatibility). Select one of these entries to save in the Quick Dial. . Copy from the Phonebook The system will show the connected cellular phone’s phonebook that was downloaded (depending on the phone’s compatibility). Select one of these entries to save in the Quick Dial.

JVH1407X JVH1194X 3. Choose the method for entering the 5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a Quick Dial entry. For this example, name to speak when using the select “Enter Number by Keypad”. NISSAN Voice Recognition system. 4. Input the name and phone number 6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to manually using the keypad displayed speak the name after the tone. on the screen. (See “How to use touch 7. When the voicetag is successfully screen” (P.4-5).) saved, select the “OK” key to save the Quick Dial entry. 8. After the Quick Dial entry is saved, it will show a screen that is ready to call the number. Push the BACK button to return to the Quick Dial. There are different methods to input a phone number. Select one of the following options instead of “Enter Number by Keypad” in step 3. 4-80 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NISSAN Voice Recognition system. (See “NISSAN Voice Recognition Sys- tem (models with navigation system)” (P.4-99).) To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at step 3.

JVH0480X JVH0478X

Editing the Quick Dial The following editing items are available: . 1. Push the SETTING button and select Entry # the “Phone” key. Changes the displayed number of the selected entry. 2. Select the “Edit Quick Dial” key. . Name 3. Select the desired entry from the Edit the name of the entry using the displayed list. keypad displayed on the screen. 4. Select the desired item to change. . Number Edit the phone number using the keypad displayed on the screen. . Type Select an icon from the icon list. . Voicetag Confirm and store the voicetag. Voi- cetags allow easy dialing using the

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81 JVH0479X JVH0495X SAA2525 MAKING A CALL There are different methods to make a RECEIVING A CALL To make a call, follow this procedure. call. Select one of the following options When you hear a phone ring, the display instead of “Phonebook” in step 2 above. will change to the incoming call mode. To 1. Push the PHONE button on the instru- . ment panel or the button on the Quick Dial receive a call, perform one of the follow- steering wheel. The “PHONE” screen Select an entry stored in the Quick ing procedures listed below. will appear on the display. Dial. 1. Select the “Answer” key. . 2. Select the “Phonebook” key on the Call History 2. Push the PHONE button on the instru- “PHONE” menu. Select an outgoing, incoming or ment panel. missed call downloaded from your cell 3. Select the desired entry from the list. phone (depending on your phone’s 3. Push the button on the steering 4. Confirm the correct entry by selecting compatibility). wheel. for the correct number from the list. . Dial Number There are some options available when Input the phone number manually receiving a call. Select one of the follow- using the keypad displayed on the ing displayed on the screen. screen. (See “How to use touch screen” . Answer (P.4-5).) Accept an incoming call to talk. 4-82 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . Hold Call . Cancel Mute Put an incoming call on hold. This will appear after “Mute” is se- . Reject Call lected. Mute will be canceled. Reject an incoming call. . Switch Call* To finish the call, perform one of the Select “Switch Call” to answer another following procedures listed below. incoming call. By selecting “Hang up”, 1. Select the “Hang up” key. you can end a call and can speak to a caller who is on hold again. 2. Push the PHONE button on the instru- * This function may not be usable, ment panel. depending on the model of phone. 3. Push the button on the steering To adjust the person’s voice to be louder wheel. or quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or −) on the steering wheel or turn the volume control knob on the SAA3587 instrument panel while talking on the DURING A CALL phone. This adjustment is also available in the SETTING mode. There are some options available during a call. Select one of the following displayed on the screen if necessary. . Hang up Finish the call. . Use Handset Transfer the call to the cellular phone. . Mute Mute your voice to the person. . Keypad Using the touch tone, send digits to the connected party for using services such as voicemail.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83 Delete Quick Dial the cellular phone will sound when The Quick Dial entries can be deleted all receiving a call. at the same time or one by one. Auto Downloaded Download Phonebook When this item is activated, the phone- Download the contacts registered in a book of a hands-free phone is automati- Bluetooth® cellular phone. Availability of cally downloaded at the same time that this function depends on each cellular the hands-free phone is connected. phone. The memory downloading procedure from the cellular phone also varies according to each cellular phone. See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. Volume & Ringtone JVH0480X The following kinds of phone volume can be set. Pushing the PHONE button and PHONE SETTING selecting the “Volume & Ringtone” key To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free can also operate the same settings. Phone System to your preferred settings, . Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing push the SETTING button on the instru- Call ment panel and select the “PHONE” key. To increase or decrease the volume, Edit Quick DIal select the “Ringtone”, “Incoming Call” To edit the Quick Dial, use the same or “Outgoing Call” key and adjust it procedure as described in “Quick Dial” with the multi-function controller. . (P.4-79). Automatic Hold When this function is activated, an incoming phone call is automatically held. . Vehicle Ringtone When this function is activated, a specific ringtone that is different from

4-84 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “NISSAN Voice Recognition System (models with navigation system)” (P.4-99).) 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. The system fails to interpret the 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the command correctly. vehicle. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. The system consistently selects the 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Quick Dial” (P.4-79).) wrong voicetag. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name. The system cannot be operated. Close the soft top (for Roadster models).

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85 Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM (models without navigation system)

WARNING

. Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. . If you find yourself unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle SAA2528 before doing so. 1. Volume control switch −/+ Your phone is automatically connected 2. PHONE SEND button with the in-vehicle phone module when 3. PHONE END button the ignition switch is pushed to the ON CAUTION 4. Microphone position with the connected cellular Your vehicle is equipped with the Blue- phone turned on and carried in the To avoid draining the vehicle battery, tooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you vehicle. use a phone after starting the en- have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled You can connect up to 5 different Blue- gine. cellular phone, you can set up the wire- tooth® cellular phones in the in-vehicle less connection between your cellular phone module. However, you can talk on phone and the in-vehicle phone module. only one cellular phone at a time. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free can make or receive a hands-free tele- Phone System, refer to the following phone call in your vehicle. notes. Once your cellular phone is connected to . Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Blue- the in-vehicle phone module, no other tooth® functions share the same fre- phone connecting procedure is required. quency band (2.4 GHz). Using the 4-86 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN func- . When the radio wave condition is not cellular phone antenna, etc. tions at the same time may slow down ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it . This wireless hands free car kit is or disconnect the communication and may be difficult to hear the other based on Bluetooth® technology, cause undesired noise. It is recom- person’s voice during a call. — Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz mended that you turn off the wireless . Immediately after the ignition switch — Output Power: 4.14 dBm E.I.R.P LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth® is pushed to the ON position, it may be — Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, π/ functions. impossible to receive a call for a short 4DQPSK . Set up the wireless connection be- period of time. — Number of Channel: 79 tween a compatible cellular phone . Do not place the cellular phone in an and the in-vehicle phone module be- area surrounded by metal or far away — This wireless equipment can’t be fore using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free from the in-vehicle phone module to used for any services related to Phone System. prevent tone quality degradation and safety because there is the possibi- . Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular wireless connection disruption. lity of radio interference. phones may not be recognized by . While a cellular phone is connected REGULATORY INFORMATION the in-vehicle phone module. Please through the Bluetooth® wireless con- FCC Regulatory information visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth nection, the battery power of the . for a recommended phone list and cellular phone may discharge quicker CAUTION: To maintain compliance connecting. than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands- with FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, . You will not be able to use a hands- Free Phone System cannot charge use only the supplied antenna. Un- free phone under the following condi- cellular phones. authorized antenna, modification, or tions: . If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone attachments could damage the trans- — Your vehicle is outside of the tele- System seems to be malfunctioning, it mitter and may violate FCC regula- phone service area. is recommended to contact a NISSAN tions. . — Your vehicle is in an area where it is dealer. Operation is subject to the following difficult to receive radio waves; . Some cellular phones or other devices two conditions: such as in a tunnel, in an under- may cause interference or a buzzing 1. this device may not cause interfer- ground parking garage, near a tall noise to come from the audio system ence and building or in a mountainous area. speakers. Storing the device in a 2. this device must accept any interfer- — Your cellular phone is locked to different location may reduce or elim- ence, including interference that may prevent it from being dialed. inate the noise. cause undesired operation of the . Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s device Manual regarding battery charging, Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87 IC Regulatory information Initialization Giving voice command . Operation is subject to the following When the ignition switch is pushed to the To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, two conditions: (1) this device may not ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is push and release the button located cause interference, and (2) this device initialized, which may take up to one on the steering wheel. After the tone must accept any interference, includ- minute. If the button is pushed before sounds, speak a command. ing interference that may cause un- the initialization completes, the system The command given is picked up by the desired operation of the device. will accept any command. microphone, and voice feedback is given . This Class B digital apparatus meets when the command is accepted. all requirements of the Canadian In- Operating tips . If you need to hear the available terference-Causing Equipment Regu- To get the best performance out of the commands for the current menu lations. NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe the following: again, say “Help” and the system will repeat them. Bluetooth® trademark . Keep the interior of the vehicle as . If a command is not recognized, the Bluetooth® is a trademark quiet as possible. Close the windows system announces, “Command not owned by Bluetooth SIG, to eliminate surrounding noises (traf- Inc., and licensed to Visteon recognized. Please say again.” Repeat fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), the command in a clear voice. Corporation. which may prevent the system from . If you want to go back to the previous USING THE SYSTEM recognizing voice commands correctly. command, you can say “Go back” or The NISSAN Voice Recognition system “Correction” anytime the system is . Wait until the tone sounds before allows hands-free operation of the Blue- waiting for a response. speaking a command. Otherwise, the tooth® Hands-Free Phone System. . command will not be received prop- You can cancel a command when the If the vehicle is in motion, some com- erly. system is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system mands may not be available so full . Start speaking a command within 5 attention may be given to vehicle opera- announces “Cancel” and ends the VR seconds after the tone sounds. session. You can also push and hold tion. . Speak in a natural voice without the button for 5 seconds on the pausing between words. steering wheel at any time to cancel the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

4-88 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . If you want to adjust the volume of the — “One eight zero zero six six two six — “One five five five one two one two voice feedback, push the volume con- two oh oh” star one two three” trol switch (+ or −) on the steering . Words can be used for the first 4 digits . Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” wheel while being provided with feed- places only. (available when using the “Special back. You can also use the radio Example: 1-800-662-6200 Number” command and the “Send” volume control knob. — “One eight hundred six six two six command during a call). Voice Prompt Interrupt: two oh oh”, . Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using the “Special Number” com- In most cases you can interrupt the voice — NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred, and mand). feedback to speak the next command by . pressing the button on the steering — NOT “One eight oh oh six six two Say “pause” for a 2 second pause wheel. sixty two hundred. (available only when storing a phone . book number). One Shot Call: Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The system will prompt you See “Making a call by entering a phone To use the system faster, you may speak to continuing entering digits, if de- number” (P.4-91) and “List of voice the second level commands with the sired. commands” (P.4-92) for more informa- main menu command on the main menu. tion. Example: 1-800-662-6200 For example, push the button and NOTE: after the tone say, “Call Redial.” Note: The — “One eight zero zero” combined command of Call and (a Name) The system repeats the numbers For best results, say phone numbers as cannot be used. and prompts you to enter more. single digits. — “six six two” The voice command “Help” is available at How to say numbers The system repeats the numbers any time. Please say the “Help” command NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a and prompts you to enter more. to get information about how to use the certain way to speak numbers in voice — “six two zero zero” system. commands. Refer to the rules and exam- . You can say “Star” for “*” and “Pound” INFO ples below. for “#” at any time in any position of . If you are controlling the telephone . Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”. the phone number. (Available only system by voice command for the first Example: 1-800-662-6200 when using the “Special Number” time or do not know the appropriate — “One eight oh oh six six two six two command.) voice command, speak “Help”. The oh oh”, or Example: 1-555-1212 *123 system announces the available commands.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89 . When you speak numbers, you can tion system at any time. speak both “zero” or “oh” for “0”. GETTING STARTED Manual command selection The following procedures will help you Commands can be selected manually. get started using the Bluetooth® Hands- While the commands are displayed on Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice the audio screen, select a command by Recognition. For additional command operating the audio tuning switch, and options, refer to “List of voice commands” then push the button. Once a com- (P.4-92). mand is manually selected, the voice Choosing a language command function is cancelled. To return to voice command mode, push the You can interact with the Bluetooth® button to cancel the current operation, Hands-Free Phone System using English, and then perform the first procedure of Spanish or French. voice command. SAA2557 To change the language, perform the following. CONTROL BUTTONS 1. Push and hold the button for The control buttons for the Bluetooth® more than 5 seconds. Hands-Free Phone System are located on 2. The system announces: “Press the the steering wheel. PHONE SEND ( ) button for the PHONE SEND hands-free phone system to enter Push the button to initiate a VR the speaker adaptation mode or press session or answer an incoming call. the PHONE END ( ) button to select a different language.” You can also use the button to interrupt system feedback and give a 3. Push the button. command at once. For information on speaker adapta- PHONE END tion, see “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” (P.4-96). While the voice recognition system is active, push the button to go back 4. The system announces the current one step. Push and hold the button language and gives you the option to for 5 seconds to quit the voice recogni- change the language to Spanish (in 4-90 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Spanish) or French (in French). Use the 4. The system asks you to say a name following chart to select the language. for the phone . NOTE: If the name is too long or too short, You must push the button or the the system tells you, then prompts button within 5 seconds to you for a name again. change the language. Also, if more than one phone is con- Push nected and the name sounds too Push Current lan- (MODE/ 1. Push the button on the steering (TALK/PHONE much like a name already used, the guage PHONE END) wheel. The system announces the SEND) to select system tells you, then prompts you for to select available commands. a name again. English Spanish French 2. Say: “Connect Phone” . The system Spanish English French acknowledges the command and an- Making a call by entering a phone French English Spanish nounces the next set of available number commands. 5. If you decide not to change the 3. Say: “Add phone” . The system ac- language, do not push either button. knowledges the command and asks After 5 seconds, the VR session will you to initiate pairing from the phone end, and the language will not be handset . changed. The connecting procedure of the Connecting procedure cellular phone varies according to 1. Push the button on steering wheel. A tone will sound. NOTE: each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You 2. Say: “Call” . The system acknowl- The connecting procedure must be can also visit www.nissanusa.com/ edges the command and announces performed when the vehicle is station- bluetooth for instructions on connect- the next set of available commands. ary. If the vehicle starts moving during ing NISSAN recommended cellular 3. Say: “Phone Number” . The system the procedure, the procedure will be phones. cancelled. acknowledges the command and an- When prompted for a Passkey code, nounces the next set of available enter “1234” from the handset. The commands. Say: “Special Number” to Passkey code “1234” has been as- dial more than 10 digits or any special signed by NISSAN and cannot be characters. changed.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91 4. Say the number you wish to call NOTE: session. Whenever the VR session is starting with the area code in single If you do not wish to take the call when cancelled, a double beep is played to digit format. If the system has trouble you hear the ring tone, push the indicate you have exited the system. recognizing the correct phone num- button on the steering wheel to reject If you want to go back to the previous ber, try entering the number in the the call. command, you can say “Go back” or following groups: 3-digit area code, 3- LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS “Correction” anytime the system is wait- digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ing for a response. example, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five” as the 1st group, then Call “one two one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, say “Special Num- ber”. See “How to say numbers” (P.4- 89), for more information. When you push and release the 5. When you have finished speaking the button on the steering wheel, you can phone number, the system repeats it choose from the commands on the Main back and announces the available Menu. The following pages describe these commands. commands and the commands in each (Speak Name) 6. Say: “Dial” . The system acknowl- sub-menu. If there are entries stored in the phone- edges the command and makes the Remember to wait for the tone before book, a number associated with a name call. speaking. and location can be dialed. For additional command options, see “List You can say “Help” to hear the list of See “Phonebook (phones without auto- of voice commands” (P.4-92). commands currently available anytime matic phonebook download function)” the system is waiting for a response. (P.4-93) to learn how to store entries. Receiving a call A menu item can also be selected by When prompted by the system, say the To receive a call, push the button on scrolling the display with the SEEK switch name of the phonebook entry to call. The the steering wheel when you hear the and entering by pushing the button. system acknowledges the name. ring tone. If you want to end an action without If there are multiple locations associated Once the call has ended, push the completing it, you can say “Cancel” or with the name, the system asks the user button on the steering wheel. “Quit” at anytime the system is waiting for to choose the location. a response. The system will end the VR 4-92 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Once the name and location are con- speak the number. The system announces, “Transfer call. firmed, the system begins the call. “During a call” Call transferred to privacy mode.” The system then ends the VR session. “Phone Number” (speak digits) During a call there are several command To reconnect a call from the cellular When prompted by the system, say the options available. Push the button on phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free number to call. Refer to “Making a call by the steering wheel to mute the receiving Phone system, push the button. entering a phone number” (P.4-91) for voice and enter commands. . more details. . “Mute” — Use the Mute command to “Help” — The system announces the mute your voice so the other party “Redial” available commands. cannot hear it. Use the mute com- . Use the Redial command to call the last “Go back/Correction” — The system mand again to unmute your voice. announces “Go back,” ends the VR number that was dialed. NOTE: session and returns to the call. The system acknowledges the command, . If a call is ended or the cellular phone repeats the number and begins dialing. “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces “Cancel,” ends the VR session network connection is lost while the If a redial number does not exist, the and returns to the call. Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will system announces, “There is no number be reset to “off” for the next call so the . “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send to redial” and ends the VR session. other party can hear your voice. command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” “Call back” during a call. For example, if you were Phonebook (phones without auto- Use the Call Back command to dial the directed to dial an extension by an matic phonebook download func- number of the last incoming call within automated system: tion) the vehicle. Say: “Send one two three four.” The system acknowledges the command, The system acknowledges the com- repeats the number and begins dialing. mand and sends the tones associated If a call back number does not exist, the with the numbers. The system then system announces, “There is no number ends the VR session and returns to to call back” and ends the VR session. the call. Say “star” for “*”, say “pound” for “#”. “Special Number” . “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call To dial more than 10 digits or any special command to transfer the call from the “Transfer Entry” characters, please say “Special Number”. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System Use the Transfer Entry command to store When the system acknowledges the com- to the cellular phone when privacy is a new name in the system. mand, the system will prompt you to desired. When prompted by the system, say the Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93 name you would like to give the new phone numbers from NISSAN recom- Phonebook (phones with auto- entry. mended cellular phones. matic phonebook download func- For example, say: “Mary.” The system repeats the number and tion) prompts you for the next command. If the name is too long or too short, the NOTE: system tells you, then prompts you for a When you have finished entering num- Phonebook commands are not avail- name again. bers or transferring an entry, choose “Store.” able when the vehicle is moving. Also, if the name sounds too much like a name already stored, the system tells you, The system confirms the name, location then prompts you for a name again. and number. The system will ask you to transfer a “Delete Entry” phone number stored in the cellular Use the Delete Entry command to delete phone’s memory. one entry from the phonebook. After the To enter a phone number by voice system acknowledges a command, say command: the name to delete or say “List Names” to choose an entry. For phones that support automatic For example, say: “five five five one two download of the phonebook (PBAP Blue- “List Names” one two.” See “How to say numbers” (P.4- tooth profile), the “Phonebook” command 89) for more information. Use the List Names command to hear all is used to manage entries to the vehicle To transfer a phone number stored in the the names in the phonebook. The system phonebook. You can say the name of an cellular phone’s memory: recites the phonebook entries but does entry at this menu to initiate dialing of not include the actual phone numbers. that entry. Say: “Transfer entry.” The system ac- When playback of the list is complete, the The phonebook stores up to 1000 names knowledges the command and asks you system returns to the main menu. to initiate the transfer from the phone for each phone paired with the system. handset. The new contact phone number Playback of the list can be stopped at any Each name can have up to 4 locations/ will be transferred from the cellular phone time by pushing the button on the phone numbers associated with it. steering wheel. The system ends the VR via the Bluetooth® communication link. When a phone is connected to the session. The transfer procedure varies according system, the phonebook is automatically to each cellular phone. See the cellular downloaded to the vehicle. This feature phone Owner’s Manual for details. You allows you to access your phonebook can also visit www.nissanusa.com/blue- from the Bluetooth® system and call tooth for instructions on transferring contacts by name. You can record a

4-94 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems custom voice tag for contact names that phonebook that the vehicle has difficulty “Missed” the system has difficulty recognizing. For recognizing. This feature can also be used Use the Missed command to list the more information see “Record Name” in to record voice tags to directly dial an missed calls made to the vehicle that this section. entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 were not answered. voice tags can be recorded to the system. NOTE: “Call Back” “Next Name” Each phone has its own separate pho- Use the Call Back command to dial the nebook. You cannot access Phone A’s Use the Next Name command to move number of the most recently received call. phonebook if you are currently con- the next name of list. nected with Phone B. “Previous Name” Connect Phone “List names” Use the Previous Name command to NOTE: Use the List Names command to hear all move the previous name of list. Add Phone command is not available the names and locations in the phone when the vehicle is moving. book. Recent Calls The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu. You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the “Record Name” com- Use the Recent Calls command to access Use the Connect Phone commands to mand in this section for information outgoing, incoming or missed calls. about recording custom voice tags for manage the phones connecting to the “Outgoing” list entries that the system has difficulty vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth® func- pronouncing. Use the Outgoing command to list the tion on the vehicle. outgoing calls made from the vehicle. “Add Phone” “Incoming” “Record name” Use the Add Phone command to add a Use the Incoming command to list the phone to the vehicle. See “Connecting The system allows you to record custom incoming calls made from the vehicle. procedure” (P.4-91) for more information. voice tags for contact names in the

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95 “Select Phone” speaker adaptation model for each con- 9. When training is finished, the system Use the Select Phone command to select nected phone. will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded. from a list of phones connected to the Training procedure vehicle. The system will list the names 10. The system will announce that speak- assigned to each phone and then prompt 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably er adaptation has been completed you for the phone you wish to select. Only quiet outdoor location. and the system is ready. one phone can be active at a time. 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine The SA mode will stop if: “Delete Phone” running, the parking brake on, and the . transmission in Park. The button is pressed for more Use the Delete Phone command to delete than 5 seconds in SA mode. a phone that is connected to the vehicle. 3. Push and hold the button for . The vehicle is driven during SA mode. more than 5 seconds. The system will list the names assigned to . The ignition switch is placed in the each phone and then prompt you for the 4. The system announces: “Press the OFF or LOCK position. phone you wish to delete. Deleting a PHONE SEND ( ) button for the phone from the vehicle will also delete hands-free phone system to enter Training phrases that phonebook for that phone. the speaker adaptation mode or press During the SA mode, the system instructs “Bluetooth Off” the PHONE END ( ) button to select you to say the following phrases. a different language.” Use the Bluetooth Off command to pre- (The system will prompt you for each vent a wireless connection to your phone. 5. Push the button. phrase.) “Replace phone” For information on selecting a differ- . phonebook transfer entry ent language, see “Choosing a lan- . dial 3 0 4 2 9 This can be used to reconnect a new guage” (P.4-90). phone with the vehicle you have changed . delete call back number 6. If the connected phone is already in your cellular phone. . Incoming use, the system will prompt you to . SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE overwrite. Follow the instructions pro- Transfer entry . Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out- vided by the system. 8 pause 9 3 2 pause 7 . of dialect users to train the system to 7. When preparation is complete and delete all entries . improve recognition accuracy. By repeat- you are ready to begin, push the call 7 2 4 0 9 ing a number of commands, the users button. . phonebook delete entry can create a voice model of their own . next entry voice that is stored in the system. The 8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow system is capable of storing a different the instructions provided by the system. 4-96 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems . dial star 2 1 7 0 . go back . yes . call 5 6 2 8 0 . no . dial 6 6 4 3 7 . select . Missed . dial 8 5 6 9 2 . Bluetooth on . Outgoing . call 3 1 9 0 2 . 9 7 pause pause 3 0 8 . cancel . call back number . call star 2 0 9 5 . delete phone . dial 8 3 0 5 1 . Record Name . 4 3 pause 2 9 pause 0 . delete redial number . phonebook list names . call 8 0 5 4 1 . correction . setup main menu . dial 7 4 0 1 8 . memo pad delete . delete . dial 9 7 2 6 6 . call 7 6 3 0 1

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution 1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” (P.4-92). 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. The system fails to interpret the command 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). correctly. NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” (P.4-96). 1. Ensure that the phonebook entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can The system consistently selects the wrong be confirmed by using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook (phones without automatic entry from the phonebook. phonebook download function)” (P.4-93). 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-98 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)

NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands- tion available in that mode. Otherwise, it free operation of the Phone, Navigation, is recommended that Alternate Com- Information and Audio systems in one of mand Mode be turned off and Standard two modes, Standard Mode or Alternate Mode be used for the best recognition Command Mode. performance. In Standard Mode, commands that are For the voice commands for the naviga- available are always shown on the display tion system, refer to the Navigation Sys- and announced by the system. You can tem Owner’s Manual of your vehicle. complete your desired operation by sim- For Roadster models: ply following the prompts given by the The voice recognition system cannot be system. (See “NISSAN voice recognition operated when the soft top is not closed. Standard Mode” (P.4-99) for details.) For advanced operation, you can use the NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE Alternate Command Mode. (See “NISSAN SAA2529 voice recognition Alternate Command The following section is applicable when Mode” (P.4-110) for details.) When this the Standard Mode is activated. Activating Standard Mode mode is active, an expanded list of The Standard Mode enables you to com- When the Alternate Command Mode is commands can be spoken after pushing plete the desired operation by simply the TALK switch, and the voice following the prompts that appear on active, perform the following steps to switch to the Standard Mode. command menu prompts are turned off. the display and also are announced by Review the expanded command list, the system. 1. Push the SETTING button on the which is available when this mode is instrument panel. active. Note that in this mode the recog- 2. Select the “Others” key. nition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. the ways of speaking each command are increased. To switch one mode to another, see each mode description later in this section. To improve the recognition success rate when Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the Speaker Adaptation Func- Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99 . Let’s Practice Mode that allows practicing by following the instructions of the system voice. . Using the Address Book Tutorial for entering a destination by using the Address Book. . Finding a Street Address (if so equipped) Tutorial for entering a destination by street address. . Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by SAA2530 SAA2531 voice command operation. . Help on Speaking 4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” 1. Push the INFO button on the instru- Displays useful tips of speaking for key. ment panel. correct command recognition by the 5. The indicator turns off and the Stan- 2. Select the “Others” key. system. dard Mode activates. 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. Note that the Command List feature is Displaying user guide 4. Select the “User Guide” key. only available when Alternate Command Mode is active. If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition 5. Select a preferred item. system for the first time or you do not You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you know how to operate it, you can display say “Help”. the User Guide for confirmation. Available items: You can confirm how to use voice com- . mands by accessing a simplified User Getting Started Guide, which contains basic instructions Describes the basics of how to oper- and tutorials for several voice commands. ate the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

4-100 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems perform these operations using NISSAN Voice Recognition.

SAA2532 SAA2534

Getting Started Let’s Practice Before using the NISSAN Voice Recogni- This mode helps learn how to use the tion system for the first time, you can NISSAN Voice Recognition system. confirm how to use commands by view- 1. Select the “Let’s Practice” key. ing the Getting Started section of the User Guide. 2. After the message screen appears, push the TALK switch on the 1. Select the “Getting Started” key. steering wheel. 2. You can confirm the page by scrolling 3. Speak the displayed number after the the screen using the multi-function tone. The evaluation screen will be controller. displayed and the result can be con- Tutorials on the operation of the firmed. NISSAN Voice Recognition system If you choose “Using the Address Book”, “Finding a Street Address” or “Placing Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101 USING THE SYSTEM cognized more easily. Initialization When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which may take up to one minute. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the TALK switch is pushed before the initialization completes, the display will show the message: “System not ready.” or a beep sounds. Before starting SAA2533 To get the best recognition performance from NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe Useful tips for correct operation the following: You can display useful speaking tips to . The interior of the vehicle should be as help the system recognize your voice quiet as possible. Close the windows commands correctly. to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vibration sounds, Select “Help on Speaking” to start display. etc.), which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands. . Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. . Speak in a natural conversational voice without pausing between words. . If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be re- 4-102 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Selecting the “Help” key can display following examples. the detailed information of the each General rule command. Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be Operating tips: used. (For example, if you would like to . Say a command after the tone. say 500, “five zero zero” can be used, but . Commands that are available are al- “five hundred” cannot.) ways shown on the display and spo- Examples ken through voice menu prompts. . 1-800-662-6200 Commands other than those that — “One eight zero zero six six two six are displayed are not accepted. Please two zero zero” follow the prompts given by the system. Improving Recognition of Phone numbers . If the command is not recognized, the SAA2167 system announces, “Please say again”. You can improve the recognition of Repeat the command in a clear voice. phone numbers by saying the phone . Push the BACK button once to return number in three groups of numbers. For Giving voice commands example, when you try to call 800-662- 1. Push the TALK switch located on to the previous screen. . 6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and the the steering wheel. To exit the voice recognition system, system will then ask you for the next push and hold the TALK switch. 2. A list of commands appears on the three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After The message, “Voice canceled” will be recognition, the system will then ask for screen, and you will hear a prompt. announced. 3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the last four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. the screen changes from to , Voice Prompt Interrupt: Using this method of phone digit entry speak a command. To skip the voice guidance function and can improve recognition performance. Selecting the “Practice” key will start give the command immediately, push the When speaking a house number, speak the practice mode. See “Let’s Practice” TALK switch to interrupt the system. the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (P.4-101). Remember to speak after the tone. (Oh)” is included in the house number, it will not be recognized as the number “0 4. Continue to follow the voice menu How to speak numbers: (zero)” even if you speak “oh” instead of prompts and speak after the tone NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a “zero”. Please speak “zero” for the num- sounds until your desired operation certain way to speak numbers when ber “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the letter “o (oh)” is completed. giving voice commands. Refer to the Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103 Send digits using dial tone: . Push the TALK switch during a phone call. . The menu will be launched and you will be provided with the following guidance: "Please say the digits to dial". . After guidance, say the digits of the number you want to send. After this, the digits that have been recognized will be read out. . If you push the ENTER button on the steering wheel or on the multi-function controller, the selected digits will be sent.

4-104 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Command List Category Command:

Command Action Call (Optional) Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either phonebook. Please say "Call" followed by a stored name. Phone Operates the Phone function Navigation Operates the Navigation function Information Displays the vehicle Information function Audio Operates the Audio function. Help Displays User Guide

. Phone Command: Command Action Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits. Quick Dial Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial. Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone. Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number. Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number. Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number. International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken. Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

. Navigation Command: Command Action Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book. Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location. Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location. Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105 Command Action Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

. Information Command: Command Action Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information. Maintenance Displays maintenance information. Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF. Where am I? Displays your current location.

. Audio Command: Command Action AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played. FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played. XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played. CD Starts to play a CD.

. General Commands Command Action Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

4-106 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Voice command examples To use the NISSAN Voice Recognition function, speaking one command is sometimes sufficient, but at other times it is necessary to speak two or more commands. As examples, some additional basic operations by voice commands are described here. For navigation system commands, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA2167 JVH0481X

Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone 3. Speak “Dial Number”. number 800-662-6200: 1. Push the TALK switch located on the steering wheel. You will hear a prompt. 2. Speak “Phone”.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107 SAA2537 SAA2538 SAA2539 4. Speak “8 0 0”. 5. The system announces, “Please say 7. The system announces, “Please say Selecting the “Manual Controls” key the next three digits or dial, or say the last four digits” or say change switches the screen to the keypad to change number.” number. input the phone number manually. 6. Speak “6 6 2”. 8. Speak “6 2 0 0”.

4-108 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 10 digits using this command. Please use the “International Call” command for all other formats. . If you say “Change Number” during phone number entry, the system will automatically request that you repeat the number using the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the area code first and then follow the prompts. . Do not add a “1” in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers. . If the system does not recognize your command, please try repeating the command using a natural voice. SAA2540 Speaking too slow or too loudly may SAA2167 further decrease recognition perfor- 9. The system announces, “Dial or mance. Example 2 - Placing an international call Change Number?” to the phone number 011-81-111-222- 10. Speak “Dial”. 3333: 11. The system makes a call to 800-662- 1. Push the TALK switch located on 6200. the steering wheel. You will hear a prompt. Note: . You can also speak “800-662-6200” 2. Speak “Phone”. (10 continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 continuous digits), if the area code is not necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is recommended for improved recognition. (See “How to say numbers” (P.4-89).) . You can only say a phone number using the 3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109 JVH0481X SAA2541 SAA2542 3. Speak “International Call”. 4. Speak “011811112223333”. 5. Speak “Dial”. 6. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222- 3333. Note: Any digit input format is available in the International Number input process. NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION AL- TERNATE COMMAND MODE The following section is applicable when Alternate Command Mode is activated. When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an expanded list of commands can be used after pressing the TALK switch. In this mode, available commands are not fully shown on the display or 4-110 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems prompted. Review the expanded command list when this mode is active. See examples of Alternate Command Mode screens. Please note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and ways of speaking each command are increased. To improve the recognition success rate, try using the Speaker Adap- tation Function available in that mode. (See “Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate Command Mode)” (P.4-121).) Otherwise it is recommended that Alter- nate Command Mode be turned OFF and SAA2529 SAA2543 Standard Mode be used for the best recognition performance. Activating Alternate Command 4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode” key. Mode 5. The confirmation message is dis- When the Standard Mode is active, per- played on the screen. Push the “OK” form the following steps to switch to the key to activate the Alternate Com- Alternate Command Mode. mand Mode. 1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel. Displaying command list 2. Highlight the “Others” key. If you are controlling the system by voice commands for the first time or do not 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key. know the appropriate voice command, perform the following procedure for displaying the voice command list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111 SAA2544 SAA2545 JVH0483X 1. Push the INFO button on the instru- 5. Select a category from the list. 6. Select an item. ment panel. 7. If necessary, scroll the screen using 2. Select the “Others” key. the multi-function controller to view 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. the entire list. 4. Select the “Command List” key. 8. Push the BACK button to return to the previous screen.

4-112 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Commands List Phone Commands:

Command Action Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number. Quick Dial Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial. Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone. Call History Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number. Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number. Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number. International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken. Call Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either Quick Dial or Phonebook. Please say “Call” followed by a stored name. Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113 Navigation Commands: Command Action Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book. Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location. Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location. Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book. Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination. Previous Start Point Sets a route to a previous starting point. Delete Destination Deletes a destination.

4-114 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Information Commands: Command Action Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information. Maintenance Displays maintenance information. Where am I? Displays your current location. Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF. Weather Information Displays weather information. Weather Map Displays a weather map.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115 Audio Commands: Command Action CD Starts to play a CD. FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played. AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played. XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played. USB Turns on the USB memory. Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth® audio player. AUX Turns on the AUX.

4-116 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Help Commands: Command Action Command List Navigation Commands Displays the navigation command list. Phone Commands Displays the phone command list. Audio Commands Displays the audio command list. Information Com- Displays the information command list. mands Help Commands Displays the help command list. User Guide Displays the User Guide. Speaker Adaptation The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117 General Commands: Command Action Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

4-118 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems the ENTER button. . Adapting the System to Your Voice 5. Highlight an item using the multi- Tutorial adapting the system to your function controller and push the voice. ENTER button. USING THE SYSTEM Available items: Initialization . Getting Started When the ignition switch is pushed to the Describe the basics of how to operate ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. initialized, which may take up to one . Let’s Practice minute. When completed, the system is Mode that allows practicing by follow- ready to accept voice commands. If the ing the instructions of the system TALK switch is pushed before the voice. initialization completes the display will . Using the Address Book show the message: “System not ready.” SAA2547 Refer to Navigation System Owner’s or a beep sounds. Manual. Before starting Displaying user guide . Finding a Street Address (if so To get the best performance from NISSAN You can confirm how to use voice com- equipped) mands by accessing a simplified User Voice Recognition, observe the following. Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Guide, which contains basic instructions . Manual. Keep the interior of the vehicle as and tutorials for several voice commands. quiet as possible. Close the windows . Placing Calls 1. Push the INFO button on the instru- to eliminate the surrounding noises Tutorial for making a phone call by ment panel. (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), voice command operation. which may prevent the system from 2. Select the “Others” key using the . Help on Speaking recognizing the voice commands cor- multifunction controller and push the Displays useful tips for how to correctly. ENTER button. rectly speak commands in order for . When the air conditioner is in the 3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key them to be properly recognized by the AUTO mode, the fan speed decreases using the multi-function controller system. automatically for easy recognition. and push the ENTER button. . Voice Recognition Settings . Wait until a tone sounds before speak- 4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using Describes the available voice recogni- ing a command. the multi-function controller and push tion settings. Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119 . Speak in a natural voice without . If the command is not recognized, the pausing between words. system announces, “Please say again”. Repeat the command in a clear voice. . Push the BACK button once to return to the previous screen. . If you want to cancel the command, push and hold the TALK switch for 1 second. The message “Voice canceled” will be announced. Voice Prompt Interrupt: To skip the voice guidance function and give the command immediately, push the TALK switch to interrupt the system. SAA2167 Remember to speak after the tone. How to speak numbers: Giving voice command NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a 1. Push and release the TALK switch certain way to speak numbers when located on the steering wheel. giving voice commands. Refer to the 2. A list of commands appears on the following examples. screen, and the system announces, General rule “Please say a command”. Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be 3. After the tone sounds and the icon on used. (For example, if you would like to the screen changes from to , say 500, “five zero zero” can be used, but speak a command. “five hundred” cannot. Operating tips: Phone numbers . Voice commands cannot be accepted Speak phone numbers according to the when the icon is . following examples: . The list displayed can be scrolled by . 1-800-662-6200 tilting the menu control switch on the steering wheel. 4-120 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems — “Dial one eight zero zero six six two 3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key. six two zero zero.” Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone dialing results, say phone numbers as single digits. Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five five six thousands”. Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak the number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (oh)” is included in the house number, it will not be recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you speak “oh” instead of “zero”. Please speak “zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the letter “o SAA2549 (oh)”. Send digits using dial tone: Speaker adaptation function (for . Push the TALK switch during a Alternate Command Mode) phone call. The voice recognition system has a func- . The menu will be launched and you tion to learn the user’s voice for better will be provided with the following voice recognition performance. The sys- guidance: "Please say the digits to tem can memorize the voices of up to dial". three persons. . After guidance, say the digits of the Having the system learn the user’s number you want to send. After this, the digits that have been recognized voice: will be read out. 1. Push the SETTING button on the . If you push the ENTER button on the instrument panel and select the steering wheel or on the multi-func- “Others” key. tion controller, the selected digits will 2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. be sent.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121 SAA2550 SAA2551 SAA2552 4. Select the user whose voice is mem- 6. Select a category to be learned by the 8. The system requests that you repeat a orized by the system. system from the following list. command after a tone. 5. Select the “Start Speaker Adaptation . Phone Commands 9. After the tone sounds and the icon on Learning” key. . Navigation Commands the screen changes from to , . Information Commands speak the command that the system . Audio Commands requested. . Help Commands 10. When the system has recognized the The voice commands in the cate- voice command, the voice of the user gory are displayed. is learned. 7. Select a voice command and then Push the switch or BACK button to push the ENTER button. return to the previous screen. The voice recognition system starts. If the system has learned the command correctly, the voice command status on the right side of the command turns from “None” to “Stored”.

4-122 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Minimize voice feedback (for Alter- nate Command Mode) To minimize the voice feedback from the system, perform the following steps. 1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument panel. 2. Select the “Others” key. 3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. 4. Select the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key. 5. The setting is turned to ON and the voice guidance will now be reduced SAA2553 when using the Voice Recognition system. Speaker Adaptation function settings: Edit User Name Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen. Delete Voice Data Resets the user’s voice that the voice recognition system has learned. Continuous Learning When this item is turned to ON, you can have the system learn the voice commands in succession, without selecting commands one by one.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error. Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved. Symptom/error message Solution The system fails to interpret the command 1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” (P.4-105). correctly. 2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on. NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. 4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place. The system consistently selects the wrong 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Bluetooth® hands- voicetag in the phonebook. free phone system (models with navigation system)” (P.4-76).) 2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag. The system cannot be operated. 1. Make sure that the soft top (for Roadster models) is usable. If the soft top is not working, it is recommended to contact a NISSAN dealer. 2. Close the soft top (for Roadster models). 3. Open and close the soft top (for Roadster models) before operating the system.

4-124 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-2 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-25 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...... 5-2 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-26 Three-way catalyst ...... 5-3 Power steering...... 5-27 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 5-3 Brake system ...... 5-27 Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-6 Braking precautions ...... 5-27 Off-road recovery ...... 5-6 Parking brake break-in ...... 5-28 Rapid air pressure loss ...... 5-6 Brake assist ...... 5-28 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...... 5-7 Brake assist ...... 5-28 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-8 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-28 Operating range for engine start function ...... 5-8 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...... 5-30 Push-button ignition switch operation...... 5-9 Performance dampers (NISMO models) ...... 5-32 Push-button ignition switch positions ...... 5-9 Cold weather driving ...... 5-33 Emergency engine shut off ...... 5-10 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-33 Intelligent Key battery discharge ...... 5-10 Antifreeze...... 5-33 Before starting the engine...... 5-11 Battery...... 5-33 Starting the engine ...... 5-11 Draining of coolant water ...... 5-33 Driving the vehicle ...... 5-12 Tire equipment ...... 5-33 Automatic transmission ...... 5-12 Special winter equipment ...... 5-33 Manual Transmission...... 5-17 Driving on snow or ice ...... 5-33 Parking brake ...... 5-21 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ...... 5-34 Cruise control ...... 5-22 Active noise cancellation/Active sound Precautions on cruise control ...... 5-22 enhancement (if so equipped) ...... 5-35 Cruise control operations ...... 5-23 Active noise cancellation ...... 5-35 Break-in schedule ...... 5-24 Active sound enhancement...... 5-35 Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-24 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

(Roadster models). exhaust gases could be drawn WARNING into the passenger compartment. If the engine oil temperature is high, the If you must drive with the rear hatch/trunk lid open, follow these . Do not leave children or adults engine protection mode, which helps precautions: who would normally require the reduce the chance of engine damage, support of others alone in your could activate and automatically de- 1) Open all the windows. crease engine power. Driving while the vehicle. Pets should not be left 2) Set the air recirculation to alone either. They could acciden- engine oil temperature is high may off and the fan control to high result in engine damage. tally injure themselves or others to circulate the air. through inadvertent operation of EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) . The exhaust system and body the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny should be inspected by a quali- days, temperatures in a closed fied mechanic whenever: vehicle could quickly become WARNING high enough to cause severe or — The vehicle is raised for ser- possibly fatal injuries to people or . Do not breathe exhaust gases; vice. animals. they contain colorless and odor- — You suspect that exhaust . Properly secure all cargo to help less carbon monoxide. Carbon fumes are entering into the prevent it from sliding or shifting. monoxide is dangerous. It can passenger compartment. Do not place cargo higher than cause unconsciousness or death. . — You notice a change in the the seatbacks. In a sudden stop If you suspect that exhaust fumes sound of the exhaust system. or collision, unsecured cargo are entering the vehicle, drive could cause personal injury with all windows fully open, and — You have had an accident (Coupe models). have the vehicle inspected imme- involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or . Closely supervise children when diately. rear of the vehicle. they are around cars to prevent . Do not run the engine in closed them from playing and becoming spaces such as a garage. locked in the trunk where they . Do not park the vehicle with the could be seriously injured. Keep engine running for any extended the car locked with the trunk length of time. closed when not in use, and pre- . vent children’s access to car keys Keep the rear hatch/trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise 5-2 Starting and driving THREE-WAY CATALYST cause overrich fuel flow into the those tires.) The three-way catalyst is an emission three-way catalyst, causing it to As an added safety feature, your vehicle control device installed in the exhaust overheat. Do not keep driving if has been equipped with a Tire Pressure system. Exhaust gases in the three-way the engine misfires, or if notice- Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi- catalyst are burned at high temperatures able loss of performance or other nates a low tire pressure telltale when to help reduce pollutants. unusual operating conditions are one or more of your tires is significantly detected. Have the vehicle in- under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low spected. It is recommended you tire pressure telltale illuminates, you WARNING visit a NISSAN dealer for this should stop and check your tires as soon service. as possible, and inflate them to the . The exhaust gas and the exhaust . Avoid driving with an extremely proper pressure. Driving on a significantly system are very hot. Keep people, low fuel level. Running out of fuel under-inflated tire causes the tire to animals or flammable materials could cause the engine to misfire, overheat and can lead to tire failure. away from the exhaust system damaging the three-way catalyst. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- components. ciency and tire tread life, and may affect . Do not race the engine while . Do not stop or park the vehicle the vehicle’s handling and stopping abil- warming it up. ity. over flammable materials such as . dry grass, waste paper or rags. Do not push or tow your vehicle Please note that the TPMS is not a They may ignite and cause a fire. to start the engine. substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- maintain correct tire pressure, even if TEM (TPMS) under-inflation has not reached the level CAUTION Each tire, including the spare (if provided), to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. . should be checked monthly when cold Do not use leaded gasoline. De- and inflated to the inflation pressure Your vehicle has also been equipped with posits from leaded gasoline ser- recommended by the vehicle manufac- a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate iously reduce the three-way turer on the vehicle placard or tire infla- when the system is not operating prop- catalyst’s ability to help reduce tion pressure label. (If your vehicle has erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is exhaust pollutants. tires of a different size than the size combined with the low tire pressure tell- . Keep your engine tuned up. Mal- indicated on the vehicle placard or tire tale. When the system detects a malfunc- functions in the ignition, fuel in- inflation pressure label, you should deter- tion, the telltale will flash for jection, or electrical systems can mine the proper tire inflation pressure for approximately one minute and then re- Starting and driving 5-3 main continuously illuminated. This se- pressure, the vehicle must be driven at This may cause the low tire pressure quence will continue upon subsequent speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to warning light to illuminate. If the vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunc- activate the TPMS and turn off the low warning light illuminates in low ambi- tion exists. When the malfunction indica- tire pressure warning light. Use a tire ent temperature, check the tire pres- tor is illuminated, the system may not be pressure gauge to check the tire sure for all four tires. able to detect or signal low tire pressure pressure. For additional information, see “Low tire as intended. TPMS malfunctions may . The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning pressure warning light” (P.2-13) and “Tire occur for a variety of reasons, including also appears on the vehicle informa- Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6- the installation of replacement or alter- tion display when the low tire pres- 3). nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that sure warning light is illuminated and prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- low tire pressure is detected. The erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns WARNING telltale after replacing one or more tires off when the low tire pressure warn- or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that ing light turns off. . If the low tire pressure warning the replacement or alternate tires and The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning light illuminates while driving, wheels allow the TPMS to continue to appears each time the ignition switch avoid sudden steering maneu- function properly. is placed in the ON position as long as vers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road Additional information the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. to a safe location and stop the . Since the spare tire is not equipped The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- with the TPMS, the TPMS does not does not appear if the low tire pres- ing with under-inflated tires may monitor the tire pressure of the spare sure warning light illuminates to in- permanently damage the tires tire. dicate a TPMS malfunction. and increase the likelihood of tire . failure. Serious vehicle damage The TPMS will activate only when the . Tire pressure rises and falls depending could occur and may lead to an vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 on the heat caused by the vehicle’s accident and could result in ser- MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may operation and the outside tempera- ious personal injury. Check the not detect a sudden drop in tire ture. Do not reduce the tire pressure tire pressure for all four tires. pressure (for example a flat tire while after driving because the tire pressure Adjust the tire pressure to the driving). rises after driving. Low outside tem- . recommended COLD tire pressure The low tire pressure warning light perature can lower the temperature shown on the Tire and Loading does not automatically turn off when of the air inside the tire which can Information label to turn the low the tire pressure is adjusted. After the cause a lower tire inflation pressure. tire is inflated to the recommended tire pressure warning light OFF. If 5-4 Starting and driving . the light still illuminates while cle. Other tire sealants may da- Facilities or electric devices using driving after adjusting the tire mage the valve stem seal which similar radio frequencies are near the pressure, a tire may be flat or can cause the tire to lose air vehicle. the TPMS may be malfunctioning. pressure. It is recommended you . If a transmitter set to similar frequen- If you have a flat tire, replace it visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as cies is being used in or near the with a spare tire (if so equipped) possible after using tire repair vehicle. or repair it with the tire puncture sealant (for models equipped . If a computer (or similar equipment) or repair kit (if so equipped) as soon with the emergency tire puncture a DC/AC converter is being used in or as possible. If no tire is flat and all repair kit). near the vehicle. tires are properly inflated, it is Low tire pressure warning light may recommended you consult a illuminate in the following cases. NISSAN dealer. CAUTION . If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel . Since the spare tire is not and tire without TPMS. equipped with the TPMS, when a . . The TPMS may not function prop- If the TPMS has been replaced and the spare tire is mounted or a wheel ID has not been registered. is replaced, the TPMS will not erly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the . If the wheel is not originally specified function and the low tire pressure by NISSAN. warning light will flash for ap- wheels are buried in snow. FCC Notice: proximately 1 minute. The light . Do not place metalized film or will remain on after 1 minute. any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on For USA: Have your tires replaced and/or the windows. This may cause This device complies with Part 15 of the TPMS system reset as soon as poor reception of the signals FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the possible. It is recommended you from the tire pressure sensors, following two conditions: (1) This device visit a NISSAN dealer for these and the TPMS will not function may not cause harmful interference, services. properly. and (2) this device must accept any . Replacing tires with those not interference received, including inter- originally specified by NISSAN Some devices and transmitters may tem- ference that may cause undesired op- could affect the proper operation porarily interfere with the operation of eration. the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure of the TPMS. NOTE: . warning light to illuminate. Some exam- NISSAN recommends using only ples are: Changes or modifications not expressly Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire approved by the party responsible for Sealant provided with your vehi- compliance could void the user’s Starting and driving 5-5 authority to operate the equipment. when tired. Never drive when under the 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the For Canada: influence of alcohol or drugs (including vehicle to follow the road while the prescription or over-the-counter drugs vehicle speed is reduced. Do not This device complies with Industry Ca- which may cause drowsiness). Always attempt to drive the vehicle back onto nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). wear your seat belt as outlined in the the road surface until vehicle speed is Operation is subject to the following “Seat belts” (P.1-10) of this manual, and reduced. two conditions: (1) this device may not also instruct your passengers to do so. cause interference, and (2) this device 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn must accept any interference, including Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in the steering wheel until both tires interference that may cause undesired collisions and rollovers. In a rollover return to the road surface. When all operation of the device. crash, an unbelted or improperly belted tires are on the road surface, steer the person is significantly more likely to be vehicle to stay in the appropriate AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL- injured or killed than a person properly driving lane. OVER wearing a seat belt. . If you decide that it is not safe to OFF-ROAD RECOVERY return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or WARNING While driving, the right side or left side traffic conditions, gradually slow wheels may unintentionally leave the the vehicle to a stop in a safe place Failure to operate this vehicle in a road surface. If this occurs, maintain off the road. safe and prudent manner may result control of the vehicle by following the in loss of control or an accident. procedure below. Please note that this RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS procedure is only a general guide. The Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can Be alert and drive defensively at all times. vehicle must be driven as appropriate occur if the tire is punctured or is Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces- based on the conditions of the vehicle, damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. sive speed, high speed cornering, or road and traffic. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused sudden steering maneuvers, because 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. by driving on under-inflated tires. these driving practices could cause you 2. Do not apply the brakes. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the to lose control of your vehicle. As with handling and stability of the vehicle, 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering any vehicle, a loss of control could especially at highway speeds. wheel with both hands and try to hold result in a collision with other vehicles a straight course. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll- maintaining the correct air pressure and 4. When appropriate, slowly release the over, particularly if the loss of control visually inspect the tires for wear and accelerator pedal to gradually slow causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be damage. See “Wheels and tires” (P.8-26) of attentive at all times, and avoid driving the vehicle. 5-6 Starting and driving this manual. 3. When appropriate, slowly release the NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or accelerator pedal to gradually slow under the influence of alcohol. Every year “blows-out” while driving maintain control the vehicle. thousands of people are injured or killed of the vehicle by following the procedure 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe in alcohol-related accidents. Although the below. Please note that this procedure is location off the road and away from local laws vary on what is considered to only a general guide. The vehicle must be traffic if possible. be legally intoxicated, the fact is that driven as appropriate based on the con- 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gra- alcohol affects all people differently and ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. dually stop the vehicle. most people underestimate the effects of 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers alcohol. WARNING and either contact a roadside emer- Remember, drinking and driving don’t gency service to change the tire or see mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over- The following actions can increase “Changing a flat tire (for models with the-counter, prescription, and illegal the chance of losing control of the spare tire)” (P.6-4) of this Owner’s drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to oper- vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire Manual. ate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, air pressure. Losing control of the DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND drugs, or some other physical condition. vehicle may cause a collision and DRIVING result in personal injury. . The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat WARNING tire. . Never drive under the influence of Do not rapidly apply the brakes. alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the . Do not rapidly release the accel- bloodstream reduces coordination, erator pedal. delays reaction time and impairs . Do not rapidly turn the steering judgement. Driving after drinking wheel. alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alco- 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering hol can increase the severity of the wheel with both hands and try to hold injury. a straight course. Starting and driving 5-7 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

start the engine. WARNING . The cargo/trunk room area is not included in the operating range but Do not operate the push-button the Intelligent Key may function. ignition switch while driving the ve- . If the Intelligent Key is placed on the hicle except in an emergency. (The instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, engine will stop when the ignition inside the glove box or door pocket, switch is pushed 3 consecutive times the Intelligent Key may not function. or the ignition switch is pushed and . If the Intelligent Key is placed near the held for more than 2 seconds.) If the door or window outside the vehicle, engine stops while the vehicle is the Intelligent Key may function. being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

SSD0825 Before operating the push-button ignition switch, be sure to move the shift OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE lever to the P (Park) position (for auto- START FUNCTION matic transmission model) or the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (for The Intelligent Key can only be used for manual transmission model). starting the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range . When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly. If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelli- gent Key, to push the ignition switch to 5-8 Starting and driving . Open or close any door to return to PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH LOCK during the OFF position. POSITIONS If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition LOCK (Normal parking position) switch cannot be turned from the LOCK The ignition switch can only be locked in position. this position. Some indicators and warnings for opera- The ignition switch will be unlocked when tion are displayed on the vehicle informa- it is pushed to the ACC position while tion display. (See “Vehicle information carrying the Intelligent Key or with the display” (P.2-19).) Intelligent Key inserted in the port. Automatic transmission models ACC (Accessories) The ignition lock is designed so that the This position activates electrical acces- ignition switch position cannot be sories such as the radio, when the engine SSD1021 switched to LOCK until the shift lever is is not running. moved to the P (Park) position. PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ON (Normal operating position) OPERATION When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the LOCK position, pro- This position turns on the ignition system When the ignition switch is pushed with- ceed as follows: and electrical accessories. out depressing the brake pedal (automatic transmission model) or the clutch 1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) OFF position. pedal (manual transmission model), the The engine can be turned off in this ignition switch position will change as 2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. follows: position. The ignition switch position indicator will not illuminate. Automatic transmission models: The igni- . Push center once to change to ACC. tion lock is designed so that the ignition . Push center two times to change to 3. Open the door. The ignition switch will switch cannot be switched to the LOCK ON. change to the LOCK position. position until the shift lever is moved to . Push center three times to change to The shift lever can be moved from the P the P (Park) position. OFF. (No position illuminates.) (Park) position if the ignition switch is in . Push center four times to return to the ON position and the brake pedal is ACC. depressed.

Starting and driving 5-9 EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF position and pull the Intelligent Key out of To shut off the engine in an emergency the port. situation while driving perform the follow- NOTE: ing procedure: The Intelligent Key port does not charge . Rapidly push the push-button ignition the Intelligent Key battery. If you see switch 3 consecutive times in less the low battery indicator in the vehicle than 1.5 seconds, or information display, replace the battery . Push and hold the push-button igni- as soon as possible. (See “Intelligent tion switch for more than 2 seconds. Key battery replacement” (P.8-20).)

CAUTION CAUTION . Never place anything except the Do not leave the vehicle with the SSD0826 Intelligent Key in the Intelligent push-button ignition switch in ACC or Key port. Doing so may cause ON positions when the engine is not INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS- damage to the equipment. running for an extended period. This CHARGE . can discharge the battery. Make sure the Intelligent Key is in If the battery of the Intelligent Key is the correct direction when insert- almost discharged, the guide light of ing it to the Intelligent Key port. the Intelligent Key port blinks and the The engine may not start if it is in indicator appears on the vehicle informa- the incorrect direction. tion display. (See “Vehicle information . Remove the Intelligent Key from display” (P.2-19).) the Intelligent Key port after the In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key ignition switch is pushed to the into the port allows you to start the OFF position. engine. Make sure that the key ring side faces backward as illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port until it is latched and secured. To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push the ignition switch to the OFF 5-10 Starting and driving BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

. Make sure the area around the vehicle 1. Apply the parking brake. the floor) and while holding, crank is clear. 2. Automatic Transmission (AT) model: the engine. Release the accelerator . Check fluid levels such as engine oil, pedal when the engine starts. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N coolant, brake fluid and window . (Neutral) position. (P is recommended.) If the engine is very hard to start washer fluid as frequently as possible, because it is flooded, depress the or at least whenever you refuel. The starter is designed not to operate accelerator pedal all the way to the . Check that all windows and lights are unless the shift lever is in either of the floor and hold it. Push the ignition clean. above positions. switch to the ON position to start . Visually inspect tires for their appear- Manual Transmission (MT) model: cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 ance and condition. Also check tires Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) seconds, stop cranking by pushing for proper inflation. position. Depress the clutch pedal fully the ignition switch to OFF. After . Lock all doors. to the floor. cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine . Position seat and adjust head re- The starter is designed not to operate with your foot off the accelerator straints. unless the clutch pedal is fully de- . pedal by depressing the brake Adjust inside and outside mirrors. pressed. pedal and pushing the push-button . Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- The Intelligent Key must be carried ignition switch to start the engine. gers to do likewise. when operating the ignition switch. If the engine starts, but fails to run, . Check the operation of warning lights 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON repeat the above procedure. when the ignition switch is pushed to position. Depress the brake pedal (AT the ON position. (See “Warning lights, model) or the clutch pedal (MT model) indicator lights and audible remin- and push the ignition switch to start CAUTION ders” (P.2-10).) the engine. Do not operate the starter for more To start the engine immediately, push than 15 seconds at a time. If the and release the ignition switch while engine does not start, push the depressing the brake pedal or the ignition switch to OFF and wait 10 clutch pedal with the ignition switch seconds before cranking again, in any position. . otherwise the starter could be da- If the engine is very hard to start in maged. extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to

Starting and driving 5-11 DRIVING THE VEHICLE

4. Warm-up 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION or only driven short distances. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 7 speed automatic transmission seconds after starting. Do not race the In these cases, the battery may need to The automatic transmission in your vehi- engine while warming it up. Drive at be charged to maintain battery health. moderate speed for a short distance cle is electronically controlled by a trans- first, especially in cold weather. In cold mission control module to produce weather, keep the engine running for maximum efficiency and smooth opera- a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before tion. shutting it off. Starting and stopping Shown on the following pages are the the engine over a short period of time recommended operating procedures for may make the vehicle more difficult to this transmission. Follow these proce- start. dures for maximum vehicle performance When racing the engine up to 4,500 and driving enjoyment. rpm or more under no load condition, Starting the vehicle the engine will enter the fuel cut mode. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the shift lever 5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever button before shifting the shift lever to to the P (Park) position (AT model) or the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) Manual shift mode position. Be sure the position (MT model), and push the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting ignition switch to the OFF position. to shift the shift lever. NOTE: This automatic transmission model is Care should be taken to avoid situations designed so that the foot brake pedal that can lead to potential battery dis- must be depressed before shifting from charge and potential no-start condi- P (Park) to any drive position while the tions such as: ignition switch position is ON. 1. Installation or extended use of elec- The shift lever cannot be moved out of tronic accessories that consume the P (Park) position and into any of the battery power when the engine is other gear positions if the ignition not running (Phone chargers, GPS, switch is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or DVD players, etc.) ACC position. 5-12 Starting and driving 1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed loss of control. and push the shift lever button to shift into a driving gear. 2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle CAUTION in motion. . Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position WARNING while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) . Do not depress the accelerator position may cause serious da- pedal while shifting from P (Park) mage to the transmission. or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) D . To avoid possible damage to your (Drive), or manual shift mode. Al- vehicle; when stopping the vehi- ways depress the brake pedal cle on an uphill grade, do not hold SSD0827 until shifting is completed. Failure the vehicle by depressing the Shift lever to do so could cause you to lose accelerator pedal. The foot brake To move the shift lever, control and have an accident. should be used for this purpose. . : Push the button while depressing the Cold engine idle speed is high, so brake pedal. use caution when shifting into a : Push the button. forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. : Just move the shift lever. . Never shift to either the P (Park) Shifting or R (Reverse) position while the After starting the engine, fully depress the vehicle is moving forward and P brake pedal and shift the shift lever from (Park) or D (Drive) position while P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D the vehicle is reversing. This could (Drive) or Manual shift mode position. cause an accident or damage the transmission. Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R (Reverse). All other positions can be . Do not downshift abruptly on selected without pushing the button. slippery roads. This may cause a

Starting and driving 5-13 WARNING CAUTION

Apply the parking brake if the shift Use this position only when the lever is in any position while the vehicle is completely stopped. engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result R (Reverse): in serious personal injury or property Use this position to back up. Always be damage. sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pushed in to move CAUTION the shift lever from the P (Park) position, the N (Neutral) position or any SSD0828 Make sure the vehicle is completely drive position to the R (Reverse) posi- Paddle shifter (if so equipped) tion. stopped and the transmission is in Manual shift mode the P (Park) position. N (Neutral): When the shift lever is in the manual shift Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- gate, the transmission is ready for the P (Park) position: gaged. The engine can be started in this manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be Use this position when the vehicle is position. You may shift to the N (Neutral) selected manually by moving the shift parked or when starting the engine. Make position and restart a stalled engine while lever up or down, or pulling the right-side sure the vehicle is completely stopped. the vehicle is moving. or left-side paddle shifter (if so equipped). The brake pedal must be depressed and D (Drive): When shifting up, move the shift lever to the shift lever button pushed in to move the + (up) side or pull the right-side paddle the shift lever from the N (Neutral) Use this position for all normal forward driving. shifter (if so equipped) (+) . The trans- position or any drive position to the P mission shifts to the higher range. (Park) position. Apply the parking brake. When shifting down, move the shift lever When parking on a hill, apply the parking to the − (down) side or pull the left-side brake first, then move the shift lever to paddle shifter (if so equipped) (−) . The the P (Park) position. transmission shifts to the lower range.

5-14 Starting and driving When canceling the manual shift mode, 4M (4th), 3M (3rd) and 2M (2nd): to a stop. When accelerating again, it return the shift lever to the D (Drive) Use these positions for hill climbing or is necessary to shift up to the position. The transmission returns to the engine braking on downhill grades. desired range. normal driving mode. M When you pull the paddle shifter (if so 1 (1st): equipped) while in the D (Drive) position, Use this position when climbing steep the transmission will shift to the upper or hills slowly or driving slowly through deep lower range temporarily. The transmis- snow, or for maximum engine braking on sion will automatically return to the D steep downhill grades. (Drive) position after a short period of . Remember not to drive at high speeds time. If you want to return to the D (Drive) for extended periods of time in lower position manually, pull and hold the than 7th gear. This reduces fuel econ- paddle shifter (if so equipped) for about omy. 1.5 seconds. . Moving the shift lever rapidly to the In the manual shift mode, the shift range same side twice will shift the ranges in is displayed on the transmission position succession. indicator in the meter. . In the manual shift mode, the trans- Shift ranges up or down one by one as mission may not shift to the se- follows: lected gear or may automatically shift to the other gear. This helps M ? M ? M ? M ? M ? M ? M 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle da- 7M (7th): mage or loss of control. . Use this position for all normal forward When the transmission does not driving at highway speeds. shift to the selected gear, the Auto- matic Transmission (AT) position in- M M 6 (6th) and 5 (5th): dicator light (on the instrument Use these positions when driving up long panel) will blink and the buzzer will slopes, or for engine braking when driving sound. down long slopes. . In the manual shift mode, the transmission automatically shifts down to 1st gear before the vehicle comes Starting and driving 5-15 There may be a slight difference be- It is recommended you visit a NISSAN tween the timing of the up-shift indica- dealer for this service. tor illumination and the tachometer indication. Accelerator downshift — In D (Drive) position — For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into the lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed. Fail-safe SSD0832 When the fail-safe operation occurs, note that the transmission will be locked in any Upshift indicator: of the forward gears according to the The up-shift indicator is located in the condition. tachometer and shows the driver the If the vehicle is driven under extreme timing to shift into a higher gear by conditions, such as excessive wheel illuminating. The use of the up-shift spinning and subsequent hard braking, indicator will help you to upshift at a the fail-safe system may be activated. constant engine speed from any gear. This will occur even if all electrical The up-shift indicator will start flashing circuits are functioning properly. In this when the engine speed reaches about case, push the ignition switch to the 500 rpm before the set figure while OFF position and wait for 3 seconds. driving, and then illuminate after the Then push the ignition switch back to engine speed reaches the set figure. the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condi- The engine speed for upshifting can be tion. If it does not return to its normal set on the vehicle information display. See operating condition, have the transmis- “Trip computer” (P.2-23). sion checked and repaired, if necessary.

5-16 Starting and driving 4. Push down the shift lock using a suitable tool as illustrated. CAUTION 5. Push the shift lever button and move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) . Do not rest your foot on the position while holding down the clutch pedal while driving. This shift lock. may damage the clutch. Now the vehicle may be moved to the . Fully depress the clutch pedal desired location. before shifting to help prevent If the lever cannot be moved out of P transmission damage. (Park), have the automatic transmission . Stop your vehicle completely be- system checked as soon as possible. It is fore shifting into R (Reverse). recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer . When the vehicle is stopped with for this service. the engine running (for example, SSD0829 MANUAL TRANSMISSION at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with Shift lock release the foot brake applied. If the battery charge is low or discharged, WARNING the shift lever may not be moved from the . P (Park) position even with the brake Do not downshift abruptly on pedal depressed and the shift lever but- slippery roads. This may cause a ton pushed. loss of control. . To move the shift lever, perform the Do not over-rev the engine when following procedure: shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine 1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or damage. LOCK position. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the shift lock cover using a suitable tool.

Starting and driving 5-17 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in . When the clutch pedal is depressed sequence according to the vehicle speed. with the gear still engaged, the engine To back up, depress the shift knob and speed is kept at the proper level for then move the shift lever to the R the engaged gear. Thus, the engine (Reverse) position after stopping the ve- speed may be kept high depending on hicle completely. the gear position and vehicle speed. . When the clutch pedal is depressed The shift knob returns to its original with the transmission in neutral, the position when the shift lever is moved to system operates for approximately 2 the N (Neutral) position. seconds, and then the engine speed If it is difficult to move the shift lever into will decrease to the idle speed. R (Reverse) or 1st (Low gear), shift to N . When the engine coolant temperature (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. is low right after starting the engine, Fully depress the clutch pedal again and engine speed synchronization will be SSD0536 shift into R or 1st. delayed or may be insufficient. SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) . The system controls the engine speed Shifting (if so equipped for Manual Trans- up to the rev limit. Note that S-MODE To change gears, or when upshifting or mission models) is not a function that prevents over- downshifting, fully depress the clutch revving resulting from shifting mis- pedal, shift into an appropriate gear, and The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) takes. then slowly and smoothly release the automatically adjusts the engine speed to . The system does not operate while clutch pedal. match the selecting gear ratio while the vehicle is backing up. changing gears. This vehicle is equipped with a short . If the engine speed is limited lower throw shifter manual transmission. To Precautions: than usual when the engine oil tem- ensure smooth gear changes, be sure to . Shift lever and clutch pedal operations perature is extremely high, the system fully depress the clutch pedal before are not different than a conventional will control up to the limited engine operating the shift lever. If the clutch manual transmission. speed. . pedal is not fully depressed before the . Fully depress the clutch pedal. Insuffi- If the malfunction indicator light illu- transmission is shifted, a gear noise may cient pedal depression may cause minates, the system may not operate be heard. Transmission damage could slow response of this system. and the S-MODE indicator turns off. occur. Start the vehicle in 1st gear and upshift to 5-18 Starting and driving While the S-MODE is off, you can drive the vehicle as a conventional manual transmission model. Note that the status of the S-MODE (on or off) is memorized even after the ignition switch is turned off; however, it will be initialized (off) when the battery is disconnected. The transmission position indicator shows the selected gear: N (Neutral), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, R (Reverse). SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) operation: SSD0830 The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) automatically adjusts the engine speed SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) by controlling the engine throttle. The warning: accelerator pedal does not have to be The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) depressed. warning will appear on the vehicle infor- The system detects the clutch pedal and mation display and the S-MODE indicator shift lever operations, and then calculates will turn off if a system malfunction the target engine speed using the shifting occurs. gear position and the vehicle speed SSD0831 If the warning appears, the S-MODE func- information. tion will not operate, but manual trans- Activating the system: The system provides accurate engine mission will operate normally and driving speed control that helps achieve quick can be continued. Have the system To activate the S-MODE, push the S- MODE switch . The S-MODE indicator gear shifting and reduces shift shock on checked. It is recommended you visit a clutch engagement. NISSAN dealer for this service. on the tachometer will show “S”. To deactivate, push and hold the S-MODE . When downshifting: switch for more than 1 second. The S- The engine speed is automatically MODE indicator will turn off. increased to the target engine speed

Starting and driving 5-19 before the clutch is engaged. There may be a slight difference be- . When upshifting: tween the timing of the up-shift indica- The engine speed is automatically tor illumination and the tachometer kept after the engine speed lowers to indication. the target engine speed. Rapid clutch engagement before the engine speed lowers to the target engine speed may cause shift shock. . When depressing the clutch pedal with the gear engaged: The engine speed is automatically kept at the proper engine speed for the engaged gear. This function will not operate when SSD0832 low (1st) gear is selected. There is a delay between the clutch Upshift indicator pedal operation and the S-MODE operation. Make sure the engine speed is The up-shift indicator is located in the adjusted before engaging the clutch tachometer and shows the driver the again. timing to shift into a higher gear by illuminating. The use of the up-shift indicator will help you to upshift at a constant engine speed from any gear. The up-shift indicator will start flashing when the engine speed reaches about 500 rpm before the set figure while driving, and then illuminate after the engine speed reaches the set figure. The engine speed for upshifting can be set on the vehicle information display. See “Trip computer” (P.2-23).

5-20 Starting and driving PARKING BRAKE

Suggested up-shift speeds Suggested maximum speed in Shown below are suggested vehicle each gear WARNING speeds for shifting into a higher gear. Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is These suggestions relate to fuel economy not running smoothly, or if you need to . Be sure the parking brake is fully and vehicle performance. Actual up-shift accelerate. released before driving. Failure to speeds will vary according to road condi- Do not exceed the maximum suggested do so can cause brake failure and tions, the weather and individual driving speed (shown below) in any gear. For level lead to an accident. habits. road driving, use the highest gear sug- . Do not release the parking brake For normal acceleration in low altitude gested for that speed. Always observe from outside the vehicle. areas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: posted speed limits, and drive according . Do not use the shift lever in place Gear change MPH (km/h) to the road conditions, which will ensure of the parking brake. When park- safe operation. Do not over-rev the en- 1st to 2nd 8 (13) ing, be sure the parking brake is gine when shifting to a lower gear as it 16 (26) fully engaged. 2nd to 3rd may cause engine damage or loss of . To help avoid risk of injury or 3rd to 4th 25 (40) vehicle control. 4th to 5th 28 (45) death through unintended opera- Gear MPH (km/h) tion of the vehicle and/or its 5th to 6th 33 (53) 1st 38 (62) systems, do not leave children, For quick acceleration in low altitude 2nd 63 (102) people who require the assis- areas or in high altitude areas [over 3rd 91 (146) tance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]: — 4th Additionally, the temperature in- MPH (km/h) Gear change 5th — side a closed vehicle on a warm 1st to 2nd 15 (24) 6th — day can quickly become high 2nd to 3rd 25 (40) enough to cause a significant risk 3rd to 4th 40 (64) of injury or death to people and 4th to 5th 45 (72) pets. 5th to 6th 50 (80)

Starting and driving 5-21 CRUISE CONTROL

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON- . in heavy traffic or in traffic that TROL varies in speed . If the cruise control system malfunc- . on winding or hilly roads tions, it will cancel automatically. The . on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, CRUISE indicator light on the meter etc.) panel will then blink to warn the driver. . in very windy areas . If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise Doing so could cause a loss of control system will cancel automati- vehicle control and result in an acci- cally. dent. . If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked. It is CAUTION SPA2110 recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. On manual transmission models, do To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up . The CRUISE indicator light may blink . not shift into N (Neutral) without when the cruise control main switch is depressing the clutch pedal when To release: turned ON while pushing the ACCEL/ the cruise control is set. Should this 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. RES, COAST/SET or CANCEL switch. To occur, depress the clutch pedal and properly set the cruise control system, turn the main switch off immedi- 2. While pulling up on the parking brake perform the following procedures. lever slightly, push the button and ately. Failure to do so may cause lower the lever completely . engine damage. 3. Before driving, be sure the brake WARNING warning light goes out. Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: . when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed

5-22 Starting and driving 1. ACCEL/RES switch . Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE 2. COAST/SET switch light will turn off. 3. CANCEL switch — If you depress the brake pedal while 4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/ CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS SET switch and reset at the cruising speed, the cruise control will disen- The cruise control allows driving at a gage. Turn the MAIN switch off speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 once and then turn it on again. km/h) without keeping your foot on the — The cruise control will automati- accelerator pedal. cally cancel if the vehicle slows To turn on the cruise control, push the more than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below MAIN switch on. The CRUISE indicator the set speed. light will illuminate. — If you move the shift lever to the N To set cruising speed, accelerate the (Neutral) position (Automatic SSD0833 vehicle to the desired speed, push the Transmission models) or depress Type A (if so equipped) COAST/SET switch and release it. Take the clutch pedal (Manual Transmis- your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your sion models), the cruise control will vehicle will maintain the set speed. be canceled. . To pass another vehicle, depress the To reset at a faster cruising speed, use accelerator pedal. When you release one of the following methods: the pedal, the vehicle will return to the . Depress the accelerator pedal. When previously set speed. the vehicle attains the desired speed, . The vehicle may not maintain the set push and release the COAST/SET speed on winding or hilly roads. If this switch. happens, drive without the cruise . Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. control. When the vehicle attains the desired To cancel the preset speed, use one of speed, release the switch. the following methods: . Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/ . Push the CANCEL switch. RES switch. Each time you do this, the . Tap the brake pedal. set speed will increase by about 1 MPH JVS0449X (1.6 km/h). Type B (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-23 BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient one of the following methods: CAUTION Driving Tips to help you achieve the most . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the fuel economy from your vehicle. vehicle attains the desired speed, During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 1. Use smooth accelerator and brake push the COAST/SET switch and re- pedal application. km), follow these recommendations . lease it. to obtain maximum engine perfor- Avoid rapid starts and stops. . . Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. mance and ensure the future relia- Use smooth, gentle accelerator and Release the switch when the vehicle bility and economy of your new brake application whenever possi- slows down to the desired speed. vehicle. ble. . . Maintain constant speed while Push, then quickly release the COAST/ Failure to follow these recommenda- commuting and coast whenever SETT switch. Each time you do this, tions may result in shortened engine possible. the set speed will decrease by about 1 life and reduced engine perfor- MPH (1.6 km/h). mance. 2. Maintain constant speed. To resume the preset speed, push and . Look ahead to try and anticipate release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehi- . Avoid driving for long periods at con- and minimize stops. cle will resume the last set cruising speed . stant speed, either fast or slow. Do not Synchronizing your speed with traf- when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH fic lights allows you to reduce your (40 km/h). run the engine over 4,000 rpm. . number of stops. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any . gear. Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and im- . Avoid quick starts. prove fuel efficiency. . Avoid hard braking as much as possible. 3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher vehicle speeds. . Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load. . Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.

5-24 Starting and driving INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

. Recirculating the cool air in the 7. Avoid idling. . Keep your engine tuned up. cabin when the A/C is on reduces . Shutting off your engine when safe . Follow the recommended scheduled cooling load. for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds maintenance. 4. Drive at economical speeds and dis- saves fuel and reduces emissions. . Keep the tires inflated to the correct tances. 8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads. pressure. Low tire pressure increases . Observing the speed limit and not . Automated passes permit drivers to tire wear and lowers fuel economy. exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) use special lanes to maintain cruis- . Keep the wheels in correct alignment. (where legally allowed) can improve ing speed through the toll and Improper alignment increases tire fuel efficiency due to reduced aero- avoid stopping and starting. wear and lowers fuel economy. dynamic drag. . 9. Winter warm up. Use the recommended viscosity en- . Maintaining a safe following dis- gine oil. (See “Engine oil and oil filter . Limit idling time to minimize impact tance behind other vehicles re- recommendation” (P.10-7).) duces unnecessary braking. to fuel economy. . . Safely monitoring traffic to antici- Vehicles typically need no more pate changes in speed permits than 30 seconds of idling at start- reduced braking and smooth accel- up to effectively circulate the en- eration changes. gine oil before driving. . . Select a gear range suitable to road Your vehicle will reach its ideal conditions. operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling. 5. Use cruise control. . 10. Keeping your vehicle cool. Using cruise control during highway . driving helps maintain a steady Park your vehicle in a covered speed. parking area or in the shade when- . ever possible. Cruise control is particularly effec- . tive in providing fuel savings when When entering a hot vehicle, open- driving on flat terrains. ing the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, re- 6. Plan for the shortest route. sulting in reduced demand on your . Utilize a map or navigation system A/C system. to determine the best route to save time.

Starting and driving 5-25 PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

placed into P (Park) for Automatic Transmission (AT) model or in an appropriate gear for Manual Transmission (MT) model. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. . Make sure the automatic transmission shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake. SD1006MA 2. Automatic transmission models: Move the shift lever to the P (Park) . To help avoid risk of injury or position. WARNING death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its Manual transmission models: . Do not stop or park the vehicle systems, do not leave children, Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) over flammable materials such as people who require the assis- gear. When parking on an uphill grade, dry grass, waste paper or rags. tance of others or pets unat- place the shift lever in the 1st gear. They may ignite and cause a fire. tended in your vehicle. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from roll- . Never leave the engine running Additionally, the temperature in- ing into the street when parked on a while the vehicle is unattended. side a closed vehicle on a warm sloping drive way, it is a good practice . day can quickly become high to turn the wheels as illustrated. Do not leave children unattended enough to cause a significant risk . HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: inside the vehicle. They could of injury or death to people and unknowingly activate switches pets. Turn the wheels into the curb and or controls. Unattended children . move the vehicle forward until the could become involved in serious Safe parking procedures require curb side wheel gently touches the accidents. that both the parking brake be curb. applied and the transmission 5-26 Starting and driving POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

. HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: BRAKING PRECAUTIONS Turn the wheels away from the WARNING The brake system has two separate curb and move the vehicle back hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc- until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. If the engine is not running or is tions, you will still have braking at two wheels. . HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO turned off while driving, the power CURB: assist for the steering will not work. Vacuum assisted brakes Steering will be harder to operate. Turn the wheels toward the side of The brake booster aids braking by using the road so the vehicle will move engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you The power assisted steering uses a hy- away from the center of the road if can stop the vehicle by depressing the draulic pump, driven by the engine, to it moves. brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- assist steering. 4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF sure on the brake pedal will be required to position. If the engine stops or the drive belt stop the vehicle and the stopping dis- breaks, you will still have control of the tance will be longer. vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns Wet brakes and at low speeds. When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Starting and driving 5-27 BRAKE ASSIST

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN could cause the wheels to skid BRAKE ASSIST Break in the parking brake shoes when- and result in an accident. When the force applied to the brake pedal ever the stopping effect of the parking . If the engine is not running or is exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is brake is weakened or whenever the turned off while driving, the activated generating greater braking parking brake shoes and/or drums/ro- power assist for the brakes will force than a conventional brake booster tors are replaced, in order to assure the not work. Braking will be harder. even with light pedal force. best braking performance. This procedure is described in the vehicle WARNING service manual. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The Brake Assist is only an aid to Using the brakes assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance de- Avoid resting your foot on the brake vice. It is the driver’s responsibility to pedal while driving. This will cause over- stay alert, drive safely and be in heating of the brakes, wearing out the control of the vehicle at all times. brake and pads faster and reduce gas mileage. To help save the brakes and to prevent ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. WARNING Overheated brakes may reduce braking . The Anti-lock Braking System performance and could result in loss of (ABS) is a sophisticated device, vehicle control. but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dan- WARNING gerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control dur- . While driving on a slippery sur- ing braking on slippery surfaces. face, be careful when braking, Remember that stopping dis- accelerating or downshifting. tances on slippery surfaces will Abrupt braking or accelerating be longer than on normal sur- 5-28 Starting and driving faces even with ABS. Stopping venting each wheel from locking, the tion, it switches the ABS off and distances may also be longer on system helps the driver maintain steering illuminates the ABS warning light on the rough, gravel or snow covered control and helps to minimize swerving instrument panel. The brake system then roads, or if you are using tire and spinning on slippery surfaces. operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. chains. Always maintain a safe Using the system distance from the vehicle in front If the ABS warning light illuminates during of you. Ultimately, the driver is Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. the self-test or while driving, have the responsible for safety. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady vehicle checked. It is recommended you . pressure, but do not pump the brakes. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Tire type and condition may also The ABS will operate to prevent the affect braking effectiveness. wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle Normal operation — When replacing tires, install to avoid obstacles. The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 the specified size of tires on MPH (5 to 10 km/h). all four wheels. WARNING When the ABS senses that one or more — When installing a spare tire, wheels are close to locking up, the make sure that it is the proper Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing actuator rapidly applies and releases size and type as specified on so may result in increased stopping hydraulic pressure. This action is similar the Tire and Loading Informa- distances. to pumping the brakes very quickly. You tion label. See “Tire and Load- may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal ing Information label” (P.10- and hear a noise from under the hood or 14) of this manual. Self-test feature feel a vibration from the actuator when it — For detailed information, see The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec- is operating. This is normal and indicates “Wheels and tires” (P.8-26) of tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a that the ABS is operating properly. How- this manual. computer. The computer has a built-in ever, the pulsation may indicate that road diagnostic feature that tests the system conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con- each time you start the engine and move trols the brakes so the wheels do not lock the vehicle at a low speed in forward or during hard braking or when braking on reverse. When the self-test occurs, you slippery surfaces. The system detects the may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a rotation speed at each wheel and varies pulsation in the brake pedal. This is the brake fluid pressure to prevent each normal and does not indicate a malfunc- wheel from locking and sliding. By pre- tion. If the computer senses a malfunc- Starting and driving 5-29 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- . The road may be slippery or the ing light” (P.2-15) and “Vehicle Dynamic tem uses various sensors to monitor system may determine some action Control (VDC) off indicator light” (P.2-18). driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under is required to help keep the vehicle on The computer has a built-in diagnostic certain driving conditions, the VDC sys- the steered path. feature that tests the system each time tem helps to perform the following func- . You may feel a pulsation in the brake you start the engine and move the vehicle tions. pedal and hear a noise or vibration forward or in reverse at a slow speed. . Controls brake pressure to reduce from under the hood. This is normal When the self-test occurs, you may hear a wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel and indicates that the VDC system is “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the so power is transferred to a non working properly. brake pedal. This is normal and is not an slipping drive wheel on the same axle. . Adjust your speed and driving to the indication of a malfunction. . Controls brake pressure and engine road conditions. output to reduce drive wheel slip See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn- based on vehicle speed (traction con- ing light” (P.2-15). WARNING trol function). If a malfunction occurs in the system, the . . The VDC system is designed to Controls brake pressure at individual VDC warning light illuminates in the help the driver maintain stability wheels and engine output to help the instrument panel. The VDC system auto- but does not prevent accidents driver maintain control of the vehicle matically turns off. in the following conditions: due to abrupt steering operation The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the — understeer (vehicle tends to not at high speeds or by careless or VDC system. The VDC off indicator light dangerous driving techniques. follow the steered path despite illuminates to indicate the VDC sys- increased steering input) Reduce vehicle speed and be tem is off. When the VDC switch is used to especially careful when driving — oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due turn off the system, the VDC system still and cornering on slippery sur- to certain road or driving condi- operates to prevent one drive wheel from faces and always drive carefully. tions). slipping by transferring power to a non . Do not modify the vehicle’s sus- The VDC system can help the driver to slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning pension. If suspension parts such maintain control of the vehicle, but it light flashes if this occurs. All other as shock absorbers, struts, cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in VDC functions are off, and the VDC springs, stabilizer bars, bushings all driving situations. warning light will not flash. The VDC and wheels are not NISSAN re- system is automatically reset to on when When the VDC system operates, the VDC commended for your vehicle or the ignition switch is placed in the off warning light in the instrument panel are extremely deteriorated, the position then back to the on position. flashes so note the following: VDC system may not operate See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn- 5-30 Starting and driving properly. This could adversely used, the VDC system may not affect vehicle handling perfor- operate properly and the VDC mance, and the VDC warning light warning light may illuminate. may illuminate. . The VDC system is not a substi- . If brake related parts such as tute for winter tires or tire chains brake pads, rotors and calipers on a snow covered road. are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate. . If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC warning light may illuminate. . When driving on extremely in- clined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads. . When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the VDC warning light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface. . If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are Starting and driving 5-31 PERFORMANCE DAMPERS (NISMO models)

1. Front performance damper 2. Rear performance damper The performance dampers are installed in the front and rear parts of the NISMO models for improved handling and ride.

WARNING

. High-pressure nitrogen gas is sealed inside the performance dampers. Do not attempt to modify or disassemble them. . For disposal of the performance dampers or when scrapping the vehicle, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Never burn or puncture the performance dampers. Incor- rect disposal procedures could cause serious personal injury.

JVS0446X

5-32 Starting and driving COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK TIRE EQUIPMENT SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT To prevent a door lock from freezing, SUMMER tires have a tread designed to It is recommended that the following apply deicer through the key hole. If the provide superior performance on dry items be carried in the vehicle during lock becomes frozen, heat the key before pavement. However, the performance of winter: inserting it into the key hole or use the these tires will be substantially reduced in . A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to Intelligent Key system. snowy and icy conditions. If you operate remove ice and snow from the win- ANTIFREEZE your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, dows and wiper blades. NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & . A sturdy, flat board to be placed under In the winter when it is anticipated that SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four the outside temperature will drop below the jack to give it firm support. wheels. It is recommended you consult a . 32°F (0°C), check antifreeze to assure NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed A shovel to dig the vehicle out of proper winter protection. For additional rating and availability information. snowdrifts. information, see “Engine cooling system” . Extra window washer fluid to refill the For additional traction on icy roads, (P.8-4). reservoir tank. studded tires may be used. However, BATTERY some U.S. states and Canadian provinces DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE If the battery is not fully charged during prohibit their use. Check local, state and extremely cold weather conditions, the provincial laws before installing studded battery fluid may freeze and damage the tires. WARNING battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, Skid and traction capabilities of . the battery should be checked regularly. Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing studded snow tires, on wet or dry rain), very cold snow or ice can be For additional information, see “Battery” surfaces, may be poorer than that of (P.8-11). slick and very hard to drive on. non-studded snow tires. The vehicle will have much less DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER Tire chains may be used. For details, see traction or “grip” under these If the vehicle is to be left outside without “Tire chains” (P.8-33) of this manual. conditions. Try to avoid driving antifreeze, drain the cooling system, in- on wet ice until the road is salted cluding the engine block. Refill before or sanded. operating the vehicle. For details, see . Whatever the condition, drive “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4). with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more trac-

Starting and driving 5-33 tion. To use the engine block heater . Disconnect and properly store the . Allow more stopping distance 1. Turn the engine off. engine block heater cord before under these conditions. Braking 2. Open the hood and unwrap the en- starting the engine. Damage to should be started sooner than on gine block heater cord. the cord could result in an elec- dry pavement. trical shock and can cause ser- 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into ious injury. . Allow greater following distances a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten- . on slippery roads. sion cord. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3- . pronged extension cord rated Watch for slippery spots (glare 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground for at least 10A. Plug the exten- ice). These may appear on an Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, sion cord into a Ground Fault otherwise clear road in shaded grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet. Interrupt (GFI) protected, areas. If a patch of ice is seen 5. The engine block heater must be grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure ahead, brake before reaching it. plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, to use the proper extension cord Try not to brake while on the ice, depending on outside temperatures, or a grounded outlet can result in and avoid any sudden steering to properly warm the engine coolant. a fire or electrical shock and maneuvers. Use an appropriate timer to turn the cause serious personal injury. . Do not use the cruise control on engine block heater on. slippery roads. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and . Snow can trap dangerous ex- properly store the cord to keep it haust gases under your vehicle. away from moving parts. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle. WARNING

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so . Do not use your engine block equipped) heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged Engine block heaters are used to assist adapter. You can be seriously with cold temperature starting. injured by an electrical shock if The engine block heater should be used you use an ungrounded connec- when the outside temperature is 20°F tion. (−7°C) or lower. 5-34 Starting and driving ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION/ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT (if so equipped)

. Do not change or modify speakers including the woofer and any audio related parts such as the amplifier. . Do not make any modification including sound deadening or modifications around the microphones, speakers or woofer. ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION The active noise cancellation uses microphones located inside the vehicle to detect engine booming noises. The system then automatically produces a muted engine booming noise through the speakers and woofer to reduce engine booming noise. If the microphone or the area around it is tapped, abnormal noise may be output from the speaker. ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT The active sound enhancement gener- ates sounds according to engine speed and driving modes through the speakers JVS0583X and woofer to enhance the quality of the engine sound. Microphones NOTE: Speakers To operate the active noise cancellation Woofer (on the spare tire) and active sound enhancement properly: . Do not cover the speakers or woofer. . Do not cover the microphones.

Starting and driving 5-35 MEMO

5-36 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats ...... 6-17 Roadside assistance program ...... 6-2 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-19 Emergency engine shut off ...... 6-3 Towing Automatic Transmission Flat tire ...... 6-3 recommended by NISSAN (except for Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 6-3 NISMO models) ...... 6-20 Changing a flat tire (for models with Towing Manual Transmission recommended spare tire) ...... 6-4 by NISSAN (except for NISMO models) ...... 6-21 Repairing flat tire (for models with Towing recommended by NISSAN emergency tire puncture repair kit) ...... 6-9 (NISMO models) ...... 6-22 Jump starting ...... 6-15 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)...... 6-22 Push starting ...... 6-17 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

In the event of a roadside emergency, . Turn signals do not work when Roadside Assistance Service is available the hazard warning flasher lights to you. Please refer to your Warranty are on. Information Booklet for details. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch in any position. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

SIC2574 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING

. If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. . Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circum- stances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. 6-2 In case of emergency EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

To shut off the engine in an emergency TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS- failure. Serious vehicle damage situation while driving, perform the fol- TEM (TPMS) could occur and may lead to an lowing procedure: This vehicle is equipped with the Tire accident and could result in ser- . Rapidly push the push-button ignition Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It ious personal injury. Check the switch 3 consecutive times in less monitors tire pressure of all tires except tire pressure for all four tires. than 1.5 seconds, or the spare. When the low tire pressure Adjust the tire pressure to the . Push and hold the push-button igni- warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE recommended COLD tire pressure tion switch for more than 2 seconds. PRESSURE warning appears on the vehi- shown on the Tire and Loading cle information display, one or more of Information label to turn the low your tires is significantly under-inflated. If tire pressure warning light OFF. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire the light still illuminates while pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn driving after adjusting the tire you of it by the low tire pressure warning pressure, a tire may be flat or light. This system will activate only when the TPMS may be malfunctioning. the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 If you have a flat tire, replace it MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see with a spare tire (if so equipped) “Warning lights, indicator lights and audi- or repair it with the tire puncture ble reminders” (P.2-10) and “Tire Pressure repair kit (if so equipped) as soon Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3). as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, it is recommended you consult a WARNING NISSAN dealer. . Since the spare tire is not . If the low tire pressure warning equipped with the TPMS, when a light illuminates while driving, spare tire is mounted or a wheel avoid sudden steering maneu- is replaced, the TPMS will not vers or abrupt braking, reduce function and the low tire pressure vehicle speed, pull off the road warning light will flash for ap- to a safe location and stop the proximately 1 minute. The light vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- will remain on after 1 minute. ing with under-inflated tires may Have your tires replaced and/or permanently damage the tires TPMS system reset as soon as and increase the likelihood of tire In case of emergency 6-3 possible. It is recommended you CHANGING A FLAT TIRE (for models mission into P (Park). visit a NISSAN dealer for these with spare tire) . Never change tires when the ve- services. If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc- hicle is on a slope, ice or slippery . Replacing tires with those not tions below. areas. This is hazardous. originally specified by NISSAN . Stopping the vehicle Never change tires if oncoming could affect the proper operation traffic is close to your vehicle. of the TPMS. 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road Wait for professional road assis- . NISSAN recommends using only and away from traffic. tance. Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. Sealant provided with your vehi- 3. Park on a level surface and apply the cle. Other tire sealants may da- parking brake. Move the shift lever to mage the valve stem seal which the P (Park) position (Automatic trans- can cause the tire to lose air mission models). Move the shift lever pressure. It is recommended you to the R (Reverse) gear (Manual trans- visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as mission models). possible after using tire repair sealant (for models equipped 4. Turn off the engine. with the emergency tire puncture 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, repair kit). and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R (Reverse), or the automatic trans- 6-4 In case of emergency Getting the spare tire and tools Remove jacking tools located under the cargo room/trunk as illustrated. For Coupe models, unfasten the belts and lift the jack up to remove. Models without subwoofer: Remove the spacer , and turn the retainer counterclockwise, then remove the spare tire. Models with subwoofer: Remove the spare tire cover . Turn the retainer counterclockwise, remove the MCE0001A SCE0844 subwoofer and place it on the side of Without subwoofer the cargo room (with the flat surface Blocking wheels facing down), then carefully remove the Place suitable blocks at both the front spare tire. and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

SCE0807 With subwoofer

In case of emergency 6-5 Jacking up the vehicle and remov- . Do not allow passengers to stay ing the damaged tire in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

WARNING Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the follow- . Never get under the vehicle while ing instructions. it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. . Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. SCE0790 The jack is designed for lifting Jack-up point only your vehicle during a tire 1. Place the jack directly under the jack- change. up point as illustrated so the top of . Use the correct jack-up points. the jack contacts the vehicle at the Never use any other part of the jack-up point. Align the jack head vehicle for jack support. between the two notches in the front . or the rear as shown. Also fit the Never jack up the vehicle more groove of the jack head between the than necessary. notches as shown. . Never use blocks on or under the The jack should be used on level firm jack. ground. . Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.

6-6 In case of emergency SCE0504 SCE0661

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two Installing the spare tire turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not The T-type spare tire is designed for remove the wheel nuts until the tire emergency use. (See specific instruc- is off the ground. tions under the heading “Wheels and tires” (P.8-26).) 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the sur- shown above. Carefully raise the ve- face between the wheel and hub. hicle until the tire clears the ground. 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and Remove the wheel nuts, and then tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. remove the tire. Check that all the wheel nuts contact the wheel surface horizontally. Models equipped with different sized tires in the front and rear: When replacing a front tire, make sure that the hole in the spare tire wheel is

In case of emergency 6-7 aligned with the pin on the brake Wheel nut tightening torque: rotor. 80 ft-lb (108 N·m) 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten The wheel nuts must be kept tigh- wheel nuts alternately and evenly in tened to specification at all times. It the sequence illustrated ( , , , , ) is recommended that wheel nuts be until they are tight. tightened to specifications at each 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire lubrication interval. touches the ground. Then, with the . Adjust tire pressure to the COLD wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel pressure. nuts securely in the sequence as COLD pressure: illustrated. Lower the vehicle comple- After the vehicle has been parked for tely. three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). WARNING COLD tire pressures are shown on SCE0845 the Tire and Loading Information . Incorrect wheel nuts or impro- label affixed to the driver side center Roadster models: perly tightened wheel nuts can pillar. Securely store the jacking tools in the storage area. cause the wheel to become loose Stowing the damaged tire and or come off. This could cause an tools Place the spare tire cover and trunk room accident. carpet back in the trunk, and then close . Do not use oil or grease on the Coupe models: the trunk lid. wheel studs or nuts. This could 1. Securely store the damaged tire and Securely store the damaged tire accord- cause the nuts to become loose. jacking tools in the storage area. ing to the following procedure as illu- . Retighten the wheel nuts when 2. Place the spare tire cover and the strated. the vehicle has been driven for cargo room carpet over the damaged 1. Put the damaged tire in the plastic 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in tire. bag stored in the trunk. cases of a flat tire, etc.). 3. Close the rear hatch. 2. Move the passenger seat forward, and then place the damaged tire . As soon as possible, tighten the wrapped in the plastic bag behind wheel nuts to the specified torque the seat. with a torque wrench. 6-8 In case of emergency 3. Move the passenger seat backward to vehicle to inspect, and repair or If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc- secure the damaged tire. replace the tire. It is recom- tions below. mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The Emergency WARNING Tire Sealant cannot permanently CAUTION . seal a punctured tire. Continuing . Always make sure that the spare operation of the vehicle without a To avoid the emergency tire tire and jacking equipment are permanent tire repair can lead to puncture repair kit being da- properly secured after use. Such a crash. maged during storage or use: items can become dangerous . — Only use the emergency tire projectiles in an accident or sud- NISSAN recommends using only Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire puncture repair kit on your den stop. vehicle. Do not use it on other . Sealant provided with your vehi- The spare tire is designed for cle. Other tire sealants may da- vehicles. emergency use. See specific in- mage the valve stem seal which — Only use the kit to inflate the structions under the heading can cause the tire to lose air tires of your vehicle and to “Wheels and tires” (P.8-26). pressure. It is recommended you check the vehicle’s tire pres- visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as sure. REPAIRING FLAT TIRE (for models possible after using tire repair with emergency tire puncture re- sealant. — Only plug the compressor into a 12V DC car power point. pair kit) This vehicle does not have a spare tire. — Keep the kit free of water and The emergency tire puncture repair kit dirt. WARNING (Emergency Tire Sealant) is supplied with — Do not disassemble or modify the vehicle instead of a spare tire. It can the kit. . After using Emergency Tire Sea- be used to temporarily repair minor tire lant to repair a minor tire punc- punctures. — Do not drop the kit or allow hard impacts to the kit. ture, do not drive the vehicle at If possible, have the vehicle towed to a speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 facility that can repair or replace the flat . Do not use the emergency tire km/h). tire. Using the emergency tire puncture puncture repair kit under the . Immediately after using the repair kit may cause a malfunction of the following conditions. It is recom- Emergency Tire Sealant to repair tire pressure sensor and cause the low mended you visit a NISSAN dealer a minor tire puncture, take your tire pressure warning light to illuminate. or professional road assistance. In case of emergency 6-9 — when the sealant has passed position. its expiration date (shown on Manual Transmission models: the label attached to the bot- Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) tle) position. — when the cut or the puncture 5. Turn off the engine. is approximately 0.25 in (6 6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic mm) or longer and to signal professional road assis- — when the tire sidewall is da- tance personnel that you need assis- maged tance. — when the vehicle has been 7. Have all passengers get out of the driven with extremely low tire vehicle and stand in a safe place, away pressure from traffic and clear of the vehicle. — when the tire has come off the JVE0122X inside or the outside of the WARNING wheel. Getting emergency tire puncture — when the tire wheel is da- Make sure the parking brake is se- repair kit maged curely applied and the manual trans- Take out the emergency tire puncture mission is shifted into R (Reverse) or repair kit located under the cargo room — when two or more tires are the automatic transmission into P flat or in the trunk. The repair kit consists of (Park). the following items: . Never repair tires when the vehi- Tire sealant bottle Stopping the vehicle cle is on a slope, ice or slippery Air compressor* 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road areas. This is hazardous. Speed restriction sticker and away from traffic. . Never repair tires if oncoming *: The compressor shape may differ 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. traffic is close to your vehicle. depending on the models. Wait for professional road assis- 3. Park on a level surface and apply the NOTE: tance. parking brake. For models with the emergency tire 4. Automatic Transmission models: puncture repair kit, a spare tire, jack Move the shift lever to the P (Park) and rod are not equipped as standard. 6-10 In case of emergency These parts are dealer options. Contact attention. a NISSAN dealer about obtaining these . parts. See “Changing a flat tire (for Keep the repair compound out of models with spare tire)” (P.6-4) for the reach of children. usage of jacking tools and tire replace- . The emergency repair compound ment. may cause a malfunction of the Before using emergency tire punc- tire pressure sensors and cause the low tire pressure warning ture repair kit light to illuminate. Have the tire . If any foreign object (for example, a pressure sensor replaced as soon screw or nail) is embedded in the tire, as possible. do not remove it. . Check the expiration date of the NOTE: sealant (shown on the label attached Do not remove any nails or screws that to the bottle). Never use a sealant have penetrated the tire when perform- JVE0014X whose expiration date has passed. ing repairs. 1. Take out the speed restriction sticker Repairing tire from the air compressor*, then put it in a location where the driver can see WARNING it while driving. *: The compressor shape may differ depending on the models. Observe the following precautions when using the tire repair compound. CAUTION . Swallowing the compound is dangerous. Immediately drink as Do not put the speed restriction label much water as possible and seek on the steering wheel pad, the prompt medical assistance. speedometer or the warning light . Rinse well with lots of water if the locations. compound comes into contact with skin or eyes. If irritation persists, seek prompt medical In case of emergency 6-11 SCE0869 SCE0870 3. Remove the cap from the tire sealant 5. Remove the protective cap of the bottle, and screw the bottle clockwise hose and screw the hose securely onto the bottle holder. (Leave the onto the tire valve. Make sure that bottle seal intact. Screwing the bottle the pressure release valve is se- onto the bottle holder will pierce the curely tightened. Make sure that the seal of the bottle.) air compressor switch is in the OFF * 4. Remove the cap from the tire valve on ( ) position, and then insert its power SCE0868 the flat tire. plug into the power outlet in the vehicle. 2. Take the hose and the power plug out of the air compressor. Remove the cap of the bottle holder from the air compressor.

6-12 In case of emergency NOTE: and the tire cannot be repaired with The compressor tire pressure gauge this tire repair kit. It is recommended may show a pressure reading of 87 you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. psi (600 kPa) for about 30 seconds while inflating the tire. The pressure 7. When the tire pressure is at the gauge is indicating the pressure in- specified amount, turn the air com- side the sealant can. When the pressor off. If the pressure cannot be sealant has been injected into the inflated to the specified amount, the tire the pressure gauge will drop and air compressor can be turned off at indicate actual tire pressure. the minimum of 26 psi (180 kPa). Remove the power plug from the power outlet and quickly remove the WARNING hose from the tire valve. Attach the protective cap and valve cap. Properly . To avoid serious personal injury stow the emergency tire puncture SCE0871 while using the emergency tire repair kit in the trunk. puncture repair kit: 6. Push the ignition switch to the “ACC” position. Then turn the compressor — Securely tighten the compres- CAUTION switch to the ON (−) position and sor hose to the tire valve. Failure to do so can cause inflate the tire up to the pressure that To avoid serious personal injury is specified on the tire and loading the sealant to spray into the air and get into your eyes or when stowing the emergency tire information label affixed to the driver’s puncture repair kit: side center pillar if possible, or to the on the skin. . minimum of 26 psi (180 kPa). Turn the . Do not stand directly beside the Keep the sealant bottle screwed air compressor off briefly in order to damaged tire while it is being into the compressor. Failure to do check the tire pressure with the pres- inflated because of the risk of so can cause the sealant to spray sure gauge. the rupture. If there are any into the air and get into your eyes or on the skin. If the tire is inflated to higher than the cracks or bumps, turn the com- specified pressure, lower the tire pres- pressor off immediately. sure by releasing air with the pressure 8. Immediately drive the vehicle for 10 minutes or 2 miles (3 km) at a speed of release valve. If the tire pressure does not increase 50 MPH (80 km/h) or less. to 26 psi (180 kPa) within 10 minutes, the tire may be seriously damaged In case of emergency 6-13 9. After driving, make sure that the air After repairing tire visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as compressor switch is in the OFF posi- It is recommended you visit a NISSAN possible after using tire repair tion, then screw the hose securely dealer for tire repair/replacement as soon sealant. onto the tire valve. Check the tire as possible. pressure with the pressure gauge. The temporary repair is completed if the tire pressure does not drop. WARNING Make sure the pressure is adjusted to the pressure that is specified on the . After using Emergency Tire Sea- tire and loading information label lant to repair a minor tire punc- before driving. ture, do not drive the vehicle at 10. If the tire pressure drops, repeat the speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 steps from 5 to 9. If the pressure drops km/h). again or under 19 psi (130 kPa), the tire . Immediately after using Emer- cannot be repaired with this tire gency Tire Sealant to repair a repair kit. It is recommended you visit minor tire puncture, take your a NISSAN dealer for this servicing. vehicle to inspect, and repair or The sealant bottle and hose can not replace the tire. It is recom- be reused to repair another punctured mended you visit a NISSAN dealer tire. It is recommended you visit a for this service. The Emergency NISSAN dealer to purchase replace- Tire Sealant cannot permanently ments. seal a punctured tire. Continuing operation of the vehicle without a permanent tire repair can lead to a crash. . NISSAN recommends using only Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire Sealant provided with your vehicle. Other tire sealants may damage the valve stem seal which can cause the tire to lose air pressure. It is recommended you 6-14 In case of emergency JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster . Whenever working on or near a battery, the instructions and precautions battery, always wear suitable eye below must be followed. protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, WARNING or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump start- . If done incorrectly, jump starting ing. can lead to a battery explosion, . Do not attempt to jump start a resulting in severe injury or frozen battery. It could explode death. It could also damage your and cause serious injury. vehicle. . Your vehicle has an automatic . Explosive hydrogen gas is always engine cooling fan. It could come present in the vicinity of the on at any time. Keep hands and battery. Keep all sparks and other objects away from it. flames away from the battery. . Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Bat- tery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water. . Keep the battery out of the reach of children. . The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15 CAUTION

. Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (−) to body ground (as illustrated) — not to the battery. . Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.

SCE0791 5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes. 2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift 6. Keep the engine speed of the booster WARNING lever to the P (Park) position (Auto- vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and matic transmission models). Move the start the engine of the vehicle being shift lever to the N (Neutral) position jump started . Always follow the instructions below. (Manual transmission models). Switch Failure to do so could result in off all unnecessary electrical systems damage to the charging system and (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.). cause personal injury. CAUTION 3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with a Do not keep the starter motor en- 1. If the booster battery is in another firmly wrung out moist cloth to gaged for more than 10 seconds. If vehicle , position the two vehicles ( reduce explosion hazard. the engine does not start right away, and ) to bring their batteries into push the ignition switch to the OFF close proximity to each other. 4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated ( ? ? ? position and wait 10 seconds before Do not allow the two vehicles to ). trying again. touch.

6-16 In case of emergency PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

7. After starting your engine, carefully Do not attempt to start the engine by disconnect the negative cable and pushing. then the positive cable ( ? ? CAUTION ? ). CAUTION . Do not continue to drive if your 8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). vehicle overheats. Doing so could Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to . Automatic transmission models cause engine damage or a vehicle cover the vent holes as it may be fire. contaminated with corrosive acid. cannot be push-started or tow- started. Attempting to do so may . To avoid the danger of being 9. Put the battery cover on. cause transmission damage. scalded, never remove the radia- . Three way catalyst equipped tor cap while the engine is still models should not be started by hot. When the radiator cap is pushing since the three way cat- removed, pressurized hot water alyst may be damaged. will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. . Never try to start the vehicle by . towing it; when the engine starts, Do not open the hood if steam is the forward surge could cause coming out. the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic transmission models). Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (Manual transmission models). Do not stop the engine.

In case of emergency 6-17 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air WARNING conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high Be careful not to allow your hands, speed. hair, jewelry or clothing to come into 3. If engine overheating is caused by contact with, or get caught in, engine climbing a long hill on a hot day, run belts or the engine cooling fan. The the engine at a fast idle (approxi- engine cooling fan can start at any mately 1,500 rpm) until the tempera- time. ture gauge indication returns to normal. 7. After the engine cools down, check 4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen the coolant level in the reservoir with for steam or coolant escaping from the engine running. Add coolant to the radiator before opening the hood. the reservoir if necessary. Have your (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn vehicle repaired. It is recommended off the engine.) Do not open the hood you visit a NISSAN dealer for this further until no steam or coolant can service. be seen. 5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine. 6-18 In case of emergency TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro- . Always attach safety chains be- vincial in Canada) and local regulations fore towing. for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your For information about towing your vehi- vehicle. Towing instructions are available cle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see from a NISSAN dealer. Local service op- “Flat towing” (P.10-22) of this manual. erators are familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.

WARNING

. Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. . Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

. When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and drivetrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.

In case of emergency 6-19 SCE0792

TOWING AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS- and expensive damage to the SION RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN drivetrain. If it is necessary to (except for NISMO models) tow the vehicle with the front NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be wheels raised, always use towing towed with the driving (rear) wheels off dollies under the rear wheels. the ground or place the vehicle on a flat . When towing rear wheel drive bed truck as illustrated. models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: Push the ignition switch to the CAUTION ACC or ON position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight- . Never tow automatic transmis- ahead position with a rope or sion models with the rear wheels similar device. on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious 6-20 In case of emergency — Four wheels on the ground: Speed: Below 70 MPH (112 km/h) Distance: Less than 500 miles (800 km) . If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the drivetrain.

JVE0415X

TOWING MANUAL TRANSMISSION . Push the ignition switch to the ON RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN (except position and turn off all acces- for NISMO models) sories. NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be . Always release the parking brake. towed with the driving (rear) wheels off . Move the transmission shift lever the ground or place the vehicle on a flat to the N (Neutral) position. bed truck as illustrated. . Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for CAUTION manual transmission models only: If you have to tow manual transmis- — Rear wheels on the ground: sion models with the rear wheels on Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 the ground (if you do not use towing km/h) dollies) or four wheels on the ground: Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km) In case of emergency 6-21 . Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle. . Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. . Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle. . Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point. SCE0836 If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, TOWING RECOMMENDED BY VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck etc., use a tow strap or other device NISSAN (NISMO models) vehicle) designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device. CAUTION WARNING Rocking a stuck vehicle Do not tow NISMO models with any To avoid vehicle damage, serious If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, wheel on the ground, or with the personal injury or death when reco- etc., use the following procedure: front or rear wheels raised, because vering a stuck vehicle: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control this may cause damage to the front . Contact a professional towing (VDC) system. bumper with an aerodynamic split- service to recover the vehicle if 2. Make sure the area in front and ter, rear bumper with an aerody- you have any questions regard- namic diffuser or exhaust pipes. behind the vehicle is clear of obstruc- ing the recovery procedure. tions. . Tow chains or cables must be NISSAN recommends that you place the 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left attached only to main structural to clear an area around the front tires. vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated. members of the vehicle. 6-22 In case of emergency 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. . Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (automatic transmission models) or 1st and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models). . Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion. . Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (automatic transmission models) or 1st and R (Reverse) (manual transmission models). . Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55 km/h). 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

WARNING

. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. . Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

In case of emergency 6-23 MEMO

6-24 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior...... 7-2 Cleaning interior ...... 7-5 Washing ...... 7-2 Air fresheners ...... 7-6 Soft top care and cleaning Floor mats ...... 7-6 (Roadster models) ...... 7-3 Seat belts ...... 7-7 Waxing ...... 7-4 Corrosion protection ...... 7-8 Removing spots ...... 7-4 Most common factors contributing to Underbody ...... 7-4 vehicle corrosion...... 7-8 Glass ...... 7-4 Environmental factors influence the rate Wheels ...... 7-4 of corrosion...... 7-8 Chrome parts ...... 7-5 To protect your vehicle from corrosion...... 7-8 Tire dressing ...... 7-5 CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of . For models with decorative stick- your vehicle, it is important to take proper CAUTION er, observe the following: care of it. — Wash dirt off the vehicle with a To protect the paint surface, wash your . Do not use car washes that use wet sponge and plenty of vehicle as soon as you can: acid in the detergent. Some car water. Then wipe the vehicle . after a rainfall to prevent possible washes, especially brushless gently using a soft cloth. damage from acid rain ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some — Do not apply direct water . after driving on coastal roads pressure, such as high-pres- . plastic vehicle components, caus- when contaminants such as soot, bird ing them to crack. This could sure sprayer, on the vehicle droppings, tree sap, metal particles or affect their appearance, and also body around the sticker. This bugs get on the paint surface could cause them not to function may cause the sticker edges . when dust or mud builds up on the properly. Always check with your to peel away or come off from surface car wash to confirm that acid is the vehicle. Whenever possible, store or park your not used. . For Roadster models, observe the vehicle inside a garage or in a covered . Do not wash the vehicle with following: area. strong household soap, strong — Do not use an automatic car When it is necessary to park outside, park chemical detergents, gasoline or wash or a high pressure car in a shady area or protect the vehicle with solvents. wash. The soft top may be a body cover. . Do not wash the vehicle in direct damaged. Be careful not to scratch the paint sunlight or while the vehicle body — Avoid applying direct water surface when putting on or removing is hot, as the surface may become pressure, such as high pres- the body cover. water-spotted. sured water from household WASHING . Avoid using tight-napped or hoses, on the lining of the soft Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet rough cloths, such as washing top and vehicle body. Avoid sponge and plenty of water. Clean the mitts. Care must be taken when applying continuous water on vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a removing caked-on dirt or other the parts around the soft top special vehicle soap or general purpose foreign substances so the paint and the windows. These may dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lu- surface is not scratched or da- cause water to leak into the kewarm (never hot) water. maged. inside of your vehicle.

7-2 Appearance and care Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty SOFT TOP CARE AND CLEANING of clean water. (Roadster models) Inside flanges, seams and folds on the Proper care and handling should be doors, hatches and hood are particularly observed to maintain a good appearance vulnerable to the effects of road salt. of the soft top. Improper care may cause Therefore, these areas must be regularly the top cloth’s surface to stiffen, stain, or cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in mat. Follow the instructions shown in this the lower edge of the door are open. section. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash It is not necessary to wash the soft top away road salt. every time you wash the vehicle body, but clean the top regularly before it becomes Avoid leaving water spots on the paint quite dirty. Leaving the soft top dirty or surface by using a damp chamois to dry soiled for a long period will cause dete- the vehicle. JVA0019X rioration to the quality of the top material. Remove dust or dirt on the soft top with a NISMO models soft brush or sponge, then rinse it with plenty of clean water. When the top is quite dirty, wash using a mild detergent, CAUTION such as a general cleaner especially made for a cloth top or a general purpose dish- Do not use an automatic car wash for washing liquid, mixed with clean, luke- NISMO models. The rear spoiler may warm (never hot) water. Rinse the top be damaged. again with plenty of clean water to remove all traces of soap.

CAUTION

. Do not use strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

Appearance and care 7-3 . . If glass cleaner gets on the soft Do not use a wax containing any top, immediately wash it off with abrasives, cutting compounds or clea- CAUTION clean water. ners that may damage the vehicle finish. . Do not apply direct water pres- . When cleaning the inside of the Machine compound or aggressive polish- sure, such as high pressured windows, do not use sharp- ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish water from household hoses, on edged tools, abrasive cleaners or may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. the lining of the soft top and chlorine-based disinfectant clea- vehicle body, as this may cause REMOVING SPOTS ners. They could damage the water to leak into the inside of Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, electrical conductors, radio an- your vehicle. insects, and tree sap as quickly as possi- tenna elements or rear window ble from the paint surface to avoid lasting defroster elements. After cleaning, always be sure the top and damage or staining. Special cleaning . If glass cleaner gets on the soft its storage are completely dry before products are available at a NISSAN dealer top, immediately wash it off with opening the top. Opening the top while or any automotive accessory stores. clean water (Roadster models). it is wet or damp may cause interior water UNDERBODY damage, water stains or mildew on the WHEELS top. In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. Wash the wheels when washing the WAXING This will prevent dirt and salt from build- vehicle to maintain their appearance. Regular waxing protects the paint surface ing up and causing the acceleration of . Clean the inner side of the wheels and helps retain new vehicle appearance. corrosion on the underbody and suspen- when the wheel is changed or the Polishing is recommended to remove sion. Before the winter period and again underside of the vehicle is washed. built-up wax residue and to avoid a in the spring, the underseal must be . Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents weathered appearance before reapplying checked and, if necessary, re-treated. or corrosion. Such damage may cause wax. GLASS loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choos- Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and ing the proper product. . dust film from the glass surfaces. It is NISSAN recommends that the road . Wax your vehicle only after a thorough normal for glass to become coated with a wheels be waxed to protect against washing. Follow the instructions sup- film after the vehicle is parked in the hot road salt in areas where it is used plied with the wax. sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will during winter. easily remove this film.

7-4 Appearance and care CLEANING INTERIOR

CHROME PARTS Occasionally remove loose dust from the CAUTION Clean chrome parts regularly with a non- interior trim, plastic parts and seats using abrasive chrome polish to maintain the a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. finish. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a Do not use abrasive cleaners when clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap washing the wheels. TIRE DRESSING solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft NISSAN does not recommend the use of cloth. Aluminum alloy wheels tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a Regular care and cleaning is required in coating to the tires to help reduce dis- Wash regularly with a sponge dampened order to maintain the appearance of the coloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing in a mild soap solution, especially during leather. is applied to the tires, it may react with winter months in areas where road salt is the coating and form a compound. This Before using any fabric protector, read used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not compound may come off the tire while the manufacturer’s recommendations. removed. driving and stain the vehicle paint. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat materi- If you choose to use a tire dressing, take al. the following precautions: CAUTION Use a cloth dampened only with water, to . Use a water-based tire dressing. The clean the meter and gauge lens. Follow the directions below to avoid coating on the tire dissolves more staining or discoloring the wheels: easily with an oil-based tire dressing. . . Do not use a cleaner that uses Apply a light coat of tire dressing to WARNING strong acid or alkali contents to help prevent it from entering the tire clean the wheels. tread/grooves (where it would be Do not use water or acidic cleaners difficult to remove). (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This . Do not apply wheel cleaners to . can damage the seat or occupant the wheels when they are hot. Wipe off excess tire dressing using a classification sensor. This can also The wheel temperature should be dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing affect the operation of the air bag the same as ambient tempera- is completely removed from the tire system and result in serious perso- ture. tread/grooves. . Allow the tire dressing to dry as nal injury. . Rinse the wheel to completely recommended by tire dressing manu- remove the cleaner within 15 facturer. minutes after the cleaner is applied.

Appearance and care 7-5 AIR FRESHENERS . It is recommended that you use CAUTION Most air fresheners use a solvent that only genuine NISSAN floor mats could affect the vehicle interior. If you use or equivalent floor mats that are . Never use benzine, thinner, or any an air freshener, take the following pre- specifically designed for use in similar material. cautions: your vehicle model and model . For cleaning, use a soft cloth, . Hanging-type air fresheners can year. dampened with water. Never use cause permanent discoloration when . Properly position the mats in the a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, they contact vehicle interior surfaces. floorwell using the floor mat po- thinner or any kind of solvent or Place the air freshener in a location sitioning hook. See “Floor mat paper towel with a chemical that allows it to hang free and not installation” (P.7-7). cleaning agent. They will scratch contact an interior surface. . Make sure the floor mat does not or cause discoloration to the lens. . Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip interfere with pedal operation. . Do not spray any liquid such as on the vents. These products can . Periodically check the floor mats water on the meter lens. Spraying cause immediate damage and disco- to make sure they are properly liquid may cause the system to loration when spilled on interior sur- installed. malfunction. faces. . After cleaning the vehicle interior, Carefully read and follow the manufac- . Small dirt particles can be abra- check the floor mats to make turer’s instructions before using air fresh- sive and damaging to the leather sure they are properly installed. surfaces and should be removed eners. promptly. Do not use saddle soap, FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning extend the life of your vehicle carpet and fluids, solvents, detergents or make it easier to clean the interior. Mats ammonia-based cleaners as they WARNING should be maintained with regular clean- may damage the leather’s natural ing and replaced if they become exces- finish. To avoid potential pedal interference sively worn. . Only use fabric protectors ap- that may result in a collision, injury proved by NISSAN. or death: . Do not use glass or plastic cleaner . NEVER place a floor mat on top of on meter or gauge lens covers. It another floor mat in the driver may damage the lens cover. front position or install them up- side down or backwards. 7-6 Appearance and care is properly positioned. 3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition in the OFF position and the shift lever in the P (Park) position (Automatic Transmission models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position (Manual Transmission models), fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position. See a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehi- SAI0044 cle. SAI0056 Positioning hooks Floor mat installation The illustration shows the location of Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat floor mat positioning hooks. positioning hook(s). The number and SEAT BELTS shape of the floor mat positioning hook (s) for each seating position varies de- The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping pending on the vehicle. them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry When installing genuine NISSAN floor completely in the shade before using mats, follow the installation instructions them. provided with the floor mat and the following: See “Seat belts” (P.1-10). 1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the mat grommet holes are WARNING aligned with the hook(s). 2. Secure the grommet holes into the Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat in the retractor. NEVER use bleach,

Appearance and care 7-7 CORROSION PROTECTION

dye, or chemical solvents to clean MOST COMMON FACTORS CON- Temperature the seat belts, since these materials TRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORRO- A temperature increase will accelerate may severely weaken the seat belt SION the rate of corrosion to those parts which webbing. . The accumulation of moisture-retain- are not well ventilated. ing dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Air pollution . Damage to paint and other protective Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in coatings caused by gravel and stone the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt chips or minor traffic accidents. use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disin- ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU- tegration of paint surfaces. ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM Moisture CORROSION Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on . Wash and wax your vehicle often to the vehicle body underside can acceler- keep the vehicle clean. ate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not . Always check for minor damage to the dry completely inside the vehicle, and paint and repair it as soon as possible. should be removed for drying to avoid . Keep drain holes at the bottom of the floor panel corrosion. doors open to avoid water accumula- Relative humidity tion. . Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of Check the underbody for accumula- high relative humidity, especially those tion of sand, dirt or salt. If present, areas where the temperatures stay above wash with water as soon as possible. freezing where atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt is used. CAUTION

. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum 7-8 Appearance and care cleaner. . Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended you consult a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-9 MEMO

7-10 Appearance and care 8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-16 Engine compartment check locations ...... 8-3 Cleaning ...... 8-16 VQ37VHR engine model ...... 8-3 Replacing ...... 8-16 Engine cooling system ...... 8-4 Brakes ...... 8-17 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-5 Self-adjusting brakes ...... 8-17 Changing engine coolant...... 8-5 Brake pad wear warning...... 8-17 Engine oil ...... 8-6 Fuses ...... 8-18 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-6 Engine compartment ...... 8-18 Changing engine oil and filter ...... 8-6 Passenger compartment ...... 8-19 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ...... 8-8 Intelligent Key battery replacement ...... 8-20 Power steering fluid ...... 8-8 Lights ...... 8-22 Brake and clutch fluid...... 8-9 Coupe ...... 8-22 Brake fluid ...... 8-9 Roadster ...... 8-23 Clutch fluid (Manual transmission models) ..... 8-10 Headlights ...... 8-23 Window washer fluid ...... 8-10 Exterior and interior lights ...... 8-24 Battery ...... 8-11 Wheels and tires ...... 8-26 Jump starting...... 8-13 Tire pressure ...... 8-26 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-13 Tire labeling ...... 8-30 Drive belts ...... 8-14 Types of tires ...... 8-32 Spark plugs...... 8-14 Tire chains...... 8-33 Replacing spark plugs...... 8-15 Changing wheels and tires ...... 8-33 Air cleaner ...... 8-15 Emergency tire puncture repair kit (if so equipped)...... 8-37 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or main- . If you must work with the engine injury, always disconnect the ne- tenance work on your vehicle, always running, keep your hands, cloth- gative battery cable before work- take care to prevent serious accidental ing, hair and tools away from ing near the fan. injury to yourself or damage to the moving fans, belts and any other . Because the fuel lines are under vehicle. The following are general precau- moving parts. high pressure even when the tions which should be closely observed. . It is advisable to secure or re- engine is off, it is recommended move any loose clothing and you visit a NISSAN dealer for WARNING remove any jewelry, such as service of the fuel filter or fuel rings, watches, etc. before work- lines. ing on your vehicle. . Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake . Always wear eye protection securely and block the wheels to whenever you work on your ve- CAUTION prevent the vehicle from moving. hicle. . For manual transmission models, If you must run the engine in an . Do not work under the hood while move the shift lever to N (Neutral). enclosed space such as a garage, the engine is hot. Turn the engine For automatic transmission mod- be sure there is proper ventilation off and wait until it cools down. els, move the shift lever to P for exhaust gases to escape. . Avoid direct contact with used (Park). . Never get under the vehicle while . engine oil and coolant. Impro- Be sure the ignition switch is in it is supported only by a jack. If it perly disposed engine oil, coolant, the OFF or LOCK position when is necessary to work under the and/or other vehicle fluids can performing any parts replace- vehicle, support it with safety damage the environment. Always ment or repairs. stands. conform to local regulations for . Never connect or disconnect the . Keep smoking materials, flame disposal of vehicle fluid. battery or any transistorized and sparks away from fuel tank component while the ignition and the battery. This “8. Do-it-yourself” section gives in- switch is in the ON position. . Your vehicle is equipped with an structions regarding only those items . Never leave the engine or auto- automatic engine cooling fan. It which are relatively easy for an owner to matic transmission related com- may come on at any time without perform. ponent harnesses disconnected warning, even if the ignition key is A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also while the ignition switch is in the in the OFF position and the en- available. (See “Owner’s Manual/Service ON position. gine is not running. To avoid Manual order information” (P.10-26).) 8-2 Do-it-yourself ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

JVC0785X VQ37VHR ENGINE MODEL 7. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmis- sion models) 1. Fuse/fusible link holder 8. Power steering fluid reservoir 2. Battery 9. Window washer fluid reservoir 3. Radiator filler cap 10 Air cleaner 4. Engine oil dipstick 11. Drive belt location 5. Engine oil filler cap 12. Engine coolant reservoir 6. Brake fluid reservoir 13. Fuse/fusible link holder Do-it-yourself 8-3 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% CAUTION equivalent may damage the en- Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ gine cooling system. Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide . Never use any cooling system . The life expectancy of the fac- year-round anti-freeze and coolant pro- additives such as radiator sealer. tory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles tection. The antifreeze solution contains Additives may clog the cooling (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional system and cause damage to any other type of coolant other engine cooling system additives are not the engine, transmission and/or than Genuine NISSAN Long Life necessary. cooling system. Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ- . When adding or replacing cooling Genuine NISSAN Long Life WARNING ant, be sure to use only Genuine Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the . Never remove the radiator or Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Gen- factory-fill coolant. Refer to the coolant reservoir cap when the uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ “9. Maintenance and schedules” engine is hot. Wait until the en- Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to section of this manual for more gine and radiator cool down. provide antifreeze protection to details. Serious burns could be caused −34°F (−37°C). If additional freeze by high pressure fluid escaping protection is needed due to from the radiator. See precau- weather where you operate your tions in “If your vehicle overheats” vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long (P.6-17) of this manual. Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) . concentrate following the direc- The radiator is equipped with a tions on the container. If an pressure type radiator cap. To equivalent coolant other than prevent engine damage, use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti- a genuine NISSAN radiator cap. freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to −34°F (−37°C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

8-4 Do-it-yourself Add coolant up to the MAX level . Tighten or hand cleaner as soon as pos- the cap securely after adding engine sible. coolant. . Keep coolant out of reach of If the cooling system requires coolant children and pets. frequently, have it checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for Engine coolant must be disposed of this service. properly. Check your local regulations. CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT It is recommended that major cooling system repairs be performed by a NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. JVM0087X Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL overheating. Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is running and after it reaches normal operating temperature. WARNING If the coolant level is below the MIN level , add coolant up to the MAX level . If the . To avoid the danger of being reservoir is empty, check the coolant level scalded, never change the cool- in the radiator when the engine is cold. ant when the engine is hot. If there is insufficient coolant in the . Never remove the radiator cap radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up when the engine is hot. Serious to the radiator filler cap above the radia- burns could be caused by high tor upper hose opening and also add it to pressure fluid escaping from the the reservoir up to the MAX level . Put on radiator. the filler cap above the radiator upper . Avoid direct skin contact with hose and with the reservoir cap open, used coolant. If skin contact is start the engine. Run the engine until it made, wash thoroughly with soap reaches normal operating temperature. Do-it-yourself 8-5 ENGINE OIL

ing. Do not overfill . CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. Vehicle set-up It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and break-in period, depending on the se- apply the parking brake. verity of operating conditions. 2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. 3. Turn the engine off and wait more CAUTION than 15 minutes. 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a Oil level should be checked regularly. suitable floor jack and safety jack Operating the engine with an insuffi- stands. cient amount of oil can damage the . engine, and such damage is not Place the safety jack stands under SDI2348 covered by warranty. the vehicle jack-up points. . A suitable adapter should be at- CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL tached to the jack stand saddle. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and 5. Remove the plastic engine under- apply the parking brake. cover. 2. Run the engine until it reaches oper- a. Remove the small plastic clips at ating temperature. the center of the undercover. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than b. Then remove the bolts that hold 15 minutes for the oil to drain back the undercover in place. into the oil pan. 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way. CAUTION 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be within the Make sure the correct lifting and range . If the oil level is below , support points are used to avoid remove the oil filler cap and pour vehicle damage. recommended oil through the open-

8-6 Do-it-yourself . Check your local regulations. Do not use excessive force. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the 9. Refill engine with recommended oil engine oil filter change is needed.) through the oil filler opening, and 4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter install the oil filler cap securely. wrench. Remove the oil filter by turn- See “Capacities and recommended ing it by hand. fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2) for drain 5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting and refill capacity. The drain and refill surface with a clean rag. capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always CAUTION use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine. Be sure to remove any old rubber 10. Start the engine and check for leak- gasket remaining on the mounting age around the drain plug and the oil SDI2335 surface of the engine. Failure to do filter. Correct as required. so could lead to engine damage. Engine oil and filter 11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level 1. Place a large drain pan under the 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with with the dipstick. Add engine oil if drain plug. clean engine oil. necessary. 2. Remove the oil filler cap. 7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a 3. Remove the drain plug with a slight resistance is felt, then tighten After the operation wrench and completely drain the oil. additionally more than 2/3 turn. 1. Install the engine undercover into Oil filter tightening torque: position as the following steps. 11 to 15 ft-lb a. Pull the center of the small plastic CAUTION (14.7 to 20.5 N·m) clip out. 8. Clean and re-install the drain plug b. Hold the engine undercover into Be careful not to burn yourself, as position. the engine oil is hot. with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. c. Insert the clip through the under- . Waste oil must be disposed of Drain plug tightening torque: cover into the hole in the frame, properly. 22 to 29 ft-lb then push the center of the clip in (29 to 39 N·m) to lock the clip in place. Do-it-yourself 8-7 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) POWER STEERING FLUID

d. Install the bolts that hold the un- When checking or replacement is re- dercover in place. Be careful not to quired, we recommend a NISSAN dealer strip the bolts or over-tighten them. for servicing. 2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground. CAUTION 3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly. . It is recommended that you use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. WARNING Do not mix with other fluids. . . Prolonged and repeated contact Using automatic transmission with used engine oil may cause fluid other than Genuine NISSAN skin cancer. Matic S ATF may cause deteriora- . tion in driveability and automatic Try to avoid direct skin contact transmission durability, and may SDI1765A with used oil. If skin contact is damage the automatic transmis- made, wash thoroughly with soap sion. Damage caused by the use Check the fluid level in the reservoir. or hand cleaner as soon as pos- of fluid other than as recom- The fluid level should be checked with the sible. mended is not covered by the engine off using the HOT range ( : HOT . Keep used engine oil out of reach NISSAN new vehicle limited war- MAX., : HOT MIN.) at fluid temperatures of children. ranty. of 122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range ( : COLD MAX., : COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C). If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Re- move the cap and fill through the opening.

8-8 Do-it-yourself BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

For further brake and clutch fluid information, see “Capacities and recom- CAUTION mended fluids/lubricants” (P.10-2) of this manual. . Do not overfill. . Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. WARNING

. Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake and clutch systems, and affect the vehicle’s SDI2025A stopping ability. . Clean the filler cap before remov- BRAKE FLUID ing. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the . Brake fluid and clutch fluid are fluid is below the MIN line or the brake poisonous and should be stored warning light comes on, add Genuine carefully in marked containers NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or out of the reach of children. equivalent DOT3 (except for NISMO models), or Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special ll fluid (for NISMO models) up to the MAX line . If fluid must be added CAUTION frequently, the system should be checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN Do not spill the fluid on painted dealer for this service. surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash the surface with water.

Do-it-yourself 8-9 WINDOW WASHER FLUID

WARNING

For NISMO models: Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II is the factory fill brake fluid. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) unit and other related parts were specially designed for this brake fluid. Using any other non-equivalent brake fluid may result in improper operation of the brake system which result in serious injury or death.

SDI1906A SDI2349 CLUTCH FLUID (Manual transmis- Fill the window washer fluid reservoir sion models) periodically. Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warn- Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the ing appears. fluid level is below the MIN line , add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, or equivalent DOT 4 up to the MAX line . lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour If fluid must be added frequently, the the window washer fluid into the tank system should be checked. It is recom- opening. mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this Add a washer solvent to the water for service. better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio. Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid. 8-10 Do-it-yourself BATTERY

. Keep the battery surface clean and Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN may be damaged. Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner dry. Clean the battery with a solution & Antifreeze or equivalent. of baking soda and water. . Make certain the terminal connec- To disconnect the negative (−) battery tions are clean and securely tightened. terminal, perform the procedure in the following order. Otherwise, the window CAUTION . If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 and the side roof panel may contact and days or longer, disconnect the nega- be damaged. . Do not substitute engine anti- tive (−) battery terminal cable to pre- freeze coolant for window vent discharging it. 1. Close the windows. washer solution. This may result NOTE: 2. Open the hood. in damage to the paint. Care should be taken to avoid situations 3. Close and lock all the doors. . Do not fill the window washer that can lead to potential battery dis- reservoir tank with washer fluid 4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery charge and potential no-start condi- concentrates at full strength. terminal. tions such as: Some methyl alcohol based 5. Securely close the hood. 1. Installation or extended use of elec- washer fluid concentrates may tronic accessories that consume To connect the negative (−) battery term- permanently stain the grille if battery power when the engine is inal, perform the procedure in the follow- spilled while filling the window not running (Phone chargers, GPS, ing order. Otherwise, the window and the washer reservoir tank. DVD players, etc.) side roof panel may contact and be . Pre-mix washer fluid concen- damaged. 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ trates with water to the manu- or only driven short distances. 1. Unlock and open the driver side door. facturer’s recommended levels Do not close the door. before pouring the fluid into the In these cases, the battery may need to 2. Open the hood. window washer reservoir tank. Do be charged to maintain battery health. not use the window washer re- 3. Connect the negative (−) battery term- servoir tank to mix the washer inal. Then close the hood. fluid concentrate and water. CAUTION 4. Fully open the driver side door window. When the battery cable is removed from the battery terminal, do not 5. Close the driver side door and the close either of front doors. The auto- window. matic window adjusting function will not work, and the side roof panel Do-it-yourself 8-11 . Keep the battery out of the reach WARNING of children.

. Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hy- drogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least DI0137MF 15 minutes and seek medical Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove attention. the battery cover if it is necessary). It . Do not operate the vehicle if the should be between the UPPER LEVEL fluid in the battery is low. Low and LOWER LEVEL lines. battery fluid can cause a higher If it is necessary to add fluid, add only load on the battery which can distilled water to bring the level to the generate heat, reduce battery life, indicator in each filler opening. Do not and in some cases lead to an overfill. explosion. 1. Remove the cell plugs . . When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. . Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. 8-12 Do-it-yourself VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump CAUTION starting” (P.6-15). If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may . Do not ground accessories di- have to be replaced. It is recommended rectly to the battery terminal. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. . Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

SDI1480E The variable voltage control system mea- sures the amount of electrical discharge 2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER from the battery and controls voltage LEVEL line. generated by the generator. If the side of the battery is not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell; the condition indicates OK and the conditions needs more to be added. 3. Tighten cell plugs . Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

Do-it-yourself 8-13 DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS

ess. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN WARNING dealer for this service. Be sure the engine and the ignition 2. Have the belt condition checked reg- switch are off and that the parking ularly for condition and tension in brake is engaged securely. accordance with the maintenance schedule shown in the “9. Mainte- nance and schedules” section. CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. SDI2119 VQ37VHR engine 1. Power steering fluid pump 2. Alternator 3. Crankshaft pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor 5. Drive belt auto-tensioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belts. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or loosen- 8-14 Do-it-yourself AIR CLEANER

with a damp cloth.

WARNING

. Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful SDI2020 when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. REPLACING SPARK PLUGS . Never pour fuel into the throttle If replacement is required, it is recom- body or attempt to start the mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this engine with the air cleaner re- service. moved. Doing so could result in serious injury. Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace the iridium- tipped spark plugs as frequently as the SDI2350 conventional type spark plugs since they Remove the retainers as illustrated and will last much longer. Follow the main- pull out the filter element . tenance schedule shown in the “9. Main- tenance and schedules” section, but do The filter element should not be cleaned not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance schedule shown in the “9. Always replace spark plugs with recom- Maintenance and schedules” section. mended or equivalent ones. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover Do-it-yourself 8-15 WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear SDI2359 after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. CAUTION CAUTION 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield. . After wiper blade replacement, Worn windshield wiper blades can 2. Push the release tab , and then return the wiper arm to its origi- damage the windshield and impair move the wiper blade down the wiper nal position; driver vision. arm while pushing the release tab otherwise it may be damaged to remove. when the hood is opened. 3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the . Make sure the wiper blades con- wiper arm until a click sounds. tact the glass; otherwise the arm 4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple may be damaged from wind is in the groove. pressure.

8-16 Do-it-yourself BRAKES

If the brakes do not operate properly, it is occasional brake squeak, squeal or other recommended you have the brakes noise may be heard. Occasional brake checked by a NISSAN dealer. noise during light to moderate stops is SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional infor- The disc-type brakes self-adjust every mation, see the maintenance schedule time the brake pedal is applied. shown in the “9. Maintenance and schedules” section. WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched SDI2362 scraping sound when the vehicle is in Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle motion. This scraping sound will first . This may cause improper windshield occur only when the brake pedal is washer operation. If the nozzle is clogged, depressed. After more wear of the brake remove any objects with a needle or small pad the sound will always be heard even pin . Be careful not to damage the if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have nozzle. the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear warning sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions,

Do-it-yourself 8-17 FUSES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. SDI1479A SDI1754 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the 5. If the fuse is open , replace it with a headlight switch is turned to OFF. new fuse . Spare fuses are stored in 2. Open the engine hood. the passenger compartment fuse box. 3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the cover. electrical system checked and re- 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller paired. It is recommended you visit a located in the passenger compart- NISSAN dealer for this service. ment fuse box. Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts. SDI2566

8-18 Do-it-yourself SDI2361 SDI2704

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT headlight switch is turned to OFF. Extended storage fuse switch 2. Open the fuse box lid. To reduce battery drain, the extended WARNING 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller storage fuse switch comes from the . factory switched off. Never use a fuse of a higher or lower 4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a Prior to delivery of your vehicle, the switch amperage rating than that specified new fuse. Spare fuses are stored in the is pushed in (switched on) and should on the fuse box cover. This could fuse box. always remain on. damage the electrical system or 5. If a new fuse also opens, have the If the extended storage fuse switch is not electronic control units or cause a electrical system checked and re- pushed in (switched on), the “SHIPPING fire. paired. It is recommended you visit a MODE ON, PUSH STORAGE FUSE” warning NISSAN dealer for this service. may appear on the vehicle information If any electrical equipment does not display. See “Warnings and alerts” (P.2-21). operate, check for an open fuse. If any electrical equipment does not 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed operate, remove the extended storage to the OFF or LOCK position and the fuse switch and check for an open fuse.

Do-it-yourself 8-19 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Replace the battery as follows: If the extended storage fuse switch 1. Remove the mechanical key from the malfunctions, or if the fuse is open, it key. is not necessary to replace the switch. In this case, remove the extended sto- 2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit rage fuse switch and replace it with a of the corner and twist it to separate new fuse of the same rating. the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing. How to remove the extended storage fuse switch: 3. Replace the battery with a new one. 1. To remove the extended storage fuse Recommended battery: switch, be sure the ignition switch is in CR2032 or equivalent the OFF or LOCK position. . Do not touch the internal circuit 2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the and electric terminals as doing so OFF position. could cause a malfunction. . 3. Remove the fuse box cover. Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the 4. Pinch the locking tabs found on contact points will seriously deplete each side of the storage fuse switch. the storage capacity. 5. Pull the storage fuse switch straight . Make sure that the + side faces the out from the fuse box . bottom case.

SDI2451

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts.

8-20 Do-it-yourself ference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device SDI2452 must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired 4. Align the tips of the upper and lower operation of the device. parts , and then push them together until it is securely closed . 5. Operate the buttons to check its operation. If you need any assistance for replacement, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- Do-it-yourself 8-21 LIGHTS

COUPE 1. Headlight (high- and low-beam) 2. Map light 3. Daytime running light (except for NISMO models) 4. Front parking light 5. Front side marker light 6. Front turn signal light 7. Side turn signal light (if so equipped) 8. High-mounted stop light 9. Cargo light 10. Rear combination light (rear turn signal/ tail/stop/side marker/back-up light) 11. License plate light 12. Rear fog light (if so equipped) 13. Daytime running light (NISMO models)

JVM0467X

8-22 Do-it-yourself ROADSTER 1. Headlight (high- and low-beam) 2. Map light 3. Daytime running light 4. Front parking light 5. Front side marker light 6. Front turn signal light 7. Side turn signal light 8. High-mounted stop light 9. Trunk light 10. Cargo area courtesy light 11. Rear combination light (rear turn signal/ tail/stop/side marker/back-up light) 12. License plate light 13. Rear fog light (if so equipped) HEADLIGHTS Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

JVM0140X

Do-it-yourself 8-23 Replacing EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. WARNING Headlight* High/Low beams (Xenon) 35 D2S HIGH VOLTAGE Front turn signal light* 28/8 7444NA When xenon headlights are on, they Front parking light* 5 W5W produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to Front side marker light* LED — modify or disassemble. We recom- Side turn signal light (if so equipped)* LED — mend you have your xenon head- Daytime running light* LED — lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. Rear combination light* For additional information, see back-up 16 W16W “Headlight and turn signal switch” (P.2-34). turn signal 21 WY21W stop/tail/side marker LED — Use the same number and wattage shown in the following chart as originally Rear fog light (if so equipped)* 21 W21W installed. License plate light* 5 W5W It is recommended you visit a NISSAN Map light 8 — dealer if replacement is required. Vanity mirror light* 1.8 — Cargo area courtesy light (Roadster)* 5 — Cargo light (Coupe)* 5 — Trunk light (Roadster)* 3.4 — High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement. NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.

8-24 Do-it-yourself Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

SDI2352 Map light

SDI1679

Do-it-yourself 8-25 WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P.6- Tire inflation pressure affect tire life and vehicle hand- 3). Check the pressure of the tires ling. TIRE PRESSURE (including the spare) often and al- Tire Pressure Monitoring System ways prior to long distance trips. WARNING (TPMS) The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the . This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Improperly inflated tires can Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It Tire and Loading Information label fail suddenly and cause an monitors tire pressure of all tires except under the “Cold Tire Pressure” accident. the spare. When the low tire pressure heading. The Tire and Loading In- . The Gross Vehicle Weight warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE formation label is affixed to the rating (GVWR) is located on PRESSURE warning appears on the vehi- driver side center pillar. Tire pres- the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. la- cle information display, one or more of sures should be checked regularly your tires is significantly under-inflated. bel. The vehicle weight ca- because: The TPMS will activate only when the pacity is indicated on the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH . Most tires naturally lose air over Tire and Loading Informa- (25 km/h). Also, this system may not time. tion label. Do not load your detect a sudden drop in tire pressure . Tires can lose air suddenly when vehicle beyond this capacity. (for example a flat tire while driving). driven over potholes or other Overloading your vehicle For more details, see “Low tire pressure objects or if the vehicle strikes warning light” (P.2-13), “Tire Pressure Mon- may result in reduced tire itoring System (TPMS)” (P.5-3) and “Tire a curb while parking. life, unsafe operating condi- Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P.6- The tire pressures should be tions due to premature tire 3). checked when the tires are cold. failure, or unfavorable hand- The tires are considered COLD after ling characteristics and the vehicle has been parked for 3 or could also lead to a serious more hours, or driven less than 1 accident. Loading beyond mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. the specified capacity may Incorrect tire pressure, including also result in failure of other under inflation, may adversely vehicle components. 8-26 Do-it-yourself . Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level. . For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Im- portant Tire Safety Informa- tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Book- let.

SDI2462 Tire and Loading Information label hicle loading information” Seating capacity: The max- (P.10-19). imum number of occu- Original size: The size of pants that can be seated the tires originally installed in the vehicle. on the vehicle at the fac- Vehicle load limit: See “Ve- tory.

Do-it-yourself 8-27 Cold tire pressure: Inflate 3. Remove the gauge. the tires to this pressure 4. Read the tire pressure on the when the tires are cold. gauge stem and compare it to Tires are considered COLD the specification shown on the after the vehicle has been Tire and Loading Information parked for 3 or more hours, label. or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If speeds. The recommended too much air is added, press the cold tire inflation is set by core of the valve stem briefly the manufacturer to pro- with the tip of the gauge stem to vide the best balance of release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air tire wear, vehicle handling, SDI1949 driveability, tire noise, etc., as needed. up to the vehicle’s GVWR. Checking the tire pressure 6. Install the valve stem cap. Tire size — see “Tire label- 1. Remove the valve stem cap from 7. Check the pressure of all other ing” (P.8-30). the tire. tires, including the spare. Spare tire size or compact 2. Press the pressure gauge spare tire size (if so squarely onto the valve stem. equipped) Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

8-28 Do-it-yourself Coupe models (except for NISMO mod- Roadster models: Coupe models (NISMO models): els): COLD TIRE COLD TIRE COLD TIRE INFLA- INFLA- INFLA- SIZE TION SIZE TION SIZE TION PRES- PRES- PRES- SURE SURE SURE 225/50R- 260 kPa, FRONT 245/40R- 240 kPa, 225/50R- 240 kPa, FRONT 18 95W 38 PSI ORIGINAL FRONT ORIGINAL 19 98Y 35 PSI 18 95W 35 PSI 220 kPa, TIRE ORIGINAL TIRE 245/40R- 245/40R- 220 kPa, 19 94W 32 PSI REAR TIRE 285/35R- 240 kPa, 19 94W 32 PSI ORIGINAL 245/45R- 260 kPa, 19 99Y 35 PSI 245/45R- 240 kPa, REAR 18 96W 38 PSI TIRE REAR 18 96W 35 PSI ORIGINAL SPARE T145/70- 420 kPa, ORIGINAL 275/35R- 220 kPa, 220 kPa, TIRE TIRE R18 107M 60 PSI TIRE 275/35R- 19 96W 32 PSI 32 PSI 19 96W T145/80- 420 kPa, T145/80- 420 kPa, SPARE D17 107M 60 PSI 60 PSI SPARE D17 107M TIRE T145/70- 420 kPa, TIRE T145/70- 420 kPa, R18 107M 60 PSI R18 107M 60 PSI

Do-it-yourself 8-29 height to width. 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. 5. Two-digit number (16): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. 6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because SDI1575 SDI1606 it is not required by law. Example Example 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should TIRE LABELING Tire size (example: not drive the vehicle faster than Federal law requires tire manufac- P215/60R16 94H) the tire speed rating. turers to place standardized infor- 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is mation on the sidewall of all tires. designed for passenger vehicles. This information identifies and de- (Not all tires have this informa- scribes the fundamental character- tion.) istics of the tire and also provides 2. Three-digit number (215): This the tire identification number (TIN) number gives the width in milli- for safety standard certification. meters of the tire from sidewall The TIN can be used to identify edge to sidewall edge. the tire in case of a recall. 3. Two-digit number (60): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

8-30 Do-it-yourself 3. Two-digit code: Tire size maximum permissible in- 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code flation pressure. (Optional) Maximum load rating 5. Four numbers represent the This number indicates the week and year the tire was built. maximum load in kilo- For example, the numbers 3103 grams and pounds that means the 31st week of 2003. If can be carried by the tire. these numbers are missing, then When replacing the tires on look on the other sidewall of the the vehicle, always use a tire. tire that has the same load Tire ply composition and rating as the factory installed tire. JVM0694X material Example The number of layers or Term of “tubeless” or “tube TIN (Tire Identification plies of rubber-coated fab- type” Number) for a new tire ric in the tire. Indicates whether the tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX Tire manufacturers also requires an inner tube XXXX) must indicate the materials (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”). 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De- in the tire, which include partment of Transportation”. steel, nylon, polyester, and The word “radial” The symbol can be placed others. The word “radial” is shown, above, below or to the left or Maximum permissible infla- if the tire has radial struc- right of the Tire Identification tion pressure ture. Number. This number is the greatest Manufacturer or brand 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s amount of air pressure name identification mark that should be put in the Manufacturer or brand tire. Do not exceed the name is shown.

Do-it-yourself 8-31 Other tire-related terminology: . Replacement tires may have a Summer tires In addition to the many terms that lower speed rating than the fac- NISSAN specifies summer tires on some are defined throughout this sec- tory equipped tires, and may not models to provide superior performance match the potential maximum on dry roads. Summer tire performance is tion, Intended Outboard Sidewall is vehicle speed. Never exceed the substantially reduced in snow and ice. (1) the sidewall that contains a maximum speed rating of the Summer tires do not have the tire trac- whitewall, bears white lettering or tire. tion rating M&S on the tire sidewall. bears manufacturer, brand and/or . Replacing tires with those not If you plan to operate your vehicle in model name molding that is higher originally specified by NISSAN snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recom- or deeper than the same molding could affect the proper operation mends the use of SNOW tires or ALL on the other sidewall of the tire, or of the TPMS. SEASON tires on all four wheels. . (2) the outward facing sidewall of For additional information re- Snow tires an asymmetrical tire that has a garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to particular side that must always “Tire Safety Information” (Cana- select tires equivalent in size and load face outward when mounted on a da) in the Warranty Information rating to the original equipment tires. If vehicle. Booklet. you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. TYPES OF TIRES All season tires Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires WARNING NISSAN specifies all season tires on some and may not match the potential max- models to provide good performance all imum vehicle speed. Never exceed the year, including snowy and icy road con- . When changing or replacing tires, maximum speed rating of the tire. ditions. All Season tires are identified by be sure all four tires are of the ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) If you install snow tires, they must be the same type (Example: Summer, All same brand, construction and tread pat- on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have Season or Snow) and construc- better snow traction than All Season tires tern on all four wheels, and the same tion. A NISSAN dealer may be able and may be more appropriate in some sizes as the original tires. to help you with information areas. For additional traction on icy roads, about tire type, size, speed rating studded tires may be used. However, and availability. some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and

8-32 Do-it-yourself provincial laws before installing studded use of a winter traction device (tire chains CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES tires. Skid and traction capabilities of or cables). The minimum clearances are studded snow tires, on wet or dry sur- determined using the factory equipped Tire rotation faces, may be poorer than that of non- tire size. Other types may damage your Tires cannot be rotated on this studded snow tires. vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re- vehicle because the front tires are TIRE CHAINS commended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links a different size than the rear tires. of the tire chain must be secured or A pin is on the front brake rotor to CAUTION removed to prevent the possibility of prevent the rear wheels from being whipping action damage to the fenders installed in place of the front Tire chains/cables should not be or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In wheels. The spare tire can be installed on 19-inch size tires. Doing installed in place of the front and so will cause damage to the vehicle. addition, drive at a reduced speed. Other- If you plan to use tire chains/cables, wise, your vehicle may be damaged and/ rear wheels. When installing the you should install 18-inch size tires or vehicle handling and performance may spare tire in the front wheel, the on your vehicle. be adversely affected. hole in the spare tire wheel must be Tire chains must be installed only on aligned with the pin on the brake Use of tire chains may be prohibited the rear wheels and not on the front rotor. according to location. Check the local wheels. laws before installing tire chains. When Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY installing tire chains, make sure they are USE ONLY spare tire. WARNING the proper size for the tires on your Do not use tire chains on dry roads. vehicle and are installed according to Driving with tire chains in such conditions . Retighten the wheel nuts the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. can cause damage to the various me- when the vehicle has been Use only SAE Class S chains. Class “S” chanisms of the vehicle due to some driven for 600 miles (1,000 chains are used on vehicles with re- overstress. stricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles km) (also in cases of a flat that can use Class “S” chains are designed tire, etc.). to meet the SAE standard minimum . For additional information clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body com- regarding tires, refer to “Im- ponent required to accommodate the portant Tire Safety Informa-

Do-it-yourself 8-33 tion” (US) or “Tire Safety In- cracks, bulging or deep cuts formation” (Canada) in the are found, the tire(s) should Warranty Information Book- be replaced. let. . The original tires have built- in tread wear indicators. When wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. . Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old SDI1663 checked by a qualified technician, because some tire Tire wear and damage damage may not be ob- Wear indicator vious. Replace the tires as Wear indicator location necessary to prevent tire marks. The locations are failure and possible perso- shown by “ ”, “TWI”, etc. nal injury. depending on tire types. . Improper service of the spare tire may result in ser- WARNING ious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the . Tires should be periodically spare tire, it is recom- inspected for wear, cracking, mended you visit a NISSAN bulging or objects caught in dealer for this service. the tread. If excessive wear, . For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Im- 8-34 Do-it-yourself portant Tire Safety Informa- . If your vehicle was originally Have your tires replaced and/or tion” (US) or “Tire Safety In- equipped with 4 tires that were TPMS system reset as soon as the same size and you are only possible. It is recommended you formation” (Canada) in the replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install visit a NISSAN dealer for these Warranty Information Book- the new tires on the rear axle. services. let. Placing new tires on the front . Replacing tires with those not axle may cause loss of vehicle originally specified by NISSAN Replacing wheels and tires control in some driving condi- could affect the proper operation tions and cause an accident and of the TPMS. When replacing a tire, use the same size, personal injury. tread design, speed rating and load . The TPMS sensor may be da- . If the wheels are changed for any carrying capacity as originally equipped. maged if it is not handled cor- reason, always replace with (See “Specifications” (P.10-9) for recom- rectly. Be careful when handling wheels which have the same off- mended types and sizes of tires and the TPMS sensor. set dimension. Wheels of a differ- wheels.) . ent off-set could cause prema- When replacing the TPMS sensor, ture tire wear, degrade vehicle the ID registration may be required. It is recommended you WARNING handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration. . The use of tires other than those discs/drums. Such interference . Do not use a valve stem cap that recommended or the mixed use can lead to decreased braking is not specified by NISSAN. The of tires of different brands, con- efficiency and/or early brake valve stem cap may become struction (bias, bias-belted or ra- pad/shoe wear. See “Wheels and stuck. dial), or tread patterns can tires” (P.10-10) of this manual for adversely affect the ride, braking, wheel off-set dimensions. . Be sure that the valve stem caps handling, ground clearance, . Since the spare tire is not are correctly fitted. Otherwise the body-to-tire clearance, tire chain equipped with the TPMS, when a valve may be clogged up with dirt clearance, speedometer calibra- spare tire is mounted or a wheel and cause a malfunction or loss tion, headlight aim and bumper is replaced, the TPMS will not of pressure. height. Some of these effects function and the low tire pressure . Do not install a deformed wheel may lead to accidents and could warning light will flash for ap- or tire even if it has been repaired. result in serious personal injury. proximately 1 minute. The light Such wheels or tires could have will remain on after 1 minute. structural damage and could fail Do-it-yourself 8-35 without warning. Care of wheels tires, as indicated on the Tire . The use of retread tire is not See “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2) for details and Loading Information label. recommended. about care of the wheels. For Tire and Loading Information . label location, see “Tire and Load- For additional information re- Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY ing Information label” in the index garding tires, refer to “Important (T-type) spare tire) (if so equipped) of this manual. Tire Safety Information” (US) or . “Tire Safety Information” (Cana- Observe the following precautions if the With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY da) in the Warranty Information T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise spare tire installed do not drive Booklet. your vehicle could be damaged or in- your vehicle at speeds faster than volved in an accident. 50 MPH (80 km/h). . When driving on roads covered Wheel balance with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle WARNING USE ONLY spare tire should be handling and tire life. Even with regular . used on the front wheels and use, wheels can get out of balance. The T-type spare tire should be original tire used on the rear Therefore, they should be balanced as used for emergency use. It should wheels (drive wheels). Use tire required. be replaced with the standard tire chains only on the two rear origi- at the first opportunity to avoid Wheel balance service should be per- nal tires. possible tire or differential da- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. . mage. Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE Spin balancing the wheels on the vehi- . ONLY spare tire will wear at a cle could lead to mechanical damage. Drive carefully while the TEMPOR- faster rate than the standard tire. ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in- For additional information regarding tires, Replace the spare tire as soon as stalled. Avoid sharp turns and refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa- the tread wear indicators appear. abrupt braking while driving. tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” . . Do not use the spare tire on other (Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Infor- Periodically check spare tire in- vehicles. mation Booklet. flation pressure. Always keep the . pressure of the TEMPORARY USE Do not use more than one spare ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 tire at the same time. kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure of the full size spare tire (if so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard 8-36 Do-it-yourself CAUTION

. Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle. . Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

EMERGENCY TIRE PUNCTURE RE- PAIR KIT (if so equipped) The emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emergency Tire Sealant) is supplied with the vehicle instead of a spare tire. It can be used to temporarily repair minor tire punctures. If possible, have the vehicle towed to a facility that can repair or replace the flat tire. Using the emergency tire puncture repair kit may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensor and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. See “Flat tire” (P.6-3) for more details. Do-it-yourself 8-37 MEMO

8-38 Do-it-yourself 9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirement ...... 9-2 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-6 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Additional maintenance items for severe Scheduled maintenance ...... 9-2 operating conditions ...... 9-6 Where to go for service ...... 9-2 Standard maintenance ...... 9-7 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Emission control system maintenance ...... 9-8 Explanation of general maintenance items ...... 9-2 Chassis and body maintenance ...... 9-11 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...... 9-5 Maintenance under severe Emission control system maintenance...... 9-5 driving conditions ...... 9-13 Chassis and body maintenance ...... 9-6 Maintenance log ...... 9-14 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation nance is essential to maintain your vehi- of the vehicle, general maintenance The maintenance items listed in this should be performed regularly as pre- cle in good mechanical condition, as well section are required to be serviced at as its emission and engine performance. scribed in this section. If you detect any regular intervals. However, under severe unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be It is the owner’s responsibility to make driving conditions, additional or more sure to check for the cause, or it is sure that the scheduled maintenance, as frequent maintenance will be required. recommended to have a NISSAN dealer well as general maintenance, is per- WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE do it promptly. In addition, it is recom- formed. If maintenance service is required or your mended you visit a NISSAN dealer if you As the vehicle owner, you are the only one vehicle appears to malfunction, have the think that repairs are required. who can ensure that your vehicle receives systems checked and serviced. It is re- When performing any checks or mainte- the proper maintenance. You are a vital commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for nance work, closely observe “Mainte- link in the maintenance chain. this service. nance precautions” (P.8-2) of this manual. GENERAL MAINTENANCE NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAIN- General maintenance includes those cialists and are kept up to date with the TENANCE ITEMS items which should be checked during latest service information through tech- normal day-to-day operation. They are nical bulletins, service tips and training Additional information on the following essential for proper vehicle operation. It is programs. They are completely qualified items with “*” is found in the “8. Do-it- your responsibility to perform these pro- to work on NISSAN vehicles before work yourself” section of this manual. cedures regularly as prescribed. begins. Outside the vehicle Performing general maintenance checks You can be confident that a NISSAN The maintenance items listed here should requires minimal mechanical skill and dealer’s service department can perform be performed from time to time, unless only a few general automotive tools. the service needed to meet the mainte- otherwise specified. nance requirements on your vehicle. These checks or inspections can be done Doors and engine hood: Check that all by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you doors and the engine hood, operate prefer, a NISSAN dealer. properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules When driving in areas using road salt or you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, your vehicle is held securely with the shift other corrosive materials, check lubrica- there may be a need for wheel alignment. lever in the P (Park) position without tion frequently. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at applying any brakes. Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular normal highway speeds, wheel balancing Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop may be needed. operation. If the brake pedal suddenly lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and For additional information regarding tires, goes down further than normal, the pedal other lights are all operating properly and refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa- feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take installed securely. Also check headlight tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” longer to stop, have your vehicle checked aim. (Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Infor- immediately. It is recommended you visit Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When mation Booklet. a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. checking the tires, make sure no wheel Windshield: Clean the windshield on a nuts are missing, and check for any loose regular basis. Check the windshield at Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. least every six months for cracks or other the vehicle to one side when applied. Tire rotation*: Tires cannot be rotated, as damage. Have a damaged windshield Parking brake: Check the parking brake the front tires are a different size from the repaired by a qualified repair facility. operation regularly. The vehicle should be rear tires and the direction of wheel Windshield wiper blades*: Check for securely held on a fairly steep hill with rotation is fixed in each tire. cracks or wear if they do not wipe only the parking brake applied. If the Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge properly. parking brake needs adjusted, it is re- often and always prior to long distance commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in Inside the vehicle this service. all tires, including the spare, to the The maintenance items listed here should Seats: Check seat position controls such pressure specified. Check carefully for be checked on a regular basis, such as as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to damage, cuts or excessive wear. when performing scheduled mainte- ensure they operate smoothly and that all Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) nance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. latches lock securely in every position. transmitter components: Replace the Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for Check that the head restraints move up TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve smooth operation and make sure the and down smoothly and that the locks (if core and cap when the tires are replaced pedal does not catch or require uneven so equipped) hold securely in all latched due to wear or age. effort. Keep the floor mat away from the positions. Wheel alignment and balance: If the pedal. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat vehicle should pull to either side while Automatic transmission P (Park) me- belt system (for example, buckles, an- driving on a straight and level road, or if chanism: On a fairly steep hill, check that chors, adjuster and retractors) operate

Maintenance and schedules 9-3 properly and smoothly, and are installed NOTE: mediately have the exhaust system in- securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, Care should be taken to avoid situations spected. It is recommended you visit a fraying, wear or damage. that can lead to potential battery dis- NISSAN dealer for this service. (See “Pre- Steering wheel: Check for changes in the charge and potential no-start condi- cautions when starting and driving” (P.5- steering conditions, such as excessive tions such as: 2) for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).) free play, hard steering or strange noises. 1. Installation or extended use of elec- Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for tronic accessories that consume Warning lights and chimes: Make sure fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the battery power when the engine is vehicle has been parked for a while. Water that all warning lights and chimes are not running (Phone chargers, GPS, operating properly. dripping from the air conditioner after use DVD players, etc.) is normal. If you should notice any leaks Windshield defroster: Check that the air 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for comes out of the defroster outlets prop- or only driven short distances. the cause and have it corrected immedi- erly and in sufficient quantity when oper- ately. ating the heater or air conditioner. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health. Power steering fluid level* and lines: Windshield wiper and washer*: Check Check the level when the fluid is cold, with that the wipers and washer operate Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure the engine off. Check the lines for proper properly and that the wipers do not that the brake and clutch fluid levels are attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. streak. between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of Under the hood and vehicle the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. The maintenance items listed here should level when the engine is cold. be checked periodically (for example, Make sure the hoses have no cracks, each time you check the engine oil or Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no deformation, rot or loose connections. refuel). belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Underbody: The underbody is frequently Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. Engine oil level*: Check the level after exposed to corrosive substances such as It should be between the MAX and MIN parking the vehicle on a level spot and those used on icy roads or to control lines. Vehicles operated in high tempera- turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 dust. It is very important to remove these tures or under severe condition require minutes for the oil to drain back into the substances, otherwise rust will form on frequent checks of the battery fluid level. oil pan. the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around Exhaust system: Make sure there are no the exhaust system. At the end of winter, loose supports, cracks or holes. If the the underbody should be thoroughly sound of the exhaust seems unusual or flushed with plain water, being careful to there is a smell of exhaust fumes, im- clean those areas where mud and dirt 9-4 Maintenance and schedules EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS may accumulate. For additional informa- The following descriptions are provided For recommended fuel, lubricants, tion, see “Cleaning exterior” (P.7-2). to give you a better understanding of the fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to Windshield washer fluid*: Check that scheduled maintenance items that “Capacities and recommended fluids/ there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. should be regularly checked or replaced. lubricants” (P.10-2) of this manual. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAIN- requires service. TENANCE In addition to scheduled maintenance, Drive belts*: your vehicle requires that some items be Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying checked during normal day-to-day op- or cracking and for proper tension. Re- eration. Refer to “General maintenance” place any damaged drive belts. (P.9-2). Engine air filter: Items marked with “*” are recommended Replace at specified intervals. When driv- by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi- You are not required to perform main- tions, check/replace the filter more tenance on these items in order to frequently. maintain the warranties which come with your vehicle. Other maintenance items Engine coolant*: and intervals are required. Replace coolant at the specified interval. When applicable, additional information When adding or replacing coolant, be can be found in the “8. Do-it yourself” sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long section of this manual. Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (Refer to NOTE: “Engine cooling system” (P.8-4) to deter- NISSAN does not advocate the use of mine the proper mixture for your area.) non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- NOTE: ing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a Mixing any other type of coolant or the NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- use of non-distilled water may reduce ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- the recommended service interval of proved chemicals or solvents, the use of the coolant. which has not been validated by NISSAN. Maintenance and schedules 9-5 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Engine oil and oil filter: Exhaust system: To help ensure smooth, safe and eco- Replace engine oil and oil filter at the Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler nomical driving, NISSAN provides two specified intervals. For recommended oil and hangers for leaks, cracks, deteriora- maintenance schedules that may be grade and viscosity refer to “Capacities tion, and damage. Tighten connections or used, depending upon the conditions in and recommended fluids/lubricants” replace parts as necessary. which you usually drive. These schedules (P.10-2). contain both distance and time intervals, In-cabin microfilter: up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 Evaporative Emissions Control Vapor Replace at specified intervals. When driv- months. For most people, the odometer Lines*: ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi- reading will indicate when service is Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. tions, replace the filter more frequently. needed. However, if you drive very little, Tighten connections or replace parts as Steering gear and linkage, axle and your vehicle should be serviced at the necessary. suspension parts: regular time intervals shown in the schedule. Fuel lines*: Check for damage, looseness, and leak- Check the fuel hoses, piping and connec- age of oil or grease. Under severe driving After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 tions for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. conditions, inspect more frequently. months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. Tighten connections or replace parts as Tire rotation: necessary. ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Tires cannot be rotated, as the front tires Spark plugs: are a different size from the rear tires and FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDI- Replace at specified intervals. Install new the direction of wheel rotation is fixed in TIONS plugs of the type as originally equipped. each tire. Additional maintenance items for se- CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil: vere operating conditions; should be performed on vehicles that are driven Visually inspect for signs of leakage at Brake lines and cables: under especially demanding conditions. specified intervals. Visually inspect for proper installation. Additional maintenance items should be Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, performed if you primarily operate your and signs of leaking. Replace any deterio- vehicle under the following conditions: rated or damaged parts immediately. . Repeated short trips of less than 5 Brake pads and rotors: miles (8 km). Check for wear, deterioration and fluid . Repeated short trips of less than 10 leaks. Replace any deteriorated or da- miles (16 km) with outside tempera- maged parts immediately. tures remaining below freezing.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules STANDARD MAINTENANCE

. Operating in hot weather in stop-and- The following tables show the standard go “rush hour” traffic. maintenance schedule. Depending upon . Extensive idling and/or low speed weather and atmospheric conditions, driving for long distances, such as varying road surfaces, individual driving police, taxi or door-to-door delivery habits and vehicle usage, additional or use. more frequent maintenance may be re- . Driving in dusty conditions. quired. . Driving on rough, muddy or salt After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 spread roads. months, continue maintenance at the . Using a car-top carrier. same mileage/time intervals. NOTE: For vehicles operated in Canada, both standard and severe maintenance items should be performed at every interval.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles × 1,000 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, (km × 1,000) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 kilometers or months, Months (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) whichever comes first. 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve See NOTE (7) clearance*

9-8 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles × 1,000 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, (km × 1,000) 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 kilometers or months, Months (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) whichever comes first. 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve See NOTE (7) clearance*

NOTE: miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After (6) Replace spark plug when the plug (1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 first replacement, replace every 75,000 gap exceeds 0.055 in (1.4 mm) even if months, inspect every 10,000 miles miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. within specified replacement mileage. (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life (7) Periodic maintenance is not re- drive belts if found damaged. Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent quired. However, if valve noise in- (2) If operating mainly in dusty condi- with proper mixture ratio of 50% anti- creases, inspect valve clearance. tions, more frequent maintenance may freeze and 50% demineralized or dis- *: Maintenance items and intervals with be required. tilled water. Mixing any other type of “*” are recommended by NISSAN for (3) Periodic maintenance is not re- coolant or the use of non-distilled water reliable vehicle operation. The owner quired. may reduce the life expectancy of the does not need to perform such main- factory fill coolant. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 tenance in order to maintain the emis- Maintenance and schedules 9-9 sion warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-10 Maintenance and schedules CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles × 1,000 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at of miles, kilo- (km × 1,000) 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 meters or months, whichever Months (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) comes first. 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors$ II I I I I

Brake fluid$ RR R

Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1)

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I and differential gear oil Steering gear and linkage, II I axle and suspension parts$ Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Exhaust system$ II I

In-cabin microfilter R R R R

Intelligent Key battery R R R R

Maintenance and schedules 9-11 MAINTENANCE OPERATION Miles × 1,000 MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at of miles, kilo- (km × 1,000) 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 meters or months, which- Months (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) ever comes first. 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Brake lines & cables I I I I I I

Brake pads & rotors$ II II I I

Brake fluid$ RR R

Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1)

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I & differential gear oil Steering gear & linkage, axle II I & suspension parts$ Tire rotation See NOTE (3) $ Exhaust system II I In-cabin microfilter R R R R

Intelligent Key battery R R R R

NOTE: (3) Refer to “Tire rotation” under “Gen- Maintenance items with “$” should be eral maintenance” (P.9-2). performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions” (P.9-13). (1) Periodic maintenance is not required. (2) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

9-12 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the Maintenance item Maintenance opera- Maintenance interval preceding pages are for normal operating tion conditions. If the vehicle is mainly oper- Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 ated under severe driving conditions as months shown below, more frequent mainte- Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 nance must be performed on the follow- months ing items as shown in the table. Steering gear & linkage, axle & Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 Severe driving conditions suspension parts months . Repeated short trips of less than 5 Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months miles (8 km). . Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. . Operating in hot weather in stop-and- go “rush hour” traffic. . Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use. . Driving in dusty conditions. . Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads. . Using a car-top carrier. Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance and schedules 9-13 MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles or 6 Months 10,000 Miles or 12 Months 15,000 Miles or 18 Months

Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name:

Date: Date: Date:

Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: